Pipug

Version 5 Release 15
Piping Design
Piping Design
Preface
Using This Guide
What's New?
Getting Started
Entering the Workbench
Set Correct Working Units and Grid
Changing the Current Axis
Creating a Run
Placing a Part on a Run
Updating Documents
Saving Documents
User Tasks
Managing Piping Lines
Creating a Line ID
Renaming a Line ID
Select/Filter Line IDs
Deleting a Line ID
Importing Line IDs
Modify the Properties of a Line ID
Querying a Line ID or its Members
Transfer Members of a Line ID
Merging Line IDs
Routing Runs
Routing a Run
Routing with Defined Nodes
Routing from the End of a Routable
Branching a Run
Routing a Run at a Slope
Auto-route Between Equipment
Route a Run Within a Pathway
Routing from an Item Reservation
Display Information About Routables
Checking Turn Radius Errors
Modifying Runs
Using the Definition Dialog Box
Changing a Section
Changing the Angle of a Segment
Moving Nodes
Align Adjacent Segments
Page 1
Piping Design
Make Segment Parallel to Reference Plane

Make Segment Parallel to Compass Base Plane
Make Segment Parallel to Z Axis
Fit Segment for Parts Assembly
Position Segment Relative to a Plane
Create an Offset Connection Between Segments
Create a Closed Loop Run
Open a Closed Run
Adjust Extremities of a Run
Transfer Run to Another Document
Connecting Elements
Connecting Parts
Disconnecting Parts
Connections Between Work Packages
Managing Publications
Manipulating Objects
Search for Objects in a Document
Aligning Elements
Distributing Elements
Rotate Resource Using the Definition Dialog Box
Snap Resources Together
Quick Snap Resources
Snap and Rotate a Resource
Using Offset Planes and Advanced Offset Planes
Generating Detail Information
Disable/Enable Manipulation Handles
Using Quick Translate to Move Objects
Activating the Product or Parent
Transfer Elements to New Document
Query/modify properties of an object
Edit or Display Properties of an Object
Changing the Display Order of Properties
Filter Shown Properties of an Object
Renaming Objects
Changing the Size or Spec of a Part
Assigning Values to Parts
Placing & Modifying a Piping Part
Placing Parts
Rotate a Piping Part
Flipping a Part
Inserting a Part
Move/Rotate In-Line Parts
Placing Transitional Objects On a Run
Detecting Clash in Parts Placement
Switching Graphic Representations
Placing a Part in a Sub-document
Query or Convert Auto Parts
Flow Direction
Display Flow Direction
Change Flow Direction
Page 2
Piping Design
Managing Spools
Creating a Spool
Display and Edit Properties of a Spool
Select/Query a Spool or its Members
Transfer a Spool
Add/Remove Members in a Spool
Rename a Spool
Delete a Spool
Analyzing Networks
Analyze Network for Connections
Viewing Related Objects
Routing Tasks
Aligning a Run to an Existing Surface
Routing in 3D with the Compass
Routing at an Offset of a Routable
Edgeline: Routing Parallel to a Run
Route a Run along a Spline
Fix broken routables
Building Piping Parts
Create a Part with Specified Type
Define Graphic Representations for a Part
Define Properties for a Part
Change the Parameters of a Part
Defining the Part Type
Building a New Unique Reference
Generating Resolved Parts from Parametric Parts
Requirements for Building Parts
Using ENOVIA
Creating a Product
Importing a Product
Using Work Packages
Saving a Work Package
Organizing Work Packages
Creating and Modifying Connectors
Create Connectors
Associate Attributes to a Connector
Use the Compass to Manipulate Connectors
Modifying or Deleting Connectors
Creating Duplicate Connectors
Using the Plane Manipulator
Hide/Show Connectors
Transferring a Document to Another Site
Migrating V4 Models to V5
Creating a Directory Structure
Exporting the V4 Project Registration Model
Exporting the V5 Feature Dictionary
Comparing the XML Output
Importing the XML Output
Exporting V4 Standards Data
Exporting V4 Catalog Parts
Page 3
Piping Design
Exporting V4 Piping Lines

Creating/Modifying Setup Data
Migrating the V4 Model
Exporting Parts from a V4 Model
Importing Parts from Other Software
Creating an Isometric Drawing
Setup Requirements
Creating an Isometric Drawing from a 3-D Document
Generating a PCF File
Using Mapping Tables
Drawing Production
Drawing Production Settings
Generating a Drawing
Defining 2D Endstyle Symbols
Schematic Driven Design
Placing Parts Using a Schematic
Creating a Run Using a Schematic
Analyzing Schematic Driven Design
Penetration Management Usage
Querying for Penetrations
Create a Cutout Sketch
Adding an Object to a Penetration
Hole Placement
Placing a Hole on a Part
Modifying a Hole
Querying Hole Properties
Working with Bendables
Extract Bending Data from Bendable Pipes and Tubes
Design Checks for Bendable Pipes and Tubes
Computed Attributes
Piping
Customizing
Customizing Settings
ISOGen Setup
(3-D) Setting Up the Application
Project Resource Management
Using the PRM Command
Understanding Project Resource Management
Checking a PRM File for Errors
Organizing Resources in PRM File
List of PRM Resources and Flags
Feature Dictionary: Creating Classes and Attributes
Mapping the Functional Physical Classes
Defining User Names for Classes & Attributes
Comparing Feature Dictionaries
Opening a Document Without CATfct File
Cache Mode
Working in Cache Mode
Penetration Management
Page 4
Piping Design
Penetration Management Setup

Creating Reports
Defining the Report Format
Generating a Report
Generating a Report from a Macro
Creating a Toolbar Shortcut for a Macro
Generate a Bolt Report
Catalogs
Creating a Catalog
Creating Sub-Catalogs
Modifying a Catalog
Creating a Specifications Catalog
Line ID Catalogs
Displaying Line ID Properties in Catalog
Modifying/Updating a Lines Catalog
Standards and Design Rules
Rules Overview
Modifying Design Rules
Creating and Modifying Standards
Adding an Attribute to a Standard
Modifying the Object Naming Rules
Add Computed Attribute to Object Name
Adding an Attribute to General Design Rules
Adding a New Part Size
Resource Map
Using Knowledgeware Checks
Using Knowledgeware Packages
Importing Checks from Knowledgeware
(3D) Opening a Sample Document
Checking a Document for Design Errors
Defining Options
Finding Sample Data on Various Platforms
Specifications Tree
Working with ENOVIA
Setup for Enovia
Using Catalogs
Resources That Must be Placed in ENOVIA
Workbench Description
Design Create Toolbar
Fabricate Toolbar
Build Create Toolbar
Piping Line Management Toolbar
Design Modify Toolbar
General Environment Toolbar
General Design Toolbar
Rename Toolbar
Glossary
Index
Page 5
Piping Design
Page 6
Preface
The Piping Design product provides customers with a complete set of tools to create, modify, analyze and
manage physical designs of piping systems using industry standard conventions, terminology, and practices.
The tools are focused on creating an intelligent piping layout that captures the design intent.
Intelligent piping design allows users to create and validate their designs more productively and, in addition,
reuse the captured intelligence for downstream design processes.
The product supports the definition of piping configurations. This involves general layout tools for intelligent
placement of parts, and automatic placement of components such as bends, elbows, tees, and reducers. A full
set of routing and parts placement methods allows users to choose the one that is right for a given situation.
Specification driven design is available to ensure compliance with the project standard. Function driven design is
used to ensure that the design intent is available for any modification scenario.
In addition, full capabilities are provided to quickly query design information, and generate appropriate report
information. These design tools are provided via a highly intuitive and productive interface that allows the user
to create, modify, and manage designs quickly.
The product includes comprehensive and flexible setup functions that will provide a rapid way to define project
standards and catalogs that get the users into production quickly. This product comes with a starter piping parts
catalog based on the American National Standard Institute (ANSI).
Together with other products, the Piping Design product gives users the power to manage their piping systems
from initial design to ship or plant operations, in a completely flexible way.
Using This Guide
Piping Design
Page 7
Using This Guide

This book describes how to use the Piping Design product. Before you read it, you should be familiar with
basic Version 5 concepts such as document windows, standard tool bars, and view tool bars.
To get the most out of this guide, you should start with the tutorial in the Getting Started section.
The remaining sections of the book describe in detail the procedures for using all of the features of the Piping
Design product. The procedures are divided into user tasks and customization sections.
Piping Design
Page 8
What's New?
New Functionality
You can transfer elements in a document to a new document or work package.
The import node points command allows you to predefine the node points of a run in a document and route
using that document.
A list of Knowledgeware computed attributes and methods, and their descriptions, is included.
A query function allows you to display all auto parts in your document. You can also convert auto parts into
"non auto parts".
Enhanced Functionality
Several changes have been made in schematic driven routing. These include the need to associate runs, and
explanations of the Create the Run and User Defined Path functions.
For generating a report, style sheets have been provided to allow you to control the looks of the generated
report.
Modifying or deleting connectors on the instance of a part is no longer allowed. You can only perform these
tasks on a reference or unique part.
There has been a modification in the interface for the task associating attributes to connectors, allowing you to
see which discipline a connector is associated with.
The Resize/Respec command has been modified, with several new features added, to provide more flexibility.
You can use the Display Alternate Path button in the Routing a Run function to see possible routing paths
between objects. The Create the Run button provides additional flexibility.
Piping Design
Page 9
Getting Started
The following short tutorial provides an introduction to the Piping Design product, It is intended to give you a
feel for the product's capabilities in a few step-by-step scenarios, which are listed below.
Set Correct Working Units and Grid
Creating a Run
Updating Documents
Saving Documents
These tasks can be completed in about 15 minutes.

Certain functions will not work without setting up directory paths and options. The system administrator
should refer to the tasks under Understanding Project Resource Management as well as platform
dependent sample data in Finding sample data on various platforms.
The task Setting Up the Application (in the Customizing section) describes the various steps you have to
take, and the order in which you have to do them, to set up Piping Design.
Piping Design

This task shows you how to enter the Piping Design workbench.
1. On the menu bar click Start, select Equipment & Systems and then Piping Design.
2. The Piping Design workbench displays.
Before using many tasks you will need to set your options correctly. Refer to the Customizing section.
Page 10
Piping Design
Page 11
Set Working Units and Grid

This task describes how to set your working units and grid.
1.
Select Tools - Options and expand the General node. Select Parameters and Measure then
click the Units tab.
2.
Under Magnitudes, select Length and click the drop down arrow to set the unit of measure you will
be using; Foot, Meter, etc.
3.
Now, scroll down the list in Magnitudes and select Area. Select the unit of measure you will be using
for area. Note: This is normally consistent with the Length standard.
4.
5.
To set the Grid Step, under Options, select Equipment & Systems and click on the General tab.
The
Enter a value for the Grid Step field; for example, 1 ft.
grid step is the increment used for snapping (to grid). Imagine a grid placed over your workspace,
consisting of squares. The value you enter in this field becomes the distance between the lines of
each square.
If you enter 1 ft then when routing the run will extend by 1 ft at a time. Runs begin, end and turn at
grid intersections (there are ways of overriding this). Similarly, when placing parts in free space (as
opposed to on a run), they will place at grid intersections.
The grid step setting will display in the General Environment toolbar at the bottom of the 3-D viewer.
You can change it in the toolbar during your session but the new value will only apply to your current
session. If you close the application and reopen it, the toolbar will again display the value in the
General tab page.
These will be your default settings and will remain in effect until you change them.
6.
Click the OK button to complete the customization of the working units.
Piping Design
Page 12

This task shows you how to change the current axis.
When you activate an object, the current axis is reset to the axis of that object. Changing the current
axis changes the reference point by which elements are routed and placed.
.
1. Click the Change Current Axis icon
2. Select the object you want to use as a reference.
3.
The axis for the selected object is displayed.

You can also change the current axis and place the compass on the object. The compass allows you
to manipulate that object. To do this click the Change Current Axis and Snap Compass button
and select the object. The axis and compass are both placed.
Page 13
Piping Design
Creating a Run
This task describes how to create a run. When you create a run you "reserve" space in your work area so that you
can later lay pipes, ducts, etc., and place parts. In the example below you will create a run in "free space". In
actual practice you will create runs in a much more controlled environment - the deck of a ship, or floor of a
house, for instance. In the example below it does not matter where you begin or end a run - but when you are
working on a project you will have to start and end at specific places, and your run will have to be a certain size
and shape. For more information on runs and routing see Routing a Run.
You will learn more about line IDs later, but you should know that a run is associated with a line ID.
A line ID is an organizational element that identifies the type and nominal size of the run (e.g., piping, 6 in.) but
may also include attributes such as pipe specification, design and operating temperature and pressure, insulation
thickness, etc. These properties of the line ID ensure that the parts you place meet the requirements of the line ID
and the intended design. Thus, when you make a run it is part of a line ID.
The line ID of your run is displayed on the upper toolbar on the left hand side.
To learn more, including how to select a line ID, see Managing Piping Lines.
.
1.
Click the Route a Run button
. The Run dialog box opens.
Note: If the Design Rule: Multiple Rule Found dialog box opens, this means there is more than one type of run
to choose from. For example, there could be multiple choices for Turn Radius, Diameter Factor or Number of
Miter Cuts. For this scenario the choice is unimportant because you are learning the fundamentals of creating a
basic run. Select from the table and click OK.
2.
In the Run dialog box select either Point-To-Point
or Orthogonal
for the routing Mode.
3.
. In
Click the Section button. The Section dialog box opens showing the available section types
Piping Design the section choices are No Section or Round Section. Leave this set to Round Section. Check to
make sure the display setting is set to Solid
. Click OK in the Section dialog box.
This returns you to the Run dialog box. Section dimensions, Turn radius and Minimum length fields display the
default values of the line ID being used.
For more information on the settings and options used in the Run and Section dialog boxes see Routing a Run.
Piping Design
Page 14
4. To begin your run, click at any point, move the pointer in any direction, and click again. This is the first segment
of the run. Now move the pointer to the next position and click. Create a simple run with three segments as
show below.
5. Double click to complete routing. The run displays as a solid.
6. You have created a run with three segments. You are now ready to place pipes and other parts in it.
Piping Design
Page 15

This task shows you how to place a part - in this example a gate valve - on a run.
The part placement procedure described below is a simplified version of the process. There is much more
to placing parts. This process is described more fully in Placing Parts.
1.
2.
3.
4.
With the run displayed, click the Place Piping Part button
. The Place Piping Part dialog box
displays (shown in Step 4).
Click at the location where you want to place the part - you must do this before displaying the Class
Browser, which is the next step.
Click the Class Browser button (next to the Function Type field) to display the Class Browser. Double
click on Piping Part Function to expand the list and click the + sign at Valve Function to expand the
list of valve types.
Select Control Valve Function. The function will display in the Place Piping Part dialog box.
Piping Design
5.
Page 16
In the Place Piping Part dialog box, click on the down arrow in the Part Type field to display a list of
control valves and select the gate valve.
When there is only one part type it will be preselected. If the Part Type field is grayed out, click again
on the location where you want to place the part.
6.
If there is more than one part number for the Part Type you selected the Part Selection box will
display. For this scenario, select from the list of 2 inch gate valves.
7.
The valve is placed.
Piping Design
Page 17
Updating Documents
This task contains information on updating documents.
The connections in your design will not update automatically after you make certain changes to it, such as
moving parts, runs or lofts. This behavior is by design, to enhance performance. In order to update your design
document click the Force Update button
You can also update a part - see Placing Parts.
Piping Design
Page 18
Saving Documents
This task contains recommendations on saving your documents.
Ways in which documents are saved are explained in the Infrastructure User's Guide - Creating,
Opening and Saving Documents. You must read that documentation because the various methods are
not explained here. This task simply suggests the methodology you should follow in specific
circumstances.
1.
2.
3.
If you are saving a document to a local machine or network drive it is recommended that you use
the "Save Management" command initially. The Propagate Directory command (which is in the Save
Management dialog box) should not be used routinely. It is meant to be used in specific
circumstances, such as when you want to place all the contents of a document in one directory
before sending it to another location.
If you are saving a document to another site or network you should use the "Send To" command. In
this case, you should be careful about the links for documents such as resolved parts folder or line
ID. These links could change to reflect the local network drive to which the documents have been
sent. You should make sure they point to the original location - using the Reset button in the Save
Management dialog box is one way of doing this.
You should check the active document before you execute the Save command . The root product
must be the active document if you want to save everything under it.
Piping Design
User Tasks
The tasks for creating documents using the Piping Design product are explained here.
Routing Runs
Modifying Runs
Connecting Elements
Query/modify properties of an object
Flow Direction
Managing Spools
Analyzing Networks
Routing Tasks
Using ENOVIA
Creating an Isometric Drawing
Drawing Production
Hole Placement
Working with Bendables
Computed Attributes
Page 19
Piping Design

The following section explains ways of managing piping lines.
Also see the Customizing section for information about Line ID catalogs.
Creating a Line ID
Renaming a Line ID
Deleting a Line ID
Importing Line IDs
Modify the Properties of a Line ID
Merging Line IDs
Page 20
Piping Design
Page 21
Creating a Line ID
This task describes how to create a line ID.
You need to create a line ID before you can begin routing and placing components and equipment. A line
ID is a mechanism for identifying and organizing piping segments and the components and equipment
you place in them. When you create a line ID you also assign characteristics; material, size, pressure
attributes, heat tolerance and so on.
The line ID displays in the specifications tree as an organizational element. The routes you create and the
components you place under it, will appear in the specifications tree and will also display as a 3D image.
The Line ID will appear in the specifications tree with the name you assigned it. Each run segment you
route will show as ArrRunX, X being a unique number assigned in sequence. Components and equipment
will show as YYYFunction.X, YYY being a component name and X being a unique number, i.e.
PumpFunction.1.
To store line IDs that you create, the default directory as defined in the Project Management resources
must be set for read/write file permission. Contact your system administrator to add line IDs or
directories for line lists. Also see the Customizing section for information about Line ID catalogs.
1.
Click the Create Line ID button
. The Create Line ID dialog box displays.
2.
Enter the name for your new piping line in the Line ID field or you can accept the default name by
clicking Set to default.
3. The Line ID Filename field is only available if you have set an option. Click Tools - Options, select
Equipment and Systems and the Design Criteria field, and check the option User Defined Filename.
To explain what this is, every time you create a line ID, this application creates a system file for it.
Normally this file is named in such a way that users cannot recognize it. If you want to give this file
your own name then enter it in this field.
4. Click the Properties button to open the Properties dialogue box. Click the Piping tab and assign
properties to the Line ID you are creating.
You may enter all known characteristics for the new piping segment but at a minimum you must assign
values for Nominal size and Pipe specification properties.
5.
Click Apply - you can create more line IDs if you want to. Click OK to end.
Piping Design
Page 22
Piping Design
Page 23
Renaming a Line ID
This task shows you how to rename a Line ID.
1.
Click the Rename Line ID button
line IDs.
2.
3.
. The Rename Line ID dialog box opens showing the list of
If you want to search for other line IDs, scroll through the list or enter a keyword in the Filter
String field.
Select the line ID you want to rename. The Rename dialog box displays.
Piping Design
4.
5.
Page 24
The box will display a name in the Default ID field. This name is based on preferences set by your
system administrator. To use this name click the Set to default button. To use a different name
enter it in the ID field. Click OK.
Click OK again in the Rename Line ID box. The line ID will be renamed.
Piping Design
Page 25

This task shows you how to select a line ID or its members, and to filter for line IDs. Piping lines are used
in the illustration below - the process is the same for other types of line.
You can edit the properties of line IDs or their members after selecting them. You must make some setup
changes if you want to see all properties of a line. See Displaying Line ID Properties in a Catalog to learn
how to do it.
1.
Click the Select/Query Line ID button
. The Select/Query Line ID dialog box displays.
2. Use the Sort and Filter options if you need to. Under Filter, select the Local option if you only want to
filter line IDs in the document. Select All if you want to filter all line IDs available to you. Use of the
Filter Attributes button is explained below.
3. If you are selecting members then select Line ID Members under Selection Type. If you want to select
a line ID then select Line ID.
Piping Design
Page 26
4. Click to select a line ID in the Line ID list or click on one of the members. Either the line ID or the
members will be selected, depending on the selection you made in Step 2.
5. Click the Filter Attributes button is you want to filter for line IDs. The Line Attribute Filter dialog box
displays.
Piping Design
6.
Page 27
Click the drop down arrow in the Attributes field to select a property. Name is selected in the image
above.
Click the drop down arrow in the Operators field to select an operator. Most are obvious, such as ==
(equal to) or > (greater than). the operator *= means you are using a wild card. If you select this
operator and enter U8 in the Values field then the function will filter for all lines beginning with U8.
Select or enter a value in the Values field. This is the value that the function will filter for. Click Add
when you have defined your query to add it to the Composed Query window.
The And/Or buttons let you further refine your search. You can click the And button to add another
query to your search.
Clicking the Eraser button removes a query from the Composed Query window.
The Filter String field allows you to enter a line ID name - you can use wild cards.
Piping Design
Page 28
Deleting a Line ID
This task shows you how to delete a Line ID.
1.
Click the Delete Line ID button
IDs contained in your document.
2.
3.
4.
. The Delete Line ID dialog box displays showing all the line
Select the line ID that you want to delete. (When you select a line ID all members that belong to it
are highlighted.)
If the line ID you selected has any members a message will display alerting you that all members
belonging to that line ID will be deleted.
Click OK. The line ID and all its members will be deleted.
Piping Design
Page 29
Only line IDs contained in your document will be deleted. The same line ID used in other documents will
not be deleted unless you open those documents and follow the steps given above.
Piping Design
Importing Line IDs
Page 30
This task shows how to import and/or update Piping Line IDs.
The Import Line ID feature offers the user the utility of importing line IDs from existing databases in other CAD software products. The Update feature allows you to
update the properties of existing line IDs with properties contained in an XML import file.
Installation of the Document Type Definition (DTD) and knowledge of XML are prerequisite to using this feature. The file format for the Line ID XML Import File
resides in the DTD.
The location of the DTD and sample XML file is platform dependent. In Windows the path for the DTD is
...\intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\Piping\SampleData\PlantShipLineIDImport.dtd.
For the XML file, the path is
...\intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\Piping\SampleData\PipingLineIDImportsample.xml.
The paths for the other platforms are identical with the exception of the platform identifier. Shown below are the platforms with their respective identifiers.
Windows: ...\win_a\
AIX: .../aix_a/
HPUX: .../hpux_a/
IRIX: .../irix_a/
SOLARIS: .../solaris_a/
In all cases, copy the PlantShipLineIDImport.dtd and the PipingLineIDImportsample.xml file to a local directory with 'write access'.
In the following scenario both the sample XML file and the DTD have been copied to a user Temp directory.
A portion of the sample XML file is shown below:
Piping Design
Page 31
Be alert to any line IDs you have created as well as the line IDs you will be importing. The properties of existing line IDs will be updated
(replaced) with properties of line IDs of the same name upon import.
The path for your line IDs is preset under Project Resource Management.
1.
2.
Click the Import Line ID button

.
The Line ID Import/Update dialog box opens. Click to open the file. This will cause the subroutine to run which will generate the line IDs
from the XML file. Note that under Files of type, only XML files may be displayed and opened.
3.
When the routine is complete, the Results Summary will display.
Piping Design
4.
Page 32
Click View output file to view the Line ID Import/Update Report for the sample case below.
5.
You can verify that the new line IDs have been imported by clicking the Select/Query Line ID button
dialog box opens showing the updated and imported line IDs.
. The Select/Query Line ID
Piping Design
Page 33
Piping Design
Page 34
Modifying the Properties of a Line ID

This task shows you how to modify the properties of a line ID.
1.
With your document open, click the Select/Query Line ID button
. The Selecting Line IDs
dialog box displays, showing all the line IDs contained in your document.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select the line ID whose properties you want to modify.

Under Selection Type select Line ID.
Click the Properties button. The Properties dialog box will display. Click on the Piping tab.
Enter your changes for the attributes and click OK.
Piping Design
Page 35

This task shows you how to query a Line ID.
When you query a line ID you are asking which members belong to it. When you query a member you
are asking which line ID it belongs to.
1.
2.
3.
Click the Select/Query Line ID button
. The Select/Query Line ID dialog box appears.
Use the Sort and Filter options if you need to. Under Filter, select the Local option if you only want
to filter line IDs in the document. Select All if you want to filter all line IDs available to you. The
Filter String field allows you to enter a line ID name - you can use wild cards. Clicking the Filter
Attributes button brings up the Line Attribute Filter dialog box. See Select/Filter Line IDs to learn
more about filtering.
To perform a query on a line ID click on the line ID in the Filtered Line ID List. The members of that
line ID will be highlighted in the document. To query a member click on it in the document. All
members that belong to the same line ID will be highlighted and the line ID will be highlighted in the
dialog box.
Piping Design
Page 36
Piping Design
Page 37

This task shows how to transfer members of one line ID to another line ID.
1.
With your document open, click the Transfer Line ID button
. The Transfer Members of Line
IDs dialog box opens. Click on the Local in the Scope field to see all the line IDs contained in your
document. If you click on All, you will see all the line IDs available.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the line ID that you want to transfer a member to. (When you select a line ID, all members
that belong to it are highlighted.)
Click on the member that you want to transfer. It will be transferred to the line ID you had selected.
You can also use a feature called multi-select to transfer several members at a time. To do this:
Select the members you want to transfer by clicking and dragging. They will change color once
selected.
Click on the Transfer Line ID button
. The Transfer Members of Line IDs dialog box opens.
Piping Design
7.
Page 38
Select the line ID to which you want to transfer the members. You will be alerted that you are about
to transfer the members.
8. Click OK. The members will be transferred.

The line ID and member must be compatible for the transfer to take place.
Piping Design
Page 39
Merging Line IDs

This task shows you how to merge the members of one line ID into another line ID
1.
With your document open, click the Merge Line ID button
showing all the line IDs contained in your document.
. The Merge Line IDs dialog box displays
Piping Design
2.
Page 40
Select the line ID you want to merge. All members that belong to that line ID will be selected. The lower field will
display the line IDs to which it can be merged.
Select the line ID into which you want to merge and click OK. All members of the first line ID will merge into the line
ID you selected, and the first line ID will be deleted.
You cannot merge incompatible line IDs. Also, members of a line ID that is merged into another will assume the
properties of the line ID into which it is merged.
3.
Piping Design
Routing Runs
Routing runs, including routing runs in special circumstances, are explained here.
Routing a Run
Branching a Run
Route a Run Within a Pathway
Page 41
Piping Design
Page 42
Routing a Run
This task shows you how to create a run.
You can begin routing a run from:
Space.
An object, such as a tube.
The end of a run or middle of a run.
A point.
Connectors.
Item reservation face.
Design rules affect the way runs are routed. For instance, the turn radius of a run of a given
nominal size is determined by the design rules. A sample set of design rules is included with this
application, but most users (administrators, not individual users) will add to or modify them. Some
ways in which rules affect run creation are explained below. See Rules Overview to find out which
rules affected run creation. Also see Customizing - Standards and Design Rules - Modifying Design
Rules for more information.
1.
Click the Route a Run button
The Run dialog box is displayed.
Piping Design
2.
Page 43
If the Schematic Driven option is set then the Schematic Browser will also display. This option
is controlled from the Design Criteria tab - click Tools - Options, select Equipment &
Systems, and select the Design Criteria tab. A Multiple Rule dialog box may also display. This is
explained below and in the Design Rules section.
Define the routing mode for the run:
Point-to-point: routing will be directly between two points indicated by clicking.
Orthogonal: routing between two points will proceed first in the X direction,
then in the Y direction.
Slope routing: see Slope Routing.
Directional routing: see Routing with a Compass.
Edgeline: see Edgeline Routing.
Piping Design
Page 44
Branch at Center: see Branching a Run.

In addition, if you place the compass on an object the Use Compass Origin button
will display. If you click the button and start to route the route will start from
the compass origin. If you are in the middle of routing, the compass origin will serve
as a routing point.
Click one of the Select Mode buttons - the default is No Filter. The Select Mode
buttons allow you to define where you can start routing from.
No Filter: No filters are applied and you can route from any routable object or in
space.
In Space: Routing will be in space. This is useful when you have a large object
in the background, such as a ship structure, and you want to be able to route in
space.
Only Part Connectors: Select this to be able to route from part or equipment
connectors only.
Import Node Points: This allows you to route using predefined node points. See
Routing with Defined Nodes for more information.
Section dimensions, Turn radius and Minimum length fields display the values given to the Line ID
being used. Click the Section icon. The Display buttons allow you to select a display mode of
Line/Curve or Solid. Click the Display Centerline button to show the centerline of the run. This will
appear as a dashed yellow line. In addition a blue line will appear to display the Set Point setting.
This feature works in both the Line/Curve and Solid display modes.
When defining Section parameters the section Types that are available depend on which workbench
you are in. For example, Piping Design, Tubing Design and Conduit Design use only the round
section while Systems Routing (shown below) offers all section types.
3.
Define the Section parameters:
Piping Design
a. Select the Section Type button.

The Section dialog box is displayed.
b. Define the section type and corresponding parameters for each of them:
No Section
Rectangular. Enter or select the:
Set Point
Envelope Height
Envelope Width
Display
Circular. Enter or select the:
Set Point
Envelope Diameter
Page 45
Piping Design
Display
Flat Oval: Enter or select the:
Set Point
Envelope Height
Envelope Width
Display
Radius Corner: Enter or select the:
Set Point
Envelope Height
Envelope Width
Radius Corner
Display
Double Ridge: Enter or select the:
Set Point
Envelope Height
Envelope Width
Display
The Envelope field refers to the total work area needed. The section
diameter is obtained from the line ID and equals the size of the pipe or
tube you will place in the run. The envelope diameter includes additional
space need for pipe insulation, etc. In the case of a round section the value
is obtained from the Outside Diameter column of the XXXDimension design
table.
c. Select OK on the Section dialog box.
Page 46
Piping Design
Page 47
Instead of entering the type of run, the set point and the height, width or diameter in the Section
dialog box, you can select an existing run in your document. Once selected, the Section dialog box
will display the values for that run. To select, click on the Run button and then click on the run
whose values you want as the default. Make sure the entire run is selected - not just a segment or a
node. It will be easier to select the run in the specifications tree.
4.
if you want to use the intelligent design capabilities

Click the Press to use rule button
incorporated in the application. When you do this the turn radius and minimum length are
governed by the nominal size you select - you will not be able to enter a different value. The
nominal size is displayed in the menu bar, along with the Line ID to which the run will belong
and the Specification. The turn radius and minimum length for that nominal size are in turn
governed by the rules tables. If there is more than one attribute, such as turn radius, associated
with that nominal size then you will be prompted to select one and the Multiple Rule dialog box
will display. In the example below you can select from four possible options to define the bend
radius of a run. You will still be able to override the bend definition on a specific node of a run.
If the nominal size you select does not exist in the turn rule table then an elbow will be placed
at the turns.
NominalSize: This is the nominal size you selected in the menubar.

BendRadius: Also known as turn radius. This is the turn radius of the run and the different
values displayed are taken from the Turn Rules design table. If the value is 0 then the
application will calculate it as explained below.
Piping Design
Page 48
DiameterFactor: The diameter factor is a value used to calculate the turn radius of the run if no
value for the Bend Radius attribute for a given nominal size is entered in the Turn Rules design
table. The diameter factor multiplied by the Bend Diameter provides the turn radius of the run.
(The Bend Diameter value is obtained from the Tube Dimension design table.) It is this
calculated figure that will show in the Run dialog box. The application first determines if there is
a value for a given nominal size in the Bend Radius column of the Turn Rules design table. If
there is a value it will use that value. If there is no value then it will calculate it as explained
above.
NumberofMiterCuts: If the value is other than 0 then your elbows will be mitered. The number
of miters will equal the value shown in the column plus 1.
See Modifying Design Rules and Creating a Line ID for more information.
5.
If you decide not to use the rules then enter values for the minimum length and turn radius.
If you enter a minimum length or turn radius you will not be able to route correctly unless these
values are satisfied. For instance, if you enter a minimum length of 10 feet, you will not be able to
complete a segment that is 5 feet. In the illustration below, the green line shows the minimum
segment length that will be created, even if you try to make a shorter segment, because the
minimum length you entered is longer than the segment you are now trying to create. Similarly, if
you enter a value for the turn radius, your run will automatically be adjusted to satisfy the defined
turn radius.
6.
Click in the drawing to define the routing points. If you want the application to show you
possible paths between two objects, then select your beginning and end points and click the
Display Alternate Path button
possible paths:
. The first click displays a field showing the number of

. Subsequent clicks show the actual paths.
7
Once you have a route you want to accept, click OK or the Create the Run button
and the
run will be created. If you click the button you can select another run. If you click OK you will
exit the command. Click Cancel to abort your routing.
You can also double-click on the last point to stop routing. In this case you will not be able to
alternative paths.
Piping Design
Page 49
8.
Click on the Close Loop symbol
that shows at the beginning of the run if you want to
create a closed loop run. In a closed loop run the ends of the run are joined.
9.
When starting a run from a part, a run that is a continuation of an existing run, or if branching
from an existing run use the following buttons as needed:
from.
Get Line ID from Selection: gets the line ID from the run or part you are routing
Get Line Size/Spec from Selection: gets the size and spec from the run or part
you are routing from.
10.
The Change to Schematic Mode button lets you toggle between schematic and nonschematic mode. You will exit the command when you click this button and need to click the
Route Run command again.
Piping Design
Page 50

This task shows you how to route a run with predefined node points.
You can create a run by predefining the node points. This means you do not need to route the run by
clicking the mouse pointer in the 3D window, as explained below. See Routing a Run for basic
information.
1.
Create a text file, using a text editor like Wordpad, with column headings as shown below, and
define the node sequence, X/Y/Z coordinates and bend radius of the node points. A sample file is
provided with this application to help you define the text file. The file name is
RunInputNodeData.txt and the location is:
...intel_a\startup\EquipmentandSystems\MultiDiscipline\SampleData. The file is
reproduced below to show you the column headings and layout. (It has been opened in Excel to
make it easier to distinguish columns.
You can see that there are two sets of node numbers, ranging from 1 to 4. Whenever the
application reads the node number 1 it will start a new run. So, based on the file above, two runs
will be created.
2.
Open the Run dialog box and click the Import Node Points button
. The File Selection
dialog box displays. Navigate to the location of your file and select it. The runs will be created.
Piping Design
Page 51
Piping Design
Page 52

This task explains how to route from the end of a routable.
If you route an element with the same type and parameter values as the "source" element (i.e., the
element from which the routable is routed), you can specify whether the new element is a continuation of
the source element or a separate element. If you want to use the "Continue" option, be sure that the
parent for the source element is active before you begin.
1.
Select the Route a Run button
The Routing dialog box is displayed.
2. Define the routing parameters.

See Routing a Run for instructions.
3. Move the pointer to the end from which you want to route. When a green arrow appears, click and
begin to route. Double click to end routing.
4. Once you begin routing the following buttons are added to the Routing dialog box:
Continue Routing: If you select this the run you create will be part of the run from which you
are routing.
Create New Route: If you select this the run you create will be a new run.
Piping Design
Page 53
5. When starting a run that is a continuation of an existing run, a branch from an existing run, or
routing from an object or equipment (nozzle) use either or both of the following buttons as
applicable:
Get Size/Spec from Selection: If you select this button the run you create will be a new run but
will assume the size and specification attributes of the run or object you are routing from.
Get Line ID from Selection: If you select this button the run you create will assume the same
line ID as the run or object from which you are routing. If you de-select it, the new run will belong to
the line ID displayed in the menu bar.
Piping Design
Page 54
Branching a Run
This task explains how to branch a run from any of these elements:
Another run
Boundary
Contour
Pathway
If the "source" element (i.e., the element from which the run branches) is moved or resized, the run is
adjusted accordingly.
1.
With your document open, select the Route a Run button.
2.
3.
4.

Define the parameters for the run.
See Routing a Run for instructions.
Select the element from which you want to route the run and begin routing.
If you want to branch from the center of the segment, click the Branch at Center button
in
the Run dialog box. The branch will begin from the center of the segment, irrespective of the
point in the segment that you route from.
If you want to create a run that "branches" from the end of a run, see Routing from the End of
a Routable.
Piping Design
Page 55

This task shows you how to route a run at a slope.
1.
2.
At the point in your run at which you want to slope it click the Slope button
box.
Enter the degrees of slope you want.
in the Run dialog
3.
4.
Click the Section button

and enter data about the type and size of run.
Continue creating your run. Click once to define the ending point of a segment. Click twice to end the
run.
Piping Design
Page 56

This task shows you how to auto-route a run between two pieces of equipment or two connectors.
1.
Make the appropriate element (area, system or line) active by double-clicking in the specifications
tree.
2.
3.
4.
Place the two pieces of equipment you want to connect on your area.
Click on the Route a Run button and enter parameters in the dialog box that displays.
Move the cursor to the first equipment - an arrow displays at the connector point. If the equipment
has more than one connector point the arrow will display at different points as you move your cursor.
5.
6.
Click to select the starting point of the run.

Move the cursor to the second equipment, where the arrow will also display, and click to select the
ending point of the run. The run is created over the shortest possible path.
Press the shift key to see other possible routes for the run between the two objects.
7.
Piping Design
Page 57
Routing
a Run Within a Pathway
This task shows you how to route a run within a pathway.
1.
2.
With your pathway model open, click the Route Thru a Pathway button
3.
Click on the pathway in which you want to route your run. This displays set points on the pathway. Select a position for the run by clicking on one of the points. For
example, if you select Top Center the run will align to the top center of the pathway. You can click Apply in the Run dialog box to see how the run looks and to try
different positions. Click OK when you are finished.
. The Run dialog box opens.
Click the Section button to open the Section dialog box. Select the type of run, the set point and other options.
Piping Design
Page 58
Piping Design
Page 59

This task shows you how to route from an item reservation.
Click the Route a Run button.
1.
2. Click on the face of the item reservation from which you want to route.
3. Begin routing.
The point on the item reservation face from which the run will start depends on the set point of the run.
In the illustration above the set point is set at Center Center. If the set point was set at Bottom Center
the run would have started at the bottom center edge of the item reservation. To change the set point,
button in the Run dialog box and select the Set Point from the drop
click on the Section Type
down list in the Section dialog box that displays.
Piping Design
Page 60
Piping Design
Page 61

This task shows you how to display information about routables. This feature works only when you are
performing an action with a routable, such as placing a part, branching a run or creating an offset route.
To display more detailed information see Generating Detail Information.
Go to Tools - Options, select Equipment & Systems and select the Display tab. Click to activate
1.
2.
3.
Analysis Mode.
Place the pointer over the run. If a segment is highlighted you will see the length displayed. If a
node is highlighted, the angle between two adjacent segments, the coordinates of the node, and the
bend radius (if there is one) will be displayed.
Click the button again if you do not want to see the information.
Piping Design
Page 62

This task shows you how to check your document for turn errors. This command determines if any of the turns have values
that are in violation of the parameters as defined in the Turn Design Rule. See also Using the Definition Dialog Box.
1.
With your document open click the Validate Run Turns button
. The Validate Run Turns dialog box displays.
If a run is already selected it will display in the window.

2.Select one of the options:
Current selection lets you select runs in your document.
All runs under the active parent in the specifications tree.
All runs created under a particular Line.
3.After you make your selection, the runs will display in the window in the Turn Rule Used column with their status
indicated by a YES or NO - NO means one or more turns in that run does not conform to the turn rules.
If you click the Select All NO button then all runs that are in violation of the turn rules will be selected.
Piping Design
Page 63
4.Select the run you want to validate in the dialog box window - the run will highlight in the viewer. Click the Run Details
button
to see information about the run in the Run Details dialog box.
If you want to reset some of the turns in a run then select them in the Run Details dialog box and click the Reset Run
. The turn radius for the selected turns will be reset according to the design rules. If the line has more
Turns button
than one turn radius or diameter factor then the Multiple Rule Found dialog box will display. Select one of the values - it
will apply to the selected turns.
5.If you want to reset all the turns in a run then select the run in the Validate Run Turns dialog box and click the Reset Run
Turns button. (If the line has more than one turn radius or diameter factor then the Multiple Rule Found dialog box will
display. Select one of the values.) All turns in the run will be reset according to the design rule.
Piping Design
Modifying Runs
Runs can be modified in the following ways.
Changing a Section
Moving Nodes
Position Segment Relative to a Plane
Create an Offset Connection Between Segments
Open a Closed Run
Adjust Extremities of a Run
Page 64
Piping Design
Page 65

This task gives you an overview of the definition dialog box. You can make modifications to a routable
using the functions contained in this box. Specific task-oriented modifications are explained elsewhere in
this section.
You should be familiar with the concepts explained in Routing a Run to be able to take full advantage of
these functions. Note that some applications, like Systems Routing, do not utilize design rules and the norule conditions apply to them.
1. Right click on a routable and, in the drop down menus that display, select the routable (in this case
Run-0049 object) and then Definition.
2. This brings up the Definition dialog box.
3. The Name field allows you to change the routable's instance name.
4. The Section button lets you change section parameters, as explained in Routing a Run.
5. Click one of the Turn Type buttons if you want to change the turn type.
No Turn: The turn radius for all turns is changed to 0. The Turn Radius field is not displayed.
Uniform Turn: All turns in the run have the same turn radius.
Mixed Turn: Turns in the run can have different turn radius.
6.
The Press to Use Rule button
indicates if you are using the design rules. In the image above it
is on, which is why the Turn Radius and Minimum Length fields are grayed out. You can click the
button to go to a no-rule state, in which case the Turn Radius and Minimum Length fields will no
longer be grayed out. See Routing a Run for more information.
Piping Design
Page 66
7.
The Display Error Report button is green
when there is no error in the run. It turns red
when you insert a value or make some other change to cause an error. Click the button to display a
report. This error function checks to make sure that the turn radius and minimum length conform to
the design rule.
8. The Turn Radius field displays the turn radius. To change it you need to display the Node Definition
dialog box (see Moving Nodes) and enter a value. If you introduce an invalid turn radius, by entering
a value in the Node Definition dialog box, then the Display Error Report button will turn red. (You can
also introduce a turn radius error by shortening the length of one or both segments.) A red arc will
also display on your run. The ends of the arc are the minimum point to which each segment should
be routed for a valid turn. In the example below, the segment is not long enough to support the turn
radius value entered by the user.
9. The Node Edit Table button displays a table containing node values - see Moving Nodes.
10. The Minimum Length field displays the minimum length of each segment. You cannot change the
value in this field if you are using design rules.
11. The Total Length field displays the total length of the run. You cannot change the value in this field.
Piping Design
Page 67
Changing a Section
This task explains how to change parameters that control how the section of an element is displayed.
1. Place your cursor over the element and click the right mouse button.
2.
From the pull-down menu, select the element or object you want to modify and select Definition. The
Run Definition dialog box is displayed.
3. Click the Section button to set the desired section shape to No section, Rectangle, Round, Flat
Oval, Radius Corner or Double Ridge.
When defining the Section parameters the section Types that are available depend on which workbench
you are in. For example, Piping Design, Tubing Design and Conduit Design use only the round section
while Systems Routing offers all section types.
4.
If you select Rectangular Section, you can define or change these parameters:
Set Point
Height
Width
Display
If you select Round Section, you can define or change these parameters:
Set Point
Diameter
Display
If you select Flat Oval Section, you can define or change these parameters:
Set Point
Height
Width
Display
If you select Radius Corner Section, you can define or change these parameters:
Set Point
Height
Width
Piping Design
Display
Radius Corner
If you select Double Ridge Section, you can define or change these parameters:
Set Point
Height
Width
Display
5. Click OK on the Section dialog box and OK on the Definition box to complete the change..
Page 68
Piping Design
Page 69

This task shows you how to change the angle of a pathway, boundary, or run segment.
1. Place your cursor over the element and click the right mouse button.
2. From the pull-down menu, select the element, or object, you want to modify and select Definition.
The Run Definition dialog box is displayed.
3. Place the cursor over the support line for that element and click the right mouse button.
4. Select Definition from the pop-menu. The Segment Definition dialog box is displayed.
5. Specify a new value for the Turn Angle. A line is displayed in the drawing to show the new position for
the segment.
6. Select OK on the Segment Definition dialog box.
7. Select OK on the Run Definition dialog box to complete the change.
8. To align a section's normal with the compass Z axis:
Bring up the Definition box for the section.
Place the compass on a 3-D element and adjust the Z axis to the angle you want.
Right click on the segment. A pop-up menu will show.
Click on Rotate section to compass Z direction. The normal of the section will rotate to align with
the Z axis, as shown in the image below.
Piping Design
Page 70
Moving or Deleting a Node

This task shows you how to move the nodes on a path reservation, boundary, or run. In the example
below a node will be moved in a pipe run.
1.
Place your mouse pointer over the element and click the right mouse button.
2.
From the menu that displays, select the element you want to modify, in this case pipe run.1
object, and select the Definition option. This will bring up the Definition dialog box. Symbols
are displayed on the pipe run to show the location of nodes: asterisks represent non-connected
nodes, and Os (circles) represent connected nodes.
Piping Design
3.
4.
Page 71
To move a node by entering coordinates, do one of the following:
Right-click the node symbol and select Definition from the pop-up menu.
The Node Definition dialog box displays.
Key in new values for X, Y, or Z.
Click OK in the Node Definition dialog box.
OR
Bring up the (run) Definition dialog box and click the Node Edit Table button to display the Node
Edit Table and make changes to values in the table.
To move the node using the cursor, place the cursor over the node symbol and drag it to a new
location. See
below.
A line is displayed to show the new location for the segment.
Piping Design
5.
Page 72
Click OK in the Definition dialog box to complete the change.
A node will move parallel to the compass base plane, which is normally XY. To move a node vertical to
the base, change the compass base to the XZ plane.
6.
To move a node parallel to the compass Z axis.
Bring up the Definition box for the routable.
7.
Place the compass on a 3-D object where it can be manipulated. Change the Z axis to the
desired direction.
Click on the square around the node and move it with the mouse button depressed. It will
only move parallel to the compass Z axis. If you click on the node itself you will be able to
move it in any direction.
To move a node of a routable to the origin of the compass. This allows you to move the compass
to a specific point on a routable or resource, and then move the node to it. To do this:
Bring up the Definition box for the routable which has the node you want to move.
Move the compass to the point where you want the node to move.
Bring up the Definition box for the node that will be moved.
Click the Compass Origin button

in the image.
. The node will move to the compass base, as shown
Piping Design
8.
Page 73
To delete a node right-click on the node and select Delete Node from the pop-up menu that
displays.
Piping Design
Page 74

This task shows you how to align adjacent segments which have become out of alignment. Segments can
get out of alignment when a node is moved in a non-planar manner. In the illustration below the joints
marked in red have been moved out of alignment.
1.
Bring up the Definition dialog box for the run.
2.
Right click on the segment half closest to the misaligned joint. If more than one joint is misaligned
click on a segment half closest to one of the end joints. A drop down menu will appear.
Click on Align adjacent segments in the drop down menu. All segments will align beginning at the
joint closest to the segment handle you selected. Segments will align in one direction only. If there
are other misaligned segments in the run then you may have to repeat the operation.
3.
Piping Design
Page 75

This task shows you how to make a segment of a run parallel to a reference plane.
You can place the Offset Plane on a surface to make it the reference plane, and then make a segment of
a run parallel to the reference plane. In the illustration below, a reference plane will be placed on a face
of the item reservation, and a segment made parallel to it.
1.
Click on the Offset Plane button
and then on the face where you want to place it. A square
shows on the face.

2. Bring up the Definition dialog box for the run.
3. Bring up the Definition dialog box again, this time for the segment half you are interested in. See
note below.
Each segment is divided into two halves, which become visible when you bring up the Definition dialog
box for the run. It is important to select the segment half correctly because the segment will pivot at the
node closest to the segment half you select.
Piping Design
Page 76
4.
Click on the Reference Plane button
in the Segment Definition dialog box. The segment will
pivot - at the node closest to the segment half you selected - to become parallel with the reference
plane.
In the illustration above, the portion in red was the segment half selected. If the half to the left of it
had been selected then the segment would have pivoted at the node to the left of it, as shown below.
5.
Click OK and then OK again in the Definition dialog box.
Piping Design
Page 77

This task shows you how to make a segment of a run parallel to the compass base plane. Also see Make
segment parallel to reference plane.
1.
Drag the compass and place it on the surface to which you want to align the segment.
2.
3.
Bring up the Definition dialog box for the run.

Bring up the Definition dialog box again, this time for the segment half you are interested in. See
note below.
box for the run. It is important to select the correct half, because the segment will pivot at the node
closest to the segment half you select.
4.
Click on the Compass Base Plane button.
The segment will pivot - at the node closest to the
segment half you selected - to become parallel with the reference plane.
Piping Design
Page 78
In the illustration above, the portion in red was the segment half selected. If the half to the left of it
had been selected then the segment would have pivoted at the node to the left of it, as shown below.
Piping Design
Page 79

This task shows you how to make a segment of a run parallel to the compass Z axis. See also Make
Segment Parallel to Reference Plane.
1. Drag the compass and place it with the Z axis pointing in the direction with which you want to make
the segment parallel.
3. Bring up the Definition dialog box again, this time for the segment half you are interested in. See
note below.
box for the run. It is important to select the correct half, because the segment will pivot at the node
closest to the segment half you select.
4.
Click on the Compass Z Direction button.
The segment will pivot - at the node closest to the
segment half you selected - to become parallel with the Z axis of the compass.
NOTE: Place the compass carefully because segments also have a directional relationship to the
compass. The node that pivots will parallel the base of the compass. The node at the other end will
parallel the Z vector.
Piping Design
Page 80

This task shows you how to adjust a segment for parts assembly purposes. It can be used to move one
part next to another, or to place two bends next to each other to create a U. In this example the segment
half to the right will be shortened so that the elbow is placed against the tee.
1. Bring up the Definition dialog box for the routable.
2.
Right-click on the segment half that you want to shorten. A drop down menu will display.
Piping Design
3.
Page 81
Click Adjust to fit. The elbow will move flush against the tee.
The same command can be used to create a U. If you have a segment with bends at the two ends and
you use the command described above, the segment will shorten so that the two bends are adjacent. It
will not work if there are no bends.
If you have two connected parts, like a valve and a flange, and you want to move both after they have
been placed, select both first. Then, when you move any one part both will move together.
Piping Design
Page 82
Position a Segment Relative to Plane or Another

Segment
This task shows you how to position a routable segment so that it is a defined distance away from a
reference plane or from another segment. This function can be used to make a segment clear an existing
structure or in situations where it is necessary to position a segment a specified distance from another
object or segment. See also Edgeline Routing.
1.
In the example below, the routable is colliding with the beam. The task is to move the segment up
so that it passes just over the beam.
2.
3.
Place the offset plane

on top of the beam and bring up the Definition dialog box for the
routable.
Right-click on the segment you want to move. A drop down menu will display. Select Offset
segment.
Piping Design
Page 83
4.
Select Offset segment. The Offset segment dialog box will appear.
5.
Select Make segment parallel to reference plane and then select one of the buttons, Outside
edge to reference plane or Center line to reference plane. See Step 9 to offset to another
segment.
Piping Design
6.
Page 84
Enter a distance in the Offset field. If you enter 0 the routable will be placed on top of the beam if
you have selected Outside edge to reference plane. If you select Center line to reference plane then
entering 0 in the Offset field will place the center line of the routable on top of the beam.
7.
8.
9.
Click the Offset to far side

or Offset to near side
button. These buttons will place the
routable on either side of the reference plane.
Click Preview if you want to preview, then click OK and then OK again in the Definition dialog box.
The run segment will be placed on top of the beam.
To position a segment a certain distance from another segment, select the Offset to another
segment option and click the segment to which you want to offset. Click one of the three buttons:
Outside edge to outside edge, Center line to center line or Center line to outside edge.
Piping Design
Page 85
Creating an Offset Connection Between Segments

This task shows you how to create an offset connection between two segments. Creating this connection
makes a master-slave relationship between the two and maintains a fixed distance between them.
If you create the connection only between two segments, the two will maintain the offset if you move one.
But other segments of the slave routable may change in length to allow the offset to be maintained between
the two segments that have a connection. If you do not want this to happen you can create a connection
between the other segments too.
1.
Click the Create an offset segment connection button
. The Run dialog box displays.
2. Select the segment you want to be the slave. The first segment you select becomes the slave, while the second
becomes the master.
3. Select the second segment. The compass displays and you can see a connector line between the two.
4. Enter the offset distance and select your offset between options in the Run box. You can choose to
have the offset connection between the:
Outside edge to outside edge

Centerline to centerline
Outside edge to centerline
Piping Design
Page 86
5. To create a connection between other segments of the same two routables select other segments in the
same sequence given above.
6. Click OK. The connections will be created.
7. To modify the connection, select the slave run, click the Create offset segment connection button
, select the slave segment and enter your changes.
8. To delete offset connections select the slave routable, right click, then click on the line corresponding to
the routable and click Delete offset connections. All connections between the two routables will be
deleted.
Piping Design
Page 87

This task shows you how to modify an existing run in order to create a closed loop run. In a closed loop
run the ends of the run are joined. There are two ways of turning an existing run into a closed loop run.
Both are explained below.
1.
Click on the Route a Run
button and continue routing from the end of the run.
2.
Click the Continue Routing
button in the Run dialog box.
3. Click on the other end of the run when finished. The ends of the run will join .
4. In the second method, right-click on the run and, in the drop down box that appears, click on the line that describes
the run, in this case Run.1 Object.
5. Another drop down menu will display. Click on Close Route.
6. The two ends of the run will join. An open end run and closed loop run are shown below.
Piping Design
Page 88
Piping Design
Page 89
Open a Closed Run

This task shows you how to open a closed run.
You can only open a closed run at a node.
2. Click the right mouse button on the node where you want the run to be opened. This will display a drop down box.
3. Click on Open. The run will open at the node.
Piping Design
Page 90
Piping Design
Page 91
Adjust the Extremity of a Run

This task shows you how to move or adjust the extremity of a run.
You can use two methods to move the extremities of a run. One utilizes the Definition dialog box. The other uses
the Adjust Run Extremity command. Both are described here.
1. To adjust using the Definition dialog box, right click on the segment whose extremity you want to adjust.
From the menu, select the object, in this case 'Run2.1 object' and then select Definition. The run will be
highlighted as shown below and the Definition dialog box will open.
2. Click and drag the connector symbol at the end of the section to reposition it. The image below shows the
repositioned extremity. Notice that the Total length in the Definition dialog box has changed to reflect the
adjusted length.
Piping Design
Page 92
3. Click Apply and OK. The run will now extend to the selected position.
4. The other method uses the Adjust Run Extremity command. With your document open, click the Adjust Run
Extremity button
. The Adjust Run Extremity dialog box displays.
Piping Design
Page 93
5. Select the run extremity you want to adjust. The run is highlighted and the Adjust Options become available.
6. Click the down arrow in the Adjust Options field and select one of the options. You can:
Move to connector: Move the extremity to a connector.
Move to point: Move it to a point on a part or equipment. You see the points as you move your pointer over
the part.
Move to x ,y, z coordinate: Move to a specific coordinate. Enter the coordinates in the fields that display.
Move to run and keep alignment: Move to another run - the extremity is moved to that plane, not
connected.
Move to part and keep alignment: Move to a part - the extremity is moved to that plane, not connected.
7. Click OK to end.
Piping Design
Page 94

This task shows you how to transfer a run to another document. You can use this function to transfer a run
to documents or work packages that are under the same Product. See also Transfer Elements to New
Document.
This command will only work if you do not have any parts placed on the run.
1. The image below shows a run in the document "Product4.1". You want to move it to the document
Product3.1.
2.
Click the Transfer Run button
. The Transfer Run dialog displays and you are prompted to select
the run you want to transfer.
3. Select the run, at which time the Apply and OK buttons in the Transfer Run dialog box become available.
4. Click on the down arrow in the File name field to see documents that are directly under the top level
product. Select the document you want to transfer the run to in this list or in the specifications tree.
NOTE: If you have a third level document you will need to select it in the specifications tree.
Piping Design
5. Click Apply or OK. The run is transferred to the document you selected.
Page 95
Piping Design
Connecting Elements
This task explains how to connect and disconnect elements.
Connecting Parts
Disconnecting Parts
Page 96
Piping Design
Page 97
Connecting Parts
This task shows you how to connect two or more parts or runs.
You can use this function to connect parts or runs.
Select the part that you want to connect. Press the Ctrl key while selecting the other parts. Click the Connect
1.
Parts button
2. The parts will be highlighted and the Action dialog box will open. Click OK to connect the parts. The parts will be
connected.
Piping Design
Page 98
3. To verify that the the parts are connected, use the Analyze Networks function. Select the Path tab. Select the
extremities of the range of parts you connected. The From Object and To Object fields will display the parts
selected and the Current Path field will show 1, indicating that the three items are connected.
4. You can also connect by clicking the Connect button and selecting the connectors on two parts. In this case the first
part you select becomes slave to the second part.
Piping Design
Page 99
Disconnecting Parts
This task shows you how to disconnect two parts or runs.
In the specifications tree, select the part that you want to disconnect. Press the Ctrl key while selecting the other parts.
1.
Click the Disconnect Parts button
2. The parts will be highlighted and the Action dialog box will open. Click OK to disconnect the parts. The parts are
disconnected.
Piping Design
Page 100
3. To verify that the parts are disconnected, use the Analyze Network function. Select the extremities of the range of parts
you connected. The From Object and To Object fields will display the parts selected. The Current Path will show 0, and
there will be no objects in the path; indicating that the three items are disconnected.
Piping Design
Page 101

This task explains the ways you can establish connections between work packages. You should also refer
to the following tasks for more information: Using Work Packages, Understanding Project Resource
Management, and Managing Publications.
The system manages connections between elements within your design. As you place parts or route
elements within your design, the system automatically creates connections between them. When
these elements are in different work packages then the system also needs a way of identifying the
work package containing the linked element.
When connections are being established between elements in different work packages, the system
may use one of two link mechanisms, based on the environment and user options set in the Project
Resource Management file. The two mechanisms used for cross work package connections are:
Publication based connections
Document based connections
Publication based linking enables effective configuration management, revision management and
concurrent engineering support. Publication based connections are established through a publication
and can easily be replaced by new configurations or revisions of a work package. The connection is
resolved dynamically as work packages are loaded into a session.
Document based connections use a more direct linking mechanism. This allows the linked document
to be identified more easily, but it does not easily support relinking to a new configuration or
revision.
In publication based linking, connection information is added to both work packages, establishing a
one way or two way link. A two way link is established when the system has Write access to both
work packages. If it has Write access to one of the work packages it will establish a one way
connection from the work package to which it has access. Users can convert a one way link to a two
way link if they have Write access to the necessary work package, using the Cross Document
Connections command. It is recommended that a two way connection be established to ensure
complete network connectivity for downstream processes such as From-To analysis.
In the case of document based connections, the connection is stored in the parent document of the
two work packages. In this case, a two way connection is always established.
Piping Design
Page 102
This task explains ways you can manage publications. You should also refer to the following tasks for
more information: Using Work Packages and Connections Between Work Packages.
Publications are used to identify work packages that have linked elements, for instance, when a vessel is
in one work package and the pipe routed from it in another. In such cases publications are automatically
created and used to track connected elements. Using the Manage Logical Publications command, and an
associated command, Cross Document Connections, you can manage the publications. Both are explained
below.
Select the work package for which you want to manage publications and click Tools - Manage Logical
1. Publications in the menubar. The Manage Logical Publications dialog box displays, with all
publications in the document listed. The box shows the publication name, the element to which it is
associated, the associated connector and whether it is linked or unlinked.
2.
You can perform the following functions (you must have Write access to the work package):
Rename: To rename, double click on a publication and enter the new name.
Reset: Click the Reset button to reset to the original publication name.
Delete: Select a publication and click the Delete button.
Piping Design
Page 103
3.
To use the cross document connections command, select a work package and click Analyze - Cross
Document Connections in the menubar. The Cross Document Connections dialog box displays,
showing the publications in the document.
4.
The buttons become available when you select a publication. In the image above, the symbol in the
Link Type column shows the publication has a two way connection. You can perform the following
functions (some functions require Write access to both work packages):
Remove Link: This will remove a connection one way and the following symbol will display.
Add Link: When you have a one way connection, click this button to make it a two way
connection.
Disconnect: Click this button to remove the connection.
Use the Reframe, Select All or Clear Selection buttons as needed.
You can also use the Connect Parts and Disconnect Parts commands to add or remove connections.
Piping Design
This section explains some ways in which objects and resources are manipulated.
Aligning Elements
Disable/Enable Manipulation Handles
Activating the Product or Parent
Page 104
Piping Design
Page 105

You can search for objects in a diagram by using the Edit - Search command. This will display the Search dialog
box.
Under Workbench select your workbench. Under Type select the type of object you are searching for. Detailed
instructions on using the Search function can be found in the Infrastructure User Guide under Basic Tasks Selecting Objects.
Piping Design
Page 106
Aligning Elements
This task shows you how to align elements in your layout.
You can align the center or the sides of an element to a user defined reference plane that you define. You
can also rotate an element to align it with a reference plane.
1.
Select the element(s) that you want to align.
2.
Select the icon for the type of alignment you want to perform:
Align Sides: aligns the sides of two or more elements
Align Center: aligns along the centerlines of two or more elements
Rotate to Align: rotates elements on the axis to align them
Align Planes: aligns selected planes
Distribute: See Distributing elements

3.
Define the plane to use as a reference for the alignment. If you have an offset plane already defined
it will be used as the reference plane. If you do not already have the offset plane defined do the
following:
a. Place your cursor over a geometric element that defines the plane (e.g., a construction
plane, boundary, area contour, item reservation).
As you move the cursor, a small white rectangle is displayed to show the selectable planes, as shown
below. A line normal to the rectangle shows the direction in which the alignment will be performed.
Piping Design
Page 107
If you do not see the white rectangle, zoom out from the drawing. The white rectangle cannot be
displayed if the element under your cursor is displayed too small.
b. Click to select the plane.
The selected elements are aligned along the plane.
Piping Design
Page 108
Using the Align Planes command allows you to select any plane on an item reservation or part. After
you select the first plane to which to align to, you can only select a plane that is parallel to it. For
instance, if you select the the top of an item reservation you need to select the top or bottom of the
second item reservation - you cannot select the sides.
Click any button in one of the tool bars to exit the alignment command. If you want to continue with the
alignment command using the same reference plane then select another element in the model.
4.
Piping Design
Page 109
This task shows you how to distribute elements within parameters that you define.
1. Select the elements you want to move.
2.
Click the Distribute button
.
3. Define a reference plane for the distribution by doing the following:
a. Place your cursor over a geometric element that defines the plane (e.g., a construction plane, boundary,
area contour, item reservation).
As you move the cursor, a small white rectangle is displayed to show the selectable planes, as shown
below. A line perpendicular to the rectangle shows the direction in which the distribution will be performed.
If you do not see the white rectangle, zoom out from the drawing. The white rectangle cannot be displayed if the
element under your cursor is displayed too small.
Piping Design

The selected elements are distributed along a line perpendicular to the plane, as shown below.
Page 110
Piping Design
Page 111

This task shows you how to rotate a catalog resource by entering into the definition dialog box the
number of degrees that you want it to rotate on its vertical axis..
1.
Click on the resource.
2.
Click Edit-Definition in the menu bar. This displays the Product Definition dialog box. (You can also
press Cntrl-Enter to display the box.)
3.
4.
Enter the degrees in the Rotation field.

Click Apply and the resource will rotate on its vertical axis.
Piping Design
Page 112

This task shows you how to snap two resources together.
Resources can be joined at existing connectors, you can create new connectors to join them, or you can
snap them together without using connectors. All procedures are described below, beginning with the
procedure for snapping resources in which you create connectors.
1.
2.
To snap resources together by creating new connectors, click the Snap button
Click one of the resources you want to snap together. The resource changes color and the Define
Reference Plane (From) dialog box displays.
Piping Design
Page 113
By default the Define Plane button is selected, allowing you to select a plane for the connector you
will create.
See Creating Connectors for information about using the Define Plane functions.
The two resources will have a Master-Slave relationship to each other - but only if you choose to add a
constraint (see below). If you add a constraint the first object you select becomes the slave, and the
second object becomes the master.
Also note that the first resource you select will move to snap - the second resource you select remains
stationary.
3. Select the second resource. The Define Reference Plane (To) box will display - make your selections
as explained above. You can also select an existing connector. Click OK when done. The two
resources will snap together and the Constraint Options dialog box will display.
4. You can clear the Align, Face and Orientation check boxes and click OK if you want the two resources
to remain snapped together without any new connectors being created.
5.
To add one or more constraints - which will also result in creating connectors - follow the steps given
below.
Make your selections in the Snap Options box.
Align: You can increase distance between the two resources, but if you change the alignment the
Piping Design
Page 114
slave will snap back to the original alignment. In the image below the distance is increased but the
alignment remains the same.
Face: The two resources will maintain the face if you move one of them. In the image below the two
maintain the same face, though the alignment has changed.
Orientation: The two connectors will maintain the same orientation if you move them, i.e. the red
arrows visible in the connectors will align. It is therefore important to make sure that the red arrows
in the connectors are pointed correctly and oriented correctly with reference to the part. The red
arrow is usually set to the "Up" position of the resource, which means that on both resources they
should point in the Up direction. If the red arrow points "down" in one resource and "up" in the
other, then the resources will snap together incorrectly. You can toggle the position of the red arrow
by clicking on the green arrow that is parallel to the plane.
Fix in space: If you select this option the position of the master resource is fixed - if it is moved it
will snap back to its original position.
Attach: Checking this option allows you to attach the two objects.
Place manipulator at snapped location: Check this if you want to rotate the snapped object after
placing it. The manipulator is placed on the object if you check this. You can then click on the bottom
curve of the manipulator (see image below) and rotate the object. It will rotate in increments, based
on the value entered in the Snap Angle field. In the image above it is 45 degrees.
Piping Design
Page 115
To remove a constraint select it in the specifications tree and delete it. To remove the 'Fix in space'
option right click on the Fix line in the specifications tree, click Properties, go to the Constraints tab,
and uncheck the Fix in space box.
6. Click OK when done.
7.
To snap resources together using preexisting connectors:

a. Click the Snap button.
b. Move the pointer over the first resource - the connectors will display. Select the connector.
c. Move the pointer over the second resource - the connectors will display. Select the connector
and the two resources will snap together.
d. The Snap Options box will display. Make your selections and click OK.
Piping Design
Page 116

This task shows you how to Quick Snap two resources together.
The Quick Snap procedure allows you to snap two resources together using one of three selection
methods. You can select the snapping point on one of the resources using one of these methods. On the
other resource the snapping point will either be its origin, or at a connector, as described in Step 2. The
three selection methods are:
Center of three points (on a circle): the snapping will be the center of three points indicated by you.
Center of polygon: the snapping point will be the center of any surface indicated by you.
Surface: the snapping point is at any point indicated by you.
The three methods are described below.
To snap resources together using the center of three points on a circle method, click the Snap Three
Points button
1.
2.
Click the resource that you want to move. Note:
If you click the resource at a connector it will snap to the other resource at that connector. You
can create a connector if you want to.
If you click the resource at a point other than a connector it will join to the other resource at its
origin.
If the resource was preselected when you clicked the snap command you will not be able to select
a connector.
These points apply to all three methods of Quick Snap.

In the image below the user wants the paint gun to snap to the robot arm. After he clicks the paint
gun the compass displays at the origin of the paint gun to show that the part will snap at that
location.
You can choose not to display the compass at the snap location by unchecking the option Place
compass at snapping point in the Snap Options dialog box. The box displays when you click on any
of the Quick Snap buttons. Placing the compass at the snapping location allows you to rotate the
resource after it has snapped.
Piping Design
3.
Page 117
Define the point on the robot where you want the paint gun to snap, in this case the end of the robot
arm, by clicking on three points. You can only select your defining points on the edges of a circle.
Only points on the ends of edges are selectable. Note:
If you click the three points clockwise the paint gun will attach "inward" as shown in the image below:
If you click counter clockwise then the paint gun will attach "outward", which is the correct position in
this example.
Piping Design
Page 118
4.
To Quick Snap using the center of polygon method, click the Snap Center of Polygon
and perform the action detailed in Step 2.
5.
button
Select the snapping point on the second resource by clicking on a surface. The resource will be placed
in the center of the polygon.
6.
To Quick Snap using the surface method, click the Snap Surface
detailed in Step 2.
7.
button and perform the action
Select the snapping point on the second resource by clicking on any surface. The resource will be
placed at the point you click.
If you double click a command you will be in repeat mode. This allows you to snap a resource to a
different location, using a different selection method if you want.
Piping Design
Page 119

This task shows you how to rotate a resource after snapping it to another resource.
1. With both resources on the screen, click on the Snap

appear.
button and then on a resource. The orientation symbol will
2. Click on the second resource. A white square will appear. Move the pointer over the resource and click when the white
square is at the location where you want to snap the two resources. The orientation symbol will appear at the location
and the Define Reference Plane dialog box will display.
Piping Design
Page 120
3.
Click on the Define plane using compass button
snap the two resources.
. The compass will be placed at the location where you want to
4. Click OK on the Define Reference Plane box. The two resources will snap together.
5.
Click on the Select button
to exit the Snap command. Click on the resource you want to rotate, then grab one of
the handles on the compass with your pointer and move it. Different handles will move/rotate the resource in different
directions.
You can also double click on the compass to bring up the Compass Manipulation dialog box and enter the required
figure in the Angle field. Click on the + or - sign next to the Z axis to rotate it.
Piping Design
Page 121
Piping Design
Page 122

This task shows you how to define a plane to use as a temporary reference for positioning other elements.
The second part of the document explains the use of an advanced offset plane, which allows you to define origin, orientation
and other parameters.
1.
Select the Offset Plane icon
.
2. Define the reference plane by doing the following:
a. Place your cursor over a geometric element that defines the plane (e.g., a construction plane, boundary, area
contour, item reservation).
As you move the cursor, a small white rectangle is displayed to show the selectable planes, as
shown below.
If you do not see the white rectangle, zoom out from the drawing. The white rectangle cannot be displayed if
the element under your cursor is displayed too small.
The white rectangle changes to a blue rectangle, and remains displayed on the reference
element, as shown below.
Piping Design
Page 123
The reference plane can now be used as a reference to position other elements.
3. Use the advanced offset plane feature to set your plane reference, origin and orientation settings as
follows:
a. Click the Advanced Offset Plane button.
The Define Plane dialog box will display.
b. The Define Plane button is selected by default. However, you can select any button in the Define Plane box. Click
when you have found a location. The plane manipulator displays.
Click on the buttons in the Define Plane dialog box to make your selections. See Creating Connectors on
using the buttons.
c. Click OK when done. The reference plane will be created.
Piping Design
Page 124

This task shows you how to display detailed information about objects as you move the pointer over
them.
The Analyze Item command displays information about an object when the pointer passes over it. This
information can include line IDs, nominal size of runs and parts, XYZ coordinates of connectors, etc. The
type of information shown will depend on the object and the product you are using. See also Display
Information About Routables.
From Release 13 the angle of routables from the x,y,z axis will also display, as in the image below.
1.
With your document open, click the Analyze Item button
.
2. Move the pointer in the document highlighting various objects. Attributes and their values are
displayed, depending on the type of object highlighted. In the illustration below the pointer is on a
tubing tee.
3. When you click again the feature will be disabled.
Piping Design
Page 125
Piping Design
Page 126
Disabling/Enabling Manipulation Handles

This task shows you how to disable or enable manipulator handles using the Toggle Manipulator Handle
Mode command.
The default is for the manipulation handles to be enabled. If you are working on a large document,
however, displaying the handles on each part can take up time. If you do not need the handles then you
can use this feature to disable the display. It is a toggle button, so clicking it again will enable the
handles. This feature can be used with parts placed in-line or in free space.
To disable display of the manipulation 'handles' click the Toggle Manipulation Handle Mode button
1.
. To enable them again click the button once more. The handles look like a green box on parts
placed in free space. On parts placed in line they look like the image below.
Piping Design
Page 127

This task shows you how to use the Quick Translate command to move elements.
This function allows the user to transfer an element relative to a location on another element by any of
the following alignment methods:
Point-to-Point
Point-to-Line
Point-to-Plane
Plane-to-Plane
Plane-to-Point
Line-to-Point
An object or element moved using this command does not rotate.
This function works with parts placed in a run only before the pipes, tubes have been placed. The placing
of such objects prevents the part, e.g., a valve, from moving.
1.
With your document open, click the Quick Translate button
. The Translate dialog box opens.
Depending upon which From element you select the available To elements will either be greyed out
or become active.
Piping Design
Page 128
2.
Select the type of transfer, Point-to-Point, Point-to-Plane, etc. Using the Point-to-Point method as an
example, select a point on the From element, a valve, in your document and select a point on the To
element, the nozzle on the sea pump.
3.
The transfer occurs when you click on the To element. Click the Update button, if necessary. The
valve has moved to align with the nozzle.
4.
The function works similarly with the other From/To selection methods and may be applied as the
design dictates.
Piping Design
Page 129
Activating the Product/Product Parent

This task shows you how to activate the product or product's parent.
This command can be useful when you have numerous objects and/or documents displayed in the
specifications tree. It helps you activate an object, or locate the parent to which an object belongs.
1.
Click the button Activate Product's Parent
2.
. The Activate Product dialog box displays.
If you want to activate an object then click on the object, in the specifications tree or viewer. If you
want to activate the object's parent, then click the checkbox Activate Product's Parent and select the
object. The parent will be selected and highlighted in the specifications tree.
Piping Design
Page 130

This task shows you how to transfer elements to a new document. You can use this function to transfer
elements to documents or work packages that are under the same Product. See also Transfer Run to
Another Document.
This function removes selected elements from a document and moves them to a new document. You
cannot move them to an existing document.
1.
. The Transfer Elements
With your document open, click the Transfer Elements button
dialog box displays. In the image below it displays equipment that has been selected.
2. You can select elements to transfer in various ways:
Click the element you want to transfer.
Click the Select Elements in Range

Networks dialog box that displays.
Click the Select Spools
Click the Select Line IDs
button and make your selection in the Analyze
button and make your selection in the Selection List.
button and make your selection in the Selection List.
3. If you do not want to transfer some elements in the Selection List, select the element(s) and click
Remove. Remove All removes all elements.
Piping Design
Page 131
4. Make your selections. Spools and Lines will display the existing name in the File Name field. You can
edit this name, or add a Prefix or Suffix (or both) to distinguish it from the original name. Elements
do not display any name - you need to enter a name. In this example it is TestTransfer. The image
below shows the entries in the specifications tree, with the Equipments node expanded, before the
transfer.
5. The vessel has been selected for transfer (the associated nozzle will automatically be selected). Click
Apply or OK. Apply allows you to transfer more elements. OK exits you from the command. The
image below shows the transferred equipment.
Piping Design
Page 132
Piping Design
Page 133
Query or Modify the Properties of an Object

This section explains ways of querying and modifying the properties of objects.
Filter Shown Properties of an Object
Renaming Objects
Changing the Size or Spec of a Part
Piping Design
Page 134

This task shows you how to edit or display the properties of an object.
1.
Select the component.
2.
Click Edit - Properties or, as an alternative, right-click and select Properties. The Properties dialog box
appears with the properties displayed under various tabs. Some of these properties are computed
and cannot be modified. To see which properties are computed click the Filter button.
Piping Design
Page 135
If the object cannot have derived values, the Derived checkboxes will not display. If a Derived
checkbox is selected, it means the value is derived. If it is not checked the values are not derived. A
value is considered to be derived when it is obtained from another object. For instance, a piping
route may derive the values of some properties from the line of which it is a member.
The Properties dialog box displays several tabs:
The Graphic tab allows you to change the looks.
The Object tab displays information about the object such as ID, Function Class, Parent Group or
Group Members, depending on the object being queried.
Under the Product tab you can make changes to the basic Product in the specifications tree, such as
renaming. You can include additional descriptive and historical data.
One or more application tab - such as Piping or Equipment - lists various properties. They will display
depending on the class of object whose properties you are editing. Click the More button if one of
these tabs does not display, or if you want to see other tabs. More than one tab may display for some
objects, such as Piping and Equipment, if the object has properties in more than one domain.
The filter button lets you use the filter function. See Filter the Properties of an Object.
See Infrastructure documentation (Basic Tasks - Manipulating Objects - Displaying and Editing Graphic
Properties) and Product Structure documentation (User's Tasks - Modifying Component Properties) for
more information.
3. Enter values in the fields as desired and click OK. The properties will be edited.
4. You can override derived values by modifying the values as outlined in Step 3. The Derived checkbox
will become unchecked. You can also override derived values by unchecking the Derived checkbox.
To revert to derived values check the Derived checkbox.
5. Click OK to end.
Some objects have discrete values - which means you may only select certain values. In that case you
will be able to display a drop-down box and select one of the values in it.
Piping Design
Page 136

This task shows how you can change the order in which properties are displayed.
This task shows how you can change the display order in the Properties dialog box. You can also use this
function to select the properties that you want displayed in the dialog box. This change applies to the
class or subclass. NOTE: When you use the Filtering function the changes apply to all classes in the
application. Changing the display order applies only to the class or subclass you choose, as explained
below.
You must use internal names for this function. To find out the internal names of classes or properties,
open the Feature Dictionary Editor, go to the relevant CATfct file and generate a report. Internal names
for properties are listed in the column "Attribute Key". Internal names for classes are shown against the
entry "Object Key". The process of generating a report is explained in the Feature Dictionary section of
this documentation.
1. Create a text file using a text editor such as Wordpad, and give the file the same name (use the
internal name) as the class whose display you want to change. For example, if the class is
'compressor function' then name the file CompressorFunction.txt. There should only be one file for
each class.
2. Enter the properties in this file, in the order you want to see them displayed in the Properties dialog
box. Any property that you do not enter will not display. For a globe valve for instance, you may only
want to see the following. Other properties will not display.
NominalSize
EndStyle
Rating
MaterialCode
You can choose to display computed properties also by adding them to this list. However, for
computed properties to display they must also be entered in the computed attributes text file
(XXXComputedAttributes.txt), where XXX is the domain name. For example:
HangerComputedAttributes.txt, PipingComputedAttributes.txt, etc. The computed attributes text files
are located under the directory ...intel_a\startup\\EquipmentAnd
Systems\\MultiDiscipline\SampleData. These files must also be referenced in the PRM file. For
more information on Computed attributes see Computed Attributes and Methods; for more
information on the PRM file, see Project Resource Management.
3.
Save the file in a directory of your choice. Modify the project resource management file to reflect the
directory in which the file is located. To do this, change the entry for the resource "Attribute Display
List". See PRM documentation for more information.
The display order will apply to subclasses also, unless a subclass has its own display order text file.
Piping Design
Page 137
Filter the Shown Properties of an Object

This task shows how you can filter the properties of an object.
Filtering the properties means you can choose to display or hide any of the properties shown in the
Properties dialog box. You can only filter properties for objects that are unique to the Design application
you have open. Note that any changes you make will apply to all objects that have this property. To
make changes for a class or subclass only see Changing the Display Order of Properties. The following
scenario features Hanger Design, but the process applies to all applications, including Diagrams.
1. Click the Filter button on the Properties dialog box (Edit or display properties of an object). The
Attribute Filter box displays.
2.
An X in the column Show means the attribute is displayed in the Properties dialog box. An X in the
column Computed means the attribute is computed. If you check the checkbox Show Only
Attributes with Value, then only attributes that have a value will display in the Properties dialog box.
Click on each property to toggle between Display and Hide. An X next to a property means it is
displayed. The settings will be retained when you open the Properties dialog box again.
Piping Design
Page 138
Renaming Objects
This task shows you how to rename objects.
1.
. The Rename dialog box displays. In the view below you can
With your document open, select the object and click the Rename button
see that the ID field is displaying the name assigned by the application; in this case, P-004, indicating that this is the fourth instance of a pipe
being placed in this document.
2. If you wish to rename the object (or instance) enter the new name in the ID field. To revert to the Default ID click on the Set to default
button.
3. If you want to rename additional objects click Apply and continue renaming.
4. Click OK when finished. The objects will be renamed.
Piping Design
Page 139
Using this command to rename a object does not rename all instances of that object. If you have placed an object more than once in a document
and want to rename all of them, you will have to rename each one, individually.
Piping Design
Page 140
Changing the Size or Specification of a Part

This task shows you how to resize a part, or group of parts, or change the specification.
1.
. The Resize/Respec window opens. (The

With your document open click the Resize/Respec Part button
Reset/Resize/Respec buttons become available after you make a selection.)
2. To change the size or specification of parts in a network, click the Select elements in range button. The Analyze
Networks dialog box displays. Click the Path tab and set the From Object and To Object.
When Current Path and Number of objects in current path accurately reflect the range you want to select, click Close.
The Resize/Respec dialog box opens. Click Resize to open the Resize Parts dialog box, explained in the next step.
3.
Nominal Size: This field displays the size of parts in your selection. If there is more than one size in your selection then more
than one size displays, as in the image above. If one part has more than one size (a reducer) and you have checked the
option List Multiple Sized Parts in the Resize/Respec dialog box, then the display will be as shown below, to allow for more
flexibility in selection.
Piping Design
Page 141
The asterisks after the value will be replaced by a value once you make your selection in the To field. For a rectangular object
you will get height and width fields. See HVAC Design documentation.
You can highlight your selection change, or reframe it, using the buttons. If the Resize Run and Validate Turns (checks
for turn radius errors) options are grayed out, it is because these operations are not relevant - there is no run selected. Move
your pointer over a part to see values for various properties.
Make your changes and click OK, to open the Define Part Options dialog box.
4. The Define Part Options dialog box allows you to select a part when you have more than one selectable part.
The first line shows an error - you will not be able to resize the nozzle.
The asterisk in the first column means you have more than one selectable option for this part.
The Options field appears when you select a part. Click on the down arrow to display your options, shown above.
Make your selection and click OK. The selected parts will be resized.
5. To change the specification, click the Respec button after making your selection (Step 2). The Respec Parts dialog box
opens, allowing you to change/add the specification. The From and To fields display after you select a specification. In HVAC
Design the column headings are different. See HVAC Design documentation.
Piping Design
Page 142
6.
, and select
To change the size or spec of all members of a line ID in the active document click the Select Line button
the Line ID in the Selection List that displays. Click OK and the Resize/Respec dialog box will open. Make changes as
necessary.
7.
; select the spool in the
To change the size or specification of members of a Spool, click the Select Spool button
Selection List that displays, and click OK. With the Resize/Respec dialog box open, proceed as above, making the desired
changes.
8.
To change the size or spec of a single part select it in the document or from the specification tree and click the Resize/Respec
button. The Resize/Respec dialog box will open. Select the Resize or Respec button and make your changes.
Piping Design
Page 143

This task shows you how values are assigned to parts that you have placed.
Placed parts get their values from various sources, a list of which is provided below. This task explains the
rules that govern how these values are assigned to parts. Users may need to know this information so
that they can assign attributes in such a way that the parts they place obtain the correct values. In most
cases this follows a standard pattern, but some users may need to change the way in which values are
assigned in order to meet special needs. Only values are derived, not the attributes. An attribute must be
defined on both the part and the 'parent' object or a value cannot be assigned.
Values can be assigned to a placed part from the following seven sources:
From the part itself.
A run.
A connector.
Based on a specifications catalog.
A line.
From a 2-D function (in the case of schematic driven design only).
Defined by the user.
1.
If a value has been assigned to an attribute during part build time, then that value will be used when
the part is placed. Examples of attributes whose values are defined in the part are: material category,
material code, part numbers.
2.
If a part is placed on a run:
3.
A bendable part will pick up the bend radius and the nominal size values from the run. Other parts
will pick up the nominal size value only.
If you select a connector before placing a part then the values will be derived from the connector. The
image below shows a connector with attributes and values displayed.
Piping Design
Page 144
If the valve shown above had already been placed on a run, and you selected the run before placing a
new part, then that new part would have derived values from the run.
In the HVAC Design application, if you select a connector to place a new part, then the values will
actually be assigned to the new part. In other applications you will be provided with a part that
matches the nominal size and other attribute values.
4.
Some of the attributes typically defined on a connector are those displayed above: wall thickness,
rating, end style and nominal size.
If you are selecting parts from a specifications catalog:
If the part being placed does not have an attribute value defined, then the value will be obtained from
the specification.
5.
If the value is defined in both the specification and on the part then the value on the part will remain
unchanged.
When you are placing a part as part of a line:
If the part does not have an attribute value defined, then the value will be obtained from the line.
If the value is defined on both the line and the part then the value on the part will remain unchanged.
6.
Attributes that are typically defined on the line are: insulation specification, insulation thickness,
temperature and pressure.
In schematic driven design:
If the value is not defined on the physical part then it will be obtained from the function.
7.
8.
If the value is defined on the the function and the physical part then the value on the physical part
will remain unchanged.
User defined:
During part build time some attributes can be defined as override parameters, which means the user
defines the value. For such attributes, users will be prompted to define values at parts placement
time.
The application attempts to determine values in the order given above - if the part itself does not
have a value it will examine the line, then the run and so on.
Piping Design

Ways of modifying a piping part are discussed in this section.
Placing Parts
Flipping a Part
Inserting a Part
Placing Transitional Objects On a Run
Switching Graphic Representations
Page 145
Piping Design
Page 146
Placing Parts
This task shows you how to place a part on a run. This function allows you to filter (or search) a catalog for
parts that meet the criteria that you specify. You are presented with a list of parts that meet these criteria
so that you can select the part that you want to place.
The same procedure is used for placing parts at a location other than a run. Also, while piping parts are
used in this example, the procedure is the same for other types of parts.
See also Detecting Clash in Parts Placement and Placing Parts Using a Schematic.
Note that this application incorporates intelligent design functions. This means that the application ensures
your design meets a selection of criteria. These criteria are established by Design Rules. For instance, the
design rules will match the threaded end of a pipe to the threaded end of a part. (You can override the
rules if necessary.) There are certain general design rules that apply to all parts you place. Other rules
apply to parts you place from a specifications catalog or a standard. Theoretically you can create a new
standard and not incorporate any design rules. However, your parts will not place correctly if you do so.
A set of sample design rules is included with this application. But most users (administrators, not individual
users) will create or add to these. See Rules Overview to find out which rules affect parts placement.
The standard and specifications catalog that you use for parts placement is defined in the setup data. See
Understanding Project Resource Management.
1.
With the run displayed, click on the Place Piping Part button
displays. (In the image below the user has already made some selections.)
The first row of buttons provides you with placement options. This can aid you in selecting a placement
location in a busy document. Move the cursor over the button to see its name.
Select or Indicate: This is the default selection and allows you to select or indicate a placement
location.
Select Run Only: You can only select a run.
Select Connector Only: Allows you to select a part connector only. First select a part - all connectors
display - then select the connector.
Piping Design
Page 147
Indicate On Local XY Plane: You can select a location that is on the XY plane of the local axis of the
document.
Indicate on Compass Plane: You can select a location that is on the compass plane. If the compass is
inactive then the local plane will be used.
Select Surface: Select a surface and then select a location.
Use Compass Z for Placement Up Orientation: The part will align itself with the compass Z direction,
and not the default 'up' direction of the part. In the image below the valve on the left shows the
default up direction, the valve on the right aligns to the compass Z direction.
2. Select a location for the part - you have to do this before you can display the Class Browser. See below
if you want to multi-place parts.
You may want to place the same part in more than one location - for instance you have a run with several
bends and you want to place an elbow at each bend. You can multi-place parts in one of two ways. Before
you select a location (Step 3) click the Multi-Place Parts button. Or do a Shift-Click when you select the
location. Now when you select a part it will be placed at all compatible locations. This works with elbows
and pipes.
The multi-place function applies to one run. If your run is broken, and you use the multi-place function, it
will apply to a single run. If the Break Run at every placed part option is checked then the multi-place
function may not work. To check or uncheck the option go to Tools - Options - Equipment and Systems and
select/unselect the Design Criteria tab.
3. If the Clear Filter button is enabled it means that values from a previous part placement exist in the
Filter Definition dialog box. (See Step 5.) Click the button if you want to clear these values.
4. If you want to change the values of one or more properties of the part you want to filter for, then click
the Filter Definition button to display the Filter Definition dialog box. Select the property whose value
you want to change and then select the new value from the drop down box in the Value field. (The Value
field will display after you select a property.) This new value will appear in the Override value column.
The values in the Override value column will be used when searching for parts in the catalog.
Piping Design
Page 148
The Override button brings up the Manage Override Parameters dialog box, allowing you to change
attribute values.
The Flip Part button allows you to flip parts that can be flipped, such as a reducer.
The Move/Rotate button displays the Move/Rotate dialog box, allowing you to manipulate the part.
The Pipe Selection and Pipe Segment Shortcut buttons are shortcuts that let you select part type.
Click the Spec Driven button if you want part placement to be specifications driven.
The Change to Schematic Mode button lets you toggle between schematic and non-schematic mode.
You will exit the command when you click this button and need to click the Place Part command
again.
5. Click the Class Browser button to display the Class Browser. Double click on Piping Part Function to
expand the list.
Piping Design
Page 149
6. Select a function and click OK. The function will display in the Place Piping Part dialog box.
7. In the Place Piping Part dialog box, click on the down arrow in the Part Type field to display a list of part
types (if there is more than one) and select the part type you want. If there is only one part type it will
be preselected. If the Part Type field is grayed out then click again on the location where you want to
place the part.
8. The Part Selection box will display after you select a part type - if there is more than one selection. It will
not display if there is only one selection available to you.
If the part you want to place can be created as a light object, you will be able to differentiate between
heavy and light sample parts. Heavy parts are identified by the letters HV in the part name. Light parts
do not have any designation.
Piping Design
Page 150
9. Select the part you want to place and click where you want to place it. The part will be placed. In the
image below it is a straight pipe. If there is only one selection available to you then click after Step 6.
To ensure correct placement of pipes in a run you should first place all the in-line components and then
place the pipes.
You can choose to display or hide a "preview" of the part you are placing. To do this click on Tools Options and select Equipment & Systems and the General tab. Check or uncheck the box Display
image while placing catalog object in 3D viewer to obtain the effect you want.
By default, when you click (in free space) to place a part the center of that part will be placed at that
location. The center is determined by the application by drawing a box around the part and selecting the
center of the base of the box. You can also choose to place the origin of the part at the point where you
click. To do this click on Tools - Options and select Equipment & Systems and the General tab. Check
the box Place at component's origin when placing in free space.
After you move or modify a run or part, click the Update Part button
and select a part to update that
part, or select the run to update the run. You only need to do this if the application does not update the
object.
Piping Design
Page 151

This task shows you how to rotate a piping part.
A piping part can only be rotated if it is in free space - connected components cannot be rotated.
1. With your component displayed, click and drag the compass and place it on the part you want to rotate.
2. Move the pointer to the highlight the compass for the desired direction of rotation.
3. At this point there are two methods of rotating the part. If you know the exact amount of rotation required, double click on the highlighted
arc (visible in Step 2). The Compass Manipulation dialog box opens. Enter the exact amount of rotation in the desired axis; in this case
the Y axis. Click Apply new position and then Close.
Piping Design
The alternate method is to grab the compass and rotate the part to the desired degree of rotation.
Page 152
Piping Design
Page 153
Flipping a Part
This task shows you how to flip a piping part. "Flipping" here means connecting the part by using a different connector
than the one currently used.
1.
Click on the Flip Part Position button
and then click on the part you want to flip. You can repeat this step to
keep trying out all the connectors on the part. In the image below, the tee has three connectors. This step has been
used twice to try out all the connectors.
Some parts cannot be flipped. In such cases you will get an error message.
Piping Design
Page 154
Inserting a Part
This task shows you how to insert a part.
This procedure is used for inserting a part, such as a tee, at a location on a pipe, for instance. This
effectively splits the pipe into two parts.
1.

With the run displayed, click the Place Piping Part button
displays. Click the Class Browser button and navigate to the type of part you want to place. See
Placing a Part on a Run.
2.
Select the part you want to place and click where you want to place it. The part will be placed. In
the image below a tee has been inserted in a straight pipe.
3.
To learn about adjusting the location of the part once it is placed, see Move/Rotate In-Line Parts.
Piping Design
Page 155
Page 156
Piping Design

This task shows you how to move or rotate an inline part. This function gives the user the ability to move
an in-line object that has been placed. Piping parts are used here for illustration purposes - the procedure
is the same for other types of parts.
Open a product having the conditions described above, or (with Autoparts disabled) create a simple run,
place a valve and a pipe.
1.
To move or rotate a part click the Move/Rotate Part on the Run button
. The Move/Rotate
dialog box appears. Two buttons in the Move/Rotate dialog box allow you to move (offset)
rotate
, or
physical parts.
2.
To move the part, click the Move Physical Part button
Select the part; it will highlight orange. An offset plane will appear on one end of the inline pipe.
The Offset Value field will open permitting you to enter the desired offset value
(where the offset plane appears).
. The offset is measured from the end of the inline bendable
Piping Design
Page 157
The Toggle offset plane button opposite the Offset value field allows you to toggle the offset plane to
either end of the segment so that you can make measured movements of the part in either direction.
If you already know the amount of offset required, enter it in the Offset value field and click OK. The
part will be moved. If no other move operations are to be performed, click OK in the Move/Rotate
dialog box.
3.
Click the Rotate Physical Parts button
Select the part you want to rotate; it will highlight orange.
The Angle Value field will open permitting you to enter a value for the degree of rotation.
This can be either a positive or a negative value.
Enter the desired degree of rotation, e.g., 90 deg, and click OK. The part will be rotated.
If no other rotate operations are to be performed, click OK in the Move/Rotate dialog box.
You can rotate an inline part using the compass or set the angle of rotation by aligning it with a line or
point on another object.
Piping Design
Page 158
4.
To rotate an inline part using the compass, click the Rotate Physical Parts button
part you want to rotate, e.g., the valve; it will highlight orange.
. Select the
Place the compass on the valve as shown and drag the compass. The valve will rotate and the Angle
Value field will continually update the angle of rotation as you move the compass.
5. To rotate an inline part by aligning it with a line or point on another object, we must create the other
object.
Open the Plant Layout workbench by going to Start - AEC Plant - Plant Layout. Create an item
reservation next to the objects created in the previous steps.
. Select the part you want to rotate, e.g., the

Now, click the Rotate Physical Parts button
valve; it will highlight orange. Place the compass on the valve as shown and drag the compass. The
valve will rotate to align with the location of the compass on the item reservation. Click OK to close the
Move/Rotate dialog box.
Piping Design
Page 159
Repeat the command and select the valve so that it is highlighted and select a line on the item
reservation. The valve will rotate to align with the selection. Similarly, select a point (green dot) to
align with.
If no other rotate operations are to be performed, click OK in the Move/Rotate dialog box.
Piping Design
Page 160
Placing Transitional Objects on a Run

This task discusses "transitional" objects placed on a run.
For purposes of discussion, transitional objects are defined by any one of three criteria:
Objects that transition a change in size (e.g., 2in to 1in reducer)
Objects that transition a change in shape (e.g., round duct to rectangular)
Objects that transition a change in alignment (e.g., twisted section)
Transitional part types are reducers, transitions, and twisting parts. When placed on a run, these
transitional objects split the run. In the following scenario we will use the Piping Design application to
illustrate this function.
1.
2.
Create a simple run and click the Place Part button
. The Place Part dialog box opens.
3.
opposite the Function type field. The Class

Select the run, then click the Browser button
Browser opens.
Expand Piping Part Function and select Reducer Function.
4.
Under Part Type, select Eccentric Reducer.
5.
In the Part Selection dialog box, select a Part Number that is appropriate for the size of the run. For
example, if you created a 2 in. run, select REDECC-WM-BW-2in-1in.
6.
Place the part and notice that now there are two runs of different sizes. In the specifications tree,
note that in addition to the Reducer Function and Reducer, there is also a second Run.
Piping Design
Page 161
Piping Design
Page 162

This task shows how you can detect clashes between parts when you are moving parts in a document.
This function only works when you are placing/moving parts in free space. It will not work if the parts
have been placed on a run, for instance. Three modes are available: Clash Detection Off; Clash Detection
On, and Clash Detection Stop.
1.
To turn clash detection off click the Clash Detection (off) button
. This is the default mode.
2.
To turn clash detection on click the Clash Detection (On) button
. When you move a part in
such a way that it interferes with another part, a red outline will display, as in the images below. (If
your part displays red highlights and you want to change the color you can do so by clicking ToolsOptions-Display and selecting another color.)
3.
. When this mode is on
To change to the stop mode click the Clash Detection (Stop) button
you will not be able to move a part to a position in which it interferes with another part. In the first
image below the pump has been stopped because it interferes with the heat exchanger. However,
when the user moves his pointer to the other side, and there is enough room for the pump, the
pump will appear on the other side of the exchanger.
Piping Design
Page 163
Manage Graphic Representations

This task shows you how to manage graphic representations for a part. See also Define Graphic
Representations in the section Building Parts.
You use this function to change the graphic representation that is active, or displayed, in your document.
1.
With your document displayed click the Manage Graphic Representations button. The
Representations dialog box displays.
The window displays all graphic representation categories in the document, even if the part type is
from a different application, e.g. if you open the document in a piping application, you will also see
categories for tubing parts and equipment.
2.
Select one of the Range options.
Single object: You can select a single part or run. Runs can be displayed as single or double.
Selection: Select the parts in your document first, by clicking on them, and then click the
Manage Graphic Representations button. You can now change the category of all the parts you
selected.
All: You can change the category of all parts in your document.
All runs: You can change the category of all runs in your document.
The options under the Mode section allow you to replace or add a representation. Except for runs
and light objects, other objects can have more than one representation active at the same time. If
you check Add and continue to Step 3, the representation will be added to the visible representation
(for example, single and double will display at the same time). If you check Replace, the visible
representation will be replaced by the representation you select.
Piping Design
3.
Page 164
Change the graphic representation that is active by selecting a different category in the window.
Based on what you selected under Range, one object, more than one selected objects or all objects
in your document will change to the newly selected category. The images below show a valve as
double, and envelope.
Piping Design
Page 165

This task shows you how to place a part under the active parent, such as in a sub-document.
When you place a part on a routable, it will place in the same document to which the routable belongs.
This command can be used to place a part in a document that is different from the one to which a
routable belongs. This will only work for documents that are sub-documents of the one to which the
routable belongs. You cannot use it to place a part in a document that is at a higher level.
The sub-document in which you want to place the part should be the active document - activate it by
double clicking or any other means.
1. With the routable on which you want to place the part displayed, click the button Place New Part
2.
Under Active Parent

.
The part will place on the routable and will show in the specifications under the document you
selected. In the image below, the run is in the document Product2, but the valve placed on it is in
the sub-document Product3.
Piping Design
Page 166

This task shows you how to query a document to find out how many auto parts it contains. You can also
convert auto parts into 'non-auto' parts.
Auto parts are so called because they are placed automatically when you place certain other parts. When
you delete the part with which they are associated, the auto parts are also deleted. In addition, auto
parts cannot be modified. However, you can use this function to convert them to 'non-auto' parts, in
which case their behavior will be like that of normal parts.
1.
With your document open, click the Query Auto Parts button
box displays.
2.
. The Query Auto Parts dialog
If you check the option Highlight current elements then the auto parts that display in the dialog
box window will be highlighted in the 3D viewer.
Piping Design
3.
Page 167
Choose one of the Selection Options.
Single part: Select a part and this option. All auto parts associated to the part will display in the
dialog box window.
Single Run: Select a run and this option. All auto parts in the run will display in the dialog box
window.
Selection: First make your selection in the document, then click the Query Auto Parts button
to open this dialog box, and select this option.
Line ID: Select a line ID and this option. All auto parts in the line ID will display in the dialog box
window.
Active Parent: Select the active parent of the part/parts and this option.
Once you make your selection the auto parts will display in the window.
4.
To convert auto parts, click the Convert button. The action will apply to all auto parts displayed in
the Query Auto Parts dialog box. A second dialog box will ask you to confirm the action. Click OK
to convert the parts.
Piping Design
Flow Direction
This section discusses management of flow direction.
Display Flow Direction
Change Flow Direction
Page 168
Piping Design
Page 169
Displaying Flow Direction
This task shows you how to display the flow direction.

1.
With your document displayed click the Flow Direction button
. The Manage Flows box displays.
2. Click one of the buttons in the Manage Flows box to select your range: you can select elements, you can select a spool if one is
defined or you can select the line ID.
3.
Click the Select Elements button
. The Analyze Networks dialog box displays. Click the first and last objects in the range
whose flow you want displayed. Make sure you click the part, and not just the run. The objects you clicked will display in the
Analyze Networks box in the From Object and To Object fields.
4. Close the Analyze Networks box. The flow direction will display. (The Flow Options box will also display - you use it to change flow
direction as explained in Changing the Flow Direction.)
Piping Design
Page 170
5
To display the flow direction of a spool click the Select Spool button
listed.
. The Selection List box will display with all the spools
6 Select a spool and click OK. The flow direction will display on the spool you selected.
7
To see the flow direction of all members of a line ID click the Select Line ID button
. The Selection List box will display with
line IDs displayed. Select the line ID and click OK. The flow direction will display on all members of the line ID.
Piping Design
Page 171
Changing the Flow Direction

This task shows you how to change the flow direction.
1. With the flow direction displayed, as explained in Displaying Flow Direction, select the Single
Element option in the Flow Options box.
2. Click on one of the flow direction arrows so that it points in the direction you want. In the image
below the flow direction of the last arrow has changed.
3. Click the option All connected elements to one direction in the Flow Options box and then click
the flow direction arrow again. All parts connected to it (in the range that you selected) will change
flow direction to the same direction as the selected arrow.
Piping Design
Page 172
The flow direction will not change in a tee, or beyond a tee, even though it is connected and within your
selected range.
If the flow capability was defined when a part was built then you will not be able to change its flow
direction using this command.
Piping Design
Managing Spools
The following section explains ways of managing spools in a piping line.
Creating a Spool
Display and Edit Properties of a Spool
Transfer a Spool
Rename a Spool
Delete a Spool
Page 173
Piping Design
Page 174
Creating a Spool
This task shows you how to create a spool.
A spool is a grouping of objects much like an assembly is a group of components or parts. All objects in
a spool must be contiguous and connected to each other.
1.
In the following scenario a series of runs have been connected. Click on the Create Spool button
. The Create Spool dialog box will appear.
2.
Click on the New button. A dialog box will appear prompting you to define the range (from-to) for
the spool you want to create.
Piping Design
Page 175
To create a spool in a new document check the option Create Spool in a New Document and enter a
file name in the window that displays.
3.
Click the Define elements in range button
4.
. The Analyze Networks dialog box will open.
Click on the Path tab and select the From and To objects of the spool you want to create. The image
below shows the selected spool.
Piping Design
5.
6.
7.
Page 176
The spool is highlighted in the 3D viewer as are its members in the specification tree. The Analyze
Networks dialog box displays the From object and To object as well as the Number of objects in
the current path.
Click the Close button on the Analyze Networks dialog box.

The New dialog box opens again allowing you to name the spool you just created. You may accept
the default name or assign a name of your choosing. Click on the Use ID Schema button
to
activate the Name field and enter the name for the spool. Click on the Use ID Schema button if
you want to revert to the name assigned by the application. When finished, click OK. The spool is
created.
8. You can click the Show all spools feature in the New dialog box shown in Step 2. All spools in your
document will be highlighted.
Click again on the Create Spool button to see the list of spools you have created.
Piping Design
Page 177
Display or Edit Properties of a Spool

This task shows how to display and edit properties of a spool.
1.
With the Create Spool dialog box displayed, click the Properties button. The Properties dialog box
displays.
Piping Design
Page 178
The Properties dialog box will display tabs, most of which are used in all products. The Graphic tab allows you to change
the appearance of the object. Under the Product tab you can include additional descriptive and historical data and make
changes, such as renaming, to the basic Product in the specifications tree. See Infrastructure documentation ( Basic
Tasks - Manipulating Objects - Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties) and Product Structure documentation (User's
Tasks - Modifying Component Properties) for more information.
2. Click the More button to reveal the Object tab and all other available tabs. In the image above the Object tab
displays the members of the spool under Group Members.
3. Click on the Product tab to display properties and enter the values and information in the fields provided.
4. Click Apply or OK. The properties will be edited.
Some objects have discrete values - which means you may only select certain values. In that case you
will be able to display a drop-down box and select one of the values in it.
Piping Design
Page 179

This task shows you how to select or query a spool and its members.
When you select a spool, it will be highlighted in your product. In addition, by selecting the spool you are also
querying it for its members which are highlighted in the specifications tree.
1.
With your product open, click on the Create Spool button

. The Create Spools dialog box appears and
displays the list of spools for the current product. Click on a spool among the list to reveal its location and to
identify its members. You can also click on a part in the specifications tree to determine which spool it belongs
to.
2. Use the Sort and Filter options if needed.

3. When you are finished, click Close.
Piping Design
Page 180
Transfer a Spool
This task shows you how to transfer a spool to another document.
In the specifications tree, make active the document to which you want to transfer the spool, and
1.
2.
3.
4.
click the Create Spool button

. The Create Spools dialog box appears and displays the list of
spools for the current product.
Select the spool you want to transfer and then click the Transfer button. The Transfer dialog box
displays.
Check one of the options - the first option will result in a new document being created under the
active document, while the second option transfers the spool to the document you activated earlier.
Click OK. The spool is transferred.
Piping Design
Page 181

This task shows you how to modify a spool
1. With your document open select the spool you want to modify and click the Modify button.
2. The Modify dialog box displays. You can redefine, extend the range to add additional members, or remove members from the
spool.
When modifying a spool, your options are limited to extending its range to include additional members or removing members. Remember that
members may only be removed from the ends of a spool. The 'Remove members' feature will only let you remove members from the end of the
spool.
Piping Design
Page 182
3. Click to activate the Show all spools option. This will highlight all spools in the your product.
4.
To remove a member activate the Remove members option. Click on either the Keep all elements on first half button
or the
depending on which end you want to remove members from. If you clicked on Keep all
Keep all elements on second half button
members on second half, you will remove members, one at a time, from the first half (end) of the spool. Click the Keep all members
on first half button then click on the member you want to remove. All members from there to the end of the spool will be removed. In the view
below, members have been removed from the second half of Spool_001.
5. To add members to a spool, activate the Add Members option. There are two ways to add members to a spool.
You can redefine the range of the spool by clicking the Define new range feature and click on the Define elements in range
. The Analyze Network dialog box displays. Under the Path tab the range is undefined. Proceed in defining the range as
button
described in Creating a Spool. Select the beginning and end of the spool to include the new members.
The other method is to click the Append another range to current selection button
. The Analyze Network dialog box
displays. Proceed as has been described to define the new range of members you want to add to the current spool.
Piping Design
6. The new range of members are added to Spool_002.
7. Click OK and then Close the Create Spool dialog box.
Page 183
Piping Design
Page 184
Renaming a Spool
This task shows you how to rename a spool.
1.
Click on the Create Spool button
to bring up the dialog box showing the list of spools in the
current document. Select the spool you want to rename and click on the Modify button. The Modify
dialog box will display.
2.
3.
Enter the new name for the spool and press Enter.
When finished click OK. The spool will be renamed.
4.
To revert to the default naming convention click on the Use ID Schema button
Piping Design
Page 185
Deleting a Spool
This task shows you how to delete a spool.
1.
2.
3.
Click on the Create Spool button

current document.
to bring up the dialog box showing the list of spools in the
Select the spool you want to delete and click the Delete button.
When finished click Close. The spool will be deleted.
Piping Design
Analyzing Networks
This section discusses ways in which you can analyze networks.
Page 186
Piping Design
Page 187

This task shows you how to analyze a network for connections.
This function will show you all objects connected to any selected object. You can also use it to view all possible paths
between two selected objects.
1. To see all objects connected to any selected object, click Analyze - Networks in the menu bar, with your
document open. The Analyze Networks dialog box will display.
2. Select the Network tab and then select the object whose connections you want to see. The entire network will
highlight and the Analyze Networks box will display the number of objects there are in the network. In the image
below the smaller run is not highlighted because it is not connected to the bigger run.
Piping Design
Page 188
3. To see all possible paths between two objects click the Path tab in the Analyze Networks box, then click the two
objects. If there is a path between the two objects, it will highlight. If there are two or more possible paths, the
Current Path field in the Analyze Networks box will display how many paths there are when you click on the down
arrow. To see another path (if there is one) select it in the Current Path field.
Piping Design
Page 189
Piping Design
Page 190

This task shows you how to view all the objects related to a selected object. "Related" refers to objects
that are directly connected, as well as objects that are an organizational element, such as line IDs.
To use this function properly you must disable the Automatic Expand option for the specifications tree. To
do this click Tools - Options, go to General - Display and then the Tree tab, and uncheck Automatic
Expand.
1. With your document open, click Analyze - Related Objects in the menu bar. The Current Selection
Panel will display (see below).
2.
Make sure the View related objects option is checked, and select the object whose relatives you
want to see. All objects related to the selected object will display in the Current Selection Panel.
3.
You can also select one of the related objects shown in the Current Selection Panel to see which
objects they are related to.
Piping Design
4.
5.
Page 191
If you check Reframe on selection and then click on one of the objects in the Current Selection
Panel, the object will display in your screen even if it was not currently showing.
Checking the Freeze box will freeze the contents of the Current Selection Panel and it will no longer
be updated.
Piping Design
Page 192
Routing Tasks
This section explains some routing tasks that are in addition to the ones explained in the Basic Tasks section.
Routing at an Offset of a Routable
Fix broken routables
Piping Design
Page 193

This task shows how to align a run to an existing surface or edge while in directional routing mode.
This function uses the compass to align a run to the surface or edge. It is assumed that you have taken
the steps necessary to start a run. See Routing a Run.
1.
In the directional routing
mode move the compass that shows at the end of the run to the
edge whose angle you want to emulate.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The Z axis of the compass (it may read W) assumes the angle of the edge against which it is
held.
At the same time the last segment of your run assumes the angle of the compass' Z axis.
Click once at the end of the segment to move the compass back to it. You can repeat the action
to make the run align with any other edge or surface in the area.
Double click to end the run.
Piping Design
Page 194

This task shows you how to use the compass to route in any direction.
1.
Click on the Route a Run button
2.
Click on the Directional Routing button.
3.
4.
Select the type of run and enter other values. See Routing a Run for more details.
Click at the point where you want to start your run from. This places the compass at that point.
To begin routing click and drag the compass so that its Z axis (it may read W) is pointing in the
direction in which you want to route. Every time you want to change direction drag the Z (or W)
axis of the compass.
5.
Double click, or click OK to end your routing.
Piping Design
Page 195
You can also double click on the compass to bring up the Compass Manipulation dialog box, which allows
you to enter values to modify compass direction and/or location.
Piping Design
Page 196
Route a Run at an Offset of a Routable
This task shows you how to route a run at an offset of a routable. This function allows you to create a run paralleling an existing run, a
defined distance apart.
1.
Click the Create an Offset Route button.
2. Select a segment of the run to which you want an offset. The compass is placed on the segment.
3. The direction in which the Z axis of the compass is pointed determines where the new run will be placed: you can place the new run or
runs to the inside, to the outside or stacked on top of the existing run by adjusting the compass.
4. Enter your options in the Run dialog box.
5.
or Constant Clearance
button. If you click the Constant Radius button the radius of the
Click either the Constant Radius
turns will be maintained but the offset may vary. If you click the Constant Clearance button the offset will be maintained but the radius of
the turns may change. Click OK. The new runs will be created.
A negative offset may be entered to offset in the opposite direction to the compass Z direction.
In the illustration below the runs have been created with the Constant Clearance option.
Page 197
Piping Design

This task shows you how to route parallel to, or at an offset of, a routable. See also Routing at an Offset
of a Routable and Position Segment Relative to a Plane.
This function is used when you have an existing run and want to route parallel to it, or at a certain
clearance from it. It is sometimes known as edgeline routing. You can also place an offset plane on a
surface and use it as a reference point.
1.
Display the run you want to route parallel to and click on the Run button
displays.
. The Run dialog box
2.
Click on the Edgeline button
. The Distance field will display and the Offset
and Clearance
buttons will appear on the Run dialog box.
If you click the Offset button the distance between the two runs will be measured from centerline to
centerline. If you click the Clearance button the distance between the two nearest edges will be
measured. If there is a part on a piping or tubing line the distance will be measured from the part. If
there is no part the distance will be measured from the line.
3. Enter the distance between the two runs. If you enter 0 and click the clearance button, the two runs
will touch at the edges.
4. Click at the starting point. The compass will display at that point.
5. Move the compass so that the Z axis points in the direction that you want to route, which should be
in the direction of the run that you want to parallel. You can do this by moving it manually, or by
clicking the second mouse button once and then toggling the shift key.
Piping Design
Page 198
6.
Once you have the direction selected, route toward the run you want to parallel. Once the centerline
of the target run is highlighted you can press the Shift key to toggle between various "solutions," or
various sides. In the images below there are only two solutions and you can route on two sides of the
target run.
7.
8.
Select the target run after you have decided which side you are routing on.
Begin routing and double click to end. The finished run is shown below.
You can place an offset plane on a surface and use it as a reference to route parallel to, or to keep a
certain clearance from. After placing the offset plane use the procedure described above.
Piping Design
Page 199

This task shows you how to route a run along a spline.
1.
Import the model which contains the spline into the Piping Design workbench.
2.
3.
Click on the Route from Spline button.

Select type of run and enter other options. Note: The SAG option is used to define the maximum distance a
segment can be from the spline. The run that is created consists of straight segments, as you can see in the
illustration below. The smaller the SAG number entered, the closer the run will resemble the spline. But this will also
cause more segments to be created.
Select Create connection to curve if you want a connection between the run and the spline. If this option is
checked the run will move if the spline is moved.
Click on the spline. The run is created.
4.
5.
Piping Design
Fixing Broken Routables
Page 200
This task shows you how to fix - or rejoin - routables in which segments have become separated. In the illustration below, the dotted line - the broken routable indicator - shows that a
run has become separated at that point.
You can re-join the run in one of several ways, depending on the nature of the break and your requirements. The methods are as follows:
1. Bring up the Definition dialog box for the run, then place the mouse pointer over the broken routable indicator and click the right mouse button. This will display a pop-up
menu. Click Create Segment.
2. Bring up the Definition dialog box, then drag one of the segment handles to re-join the run.
3. Bring up the Definition dialog box. An arrow will displayVersion

at each end
of the broken
(depending
201 on circumstances) to re-join the run. In the
5 Release
15 routable indicator. Drag one of the arrowsPage
Piping Design
illustration below, one segment of the run has been moved to connect to the portion of the run still connected to the pump.
4. In certain cases you will see the Auto Route option beneath the Create Segment option in the pop-up menu (See Step 1). This happens when a segment connecting two parallel
routables (which are on different X-Y planes) is broken.
Select Auto Route. The
Auto Route dialog box will display.
Click on the Toggle
button. Options for re-joining the run will be shown as a dotted line.
Click OK to make your selection.
Piping Design

This section explains ways of creating and using resources.
Page 202
Piping Design
Page 203

This task shows you how to create a part with a specified type. You can also modify the type of some existing parts.
See Defining the Part Type.
Before you create parts you should specify where they will be stored. A default directory is specified but if you
change it see Understanding Project Resource Management. The parts are normally moved from this directory into
the catalog. You should also create a graphic representations file and specify where it is located. (See Defining
Directory Paths and Define Graphic Representations for a Part.)
You can create some parts as a light object, as explained below. To learn more about light objects see Creating a
Light Object.
1.
Click on the Build Piping Part button
. The Create Part dialog box appears.
2. Click the Display Class Browser button next to the Component Type field. The Class Browser appears.
Piping Design
Page 204
3. The Class Browser allows you to select the type of piping part you want to create. Navigate to the type you want
by clicking on the "plus" sign next to each directory, or by using the three navigation buttons at the bottom. You
can also filter for certain types. For instance, you can enter "elbow" in the Filter field and hit enter to see all
elbow types. Click OK after making your selection.
Certain parts can be created as light objects - as of R13 these were weld, straight routable part and bendable. If you
select one of these types in the class browser then the Create Part dialog box will display a checkbox "Make light
. The default is checked. If you do not want to create a part as a light object then
object"
uncheck this.
4. The File Open button is used to bring up a part, say, if you did not finish creating it and had to close the
application. Using the File Open button you can navigate to the directory where the part is stored.
5.
The Define Properties button
brings up the Properties box, allowing you to change properties if needed.
Piping Design
Page 205
6.
The Override Parameters button
button brings up a dialog box which allows you to override a parameter.
When you click on a parameter on the left side of the box and then click on the arrow to bring it on the right
side, that means the parameter can be overridden. (See Change the Parameters of a Part.) When you place this
part the application will try to determine a value for that parameter. If it cannot, then you will be asked to enter
one.
For a stretchable part, such as a piping stretchable, the "Length" attribute must be defined as an override
parameter.
7.
to create a design table and associate it to the part you are creating. For more
Click the Design Table button
information on this see the Infrastructure document - Advanced Tasks - Using Knowledgeware Capabilities.
8.
Click the Formula button
to create formulas and parameters. See the Knowledgeware document
mentioned above for more information.
9.
The Define Connector button
allows you to add connectors.
The Connector Specs button
lets you associate specifications to connectors.
10.
11.
The Manage Representations button
12.
Click the Define ID Schema button

name for the part.
lets you create and manage graphic representations.

next to the Symbol Name field if you want the application to generate a
13.
The Set Type button
lets you define the type of the part.
Piping Design
Page 206
14. Enter a name for the part in the Symbol Name field and hit Enter. Click Apply or OK. The part will be created.
In the illustration below it has been named Elbow1.
The part has been created but it still does not have a graphic representation - it has no "looks". You will learn
how to create one or more graphic representations for the part in subsequent tasks.
If you are creating a part as a light object you do not need to create geometry. Instead you can save the part.
15. You must save the part to the directory specified in the resource management file. Double click on the part
(Elbow1 in the image above) to make it active and then use the File menu to save it.
Piping Design
Page 207

This task shows you how to create multiple graphic representations for a part. See also Manage Graphic
Representations.
Once you have created a part and specified a type, you can create one or more graphic representations,
i.e., create the body of the part. You can define multiple graphic representations when you need to show
more than one graphic of the same component. For instance, you may need to show a pipe as "double",
which is like a 3D version, as "single", which means represented by a single line, or "envelope", which
also includes the working area needed around the pipe or equipment. These three categories are defined
in this application. A fourth category is also included, "exact", which is normally used for detailed
representation. You can create these three graphics of the same pipe and place whichever one you prefer
in a document.
Before you create multiple representations you should set up a Graphic Representations file. (You do this
by creating a file - a default is provided if you want to use it - and noting its location in your resource
management file. See Understanding Project Resource Management.) A Graphic Representations file
allows you to classify each graphic that you create into a specific category. In addition to the four
categories that are defined in the application and that were described above, you can create categories
based on your specific needs.
NOTE: If you are creating a part as a light object you do not need to create additional representations.
The application will be able to generate double and single representations for the part. You can, however,
change the wording 'double' and 'single' in the text file.
1. When you create a part as explained in Create piping part with specified type, it is given the first
classification listed in your Graphic Representations file. In this example it is Double as shown in the
illustration below. To start making graphic representations for the part, you will first create a graphic
for the Double representation that you have already created. To do this double click on Elbow1 to
bring up the Part Design product. (Not all users may have a license for Part Design - contact your
system administrator.)
Piping Design
Page 208
2. Create your part (in this case an elbow) using Part Design. (See Part Design documentation if you
need help.) You have now created the Double graphic representation of the part.
3. To create a second graphic representation, double click on Elbow1 (Elbow1.1) to return to Piping
Design.
4.
Click on the Build Piping Part button
to display the Create Part dialog box and click on the
elbow to make it active. The buttons in the Create Part dialog box will become active.
5.
Click on the Manage Representations button
box will display.
. The Manage Graphic Representations dialog
Piping Design
Page 209
6. The Defined column shows which representations exist for the part. If a name has No against it you
can create a representation by clicking on No. It will change to Yes and the graphic name will be
added to the specifications tree. You now need to create a body for it, as described above. In the
illustration below you can see both double and single representations. The single representation is the
white line running through the 3D elbow.
7. If the value for a graphic in the Activated column is Yes it means you can see that graphic. (You can
toggle between Yes and No by clicking on it.) If you check the box Expand representations you can
see more than one representation of that part in the same document - if the representation exists.
Piping Design
Page 210

This task shows you how to add properties to a part.
1.
With the part displayed click on the Build Piping Part button
box and then click on the Define Properties button
to display the Create Part dialog
. The Properties dialog box will display.
Piping Design
2.
Click on the Piping tab to display properties and enter the values you want.
3.
Click Apply or OK.
Page 211
Piping Design
Page 212
This task shows you how to change the parameters of a part.

1.
Select a part, in this case an elbow at the end of a run, and click the Edit Part Parameters button
dialog box displays.
. The Manage Override Parameters
2.
The box displays parameters that can be overridden for the part you selected. In this case only the CutAngle can be overridden. Parameters
that can be overridden are assigned to a part when you build a part of a specified type.
3.
When you select the parameter the current value appears in the = box next to Edit value of the current parameter.
4.
Enter the new value, for example 30deg, and click Apply. The cut angle of the elbow will be updated to 30 degrees.
5.
Click OK to close the dialog box.
Piping Design
Page 213

This task shows you how to define a part type.
You can only define the type of a part that does not already have a type assigned to it. This means that
the part must be newly created, or it should be an existing part that has no type assigned (such as a
CATPart from a product such as Systems Routing). Piping Design is used as an example here.
Substitute directories as needed.
1.
Click the Set Object Type button
2.
Click the Open Existing Part button next to the Filename field and navigate to the part you
want to modify. Click Open on the File Selection dialog box. The file will display in the Filename
field.
3.
Click the Display Class Browser button next to the Component Type field. The Class Browser
will display.
4.
Expand the tree in the Class Browser and select the part type that you want to assign to the
part. Click OK. The type will be assigned.
5.
Click OK in the Set Object Type dialog box.
. The Set Object Type dialog box displays.
At this point a copy of the part is saved in the CATTemp directory under C:\..\..\Local
Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes.
Proceed with the Build Part cycle, i.e., Define Properties, Formulas, associate a Design Table, manage
Override Parameters, Define Connectors, Associate Specifications to the Connectors, and Manage
Graphic Representations (as applicable).
Piping Design
6.
Page 214
To save the part, activate the part level in your product, then click File - Save As.
Save the part in \..\..\intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\Piping\PipingDesign\

ComponentCatalogs\Parametric. (Replace Piping\PipingDesign with the workbench you are in.)
7.
FOR EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENT ONLY

You can select the part in your document to bring up the Class Browser. This will only work if the
part you select has not had a type assigned to it, such as when you are building the part. Also,
note that when you use this method of assigning a type you will only be able to assign the
Resource type. You will not be able to select any other type. To follow this procedure, click the
Set Object Type button (in the Create Part dialog box or in the toolbar). The Set Object Type
dialog box displays. Click the part to display the Class Browser and select the type. You can
continue building the part.
Piping Design
Page 215
Piping Design
Page 216

This task shows you how to build a new unique reference. A unique reference is considered unique because it
acquires certain unique values once you place it. This command is useful when you make a copy of your design,
but you want to change values/features in one or more parts in that copied design. If you change the original part
then the change will take effect in both documents. If you make a new unique reference then the change will only
take effect in that document.
If the command button is not in your toolbar you can add it by following these steps: Click Tools - Customize,
select Command tab - All Commands. Select Build New Unique Reference and drag it into a toolbar.
Open your document and select the Product under which it resides.
1.
2.
Click the Build New Unique Reference button
showing the unique parts in your document.
3.
. The List of Unique References dialog box displays,
Select the part (you can select more than one) for which you want to make a new reference and click Apply
and/or OK. The reference is created. The 'old' reference is deleted and replaced with the reference you just
created. You need to save your changes.
Piping Design
Page 217

This task shows you how to generate resolved parts from parametric parts.
Each parametric part that you use to generate resolved parts must refer to a design table. The design
table must have a column called "PartNumber", which should have a value. This value is used to name the
generated resolved part.
1. Create a directory and place in it the parametric CATPart documents, associated design table
documents and CATShape documents, if any.
Create a second directory to hold the resolved parts when they are created.
2. Open a command prompt window and change to the directory ...intel_a\code\command. Type the
following and press Enter: CATCloGenerateResolvedParts.bat XXX YYY where XXX is the full path
name of the directory you created in Step 1 to hold parametric parts; and YYY is the directory created
to hold the resolved parts.
For UNIX enter CATCloGenerateResolvedParts.sh /XXX /YYY (replace XXX with the full path name of
the directory you created in Step 1 to hold parametric parts; and YYY is the directory created to hold
the resolved parts).
For Structures Applications Only: If you are using this task to resolve sections for structures
applications like Structure Functional Design, you must add the following at the end of the commands
listed above:
-appl Structure
3. After the program finishes executing, the parts are placed in YYY - the directory you created to hold
the resolved parts. Each part has as its name the entry from the part number column of the design
table. The design table association is removed from the generated resolved part.
4. Add the parts to a catalog. To add the parts to an existing catalog see Modifying a Catalog. To create
a new catalog see Creating a Catalog.
If a part does not get added to the catalog it may not have a part type (component object type) defined.
In that case you may need to add the part to a catalog individually.
Page 218
Piping Design

This task lists certain requirements for building parts. You should incorporate these when you are building parts,
or part behavior will not be as expected. Instructions for building parts are given elsewhere in this manual,
including in the section Building Parts. Connectors are explained in the section Connectors. Instructions for
using the Part Design product are given in the Part Design User Guide. The column headings below mean:
Part Type: The part type to which the requirements apply.

Geometrical requirements: The requirements you must incorporate when you are creating the geometry for
the part.
Properties: The requirements you must incorporate when defining these properties.
Override parameters: The properties shown here must be defined as override.
Connector type: The type of geometry needed for creating connectors.
Part Type
Geometrical
Requirements
Regular object:
No requirements
Properties
No requirements
Light object:
Override
Parameters
Piping:
PipeLength
HVAC:
Straight
No geometry required
(stretchable)
Regular object:
PartBody named
using the default
representation name
(i.e. "Double")
Bendable/Flexible
Profile sketch and Rib

feature need to exist
in the primary
PartBody.
PartBody named
"Hidden"
Spine sketch needs to
exist in the "Hidden"
OpenBody named
"RibPath" which will
be empty
No requirements
Diameter
Width
Height
DuctLength
Piping:
No override
parameters
HVAC:
Diameter
Connector Type
Regular object:
Use existing
geometry
Light object:
Define new
geometry
New geometry
Page 219
Piping Design
Light object:
No requirements
OK to cut:
Yes for cut elbows
No for elbow with

set angles
Cut Angle:
Elbow
Actual angle of the

elbow
Piping:
Cut Angle
Use existing
geometry
HVAC:
Diameter
Width
Height
DuctLength
Turn Angle:
No requirements
Maximum angle
that the elbow can
turn
No requirements
Piping:
No
requirements
Use existing
geometry
HVAC:
Inline Part
Regular object:
No requirements
Inline Weld
Light object:
No requirements
Diameter
Width
Height
Outside
Diameter
Weld Offset
Nominal Size
Regular object:
Use existing
geometry
Light object:
Define new
geometry
Page 220
Piping Design
Regular object:
No requirements
No requirements
Branch Weld
Light object:
Outside
Diameter
Outside
Diameter2
Weld Offset
Nominal Size
Nominal Size2
Regular object:
Use existing
geometry
Light object:
New geometry
Piping Design
Page 221
Using ENOVIA
The following information is provided as a brief understanding of the ENOVIA environment and what is needed
to work with ENOVIA in conjunction with the CATIA Engineering and System suite of products. Please refer to
ENOVIA documentation for more detailed information on specific ENOVIA usage and functionality.
The ENOVIA, CATIA and DELMIA products based on Dassault Systemes' industry-renowned V5 enterprise
architecture provide a complete solution for customer PLM requirements.
The ENOVIA product line provides the PDM component of the overall solution. With the ENOVIA product, users
can effectively manage the entire product life cycle of their data, including data management, work flow
management, people and organization management, and many other aspects of their product and business.
Creating a Product
Importing a Product
Using Work Packages
Also refer to the Customizing section.
Piping Design
Page 222
Creating a Product
This task explains how you should create a product. ENOVIA and CATIA should be running and connected.
.
You should be in the ENOVIA home page
You should familiarize yourself with the directory structure in ENOVIA. At the top level you will have a
directory called product class root - this usually encompasses all the activity in your company. Under this
you may have several product class directories. Under the product class will be the product directories.
Product displays in this application, the other two are only displayed in ENOVIA. Users will mostly interact
with the product. It is created at individual project level - in a shipyard it will be created for each ship that
is designed - and work packages, explained later in this section, are created under the product. The
product class directories may not be created in smaller projects, but the product class root and the
product directories should always exist.
1. Information about creating all three levels is provided in ENOVIA documentation. Briefly, to create a
product you should be in the Product Class View.
Right click on the product class, select New and then Product in the menus that display. Enter a name
for the product in the product ID field. Add to the Name and Description fields for informational
purposes if you want. The newly created directory displays in the Product Class View.
2. Click the Save button to save your changes.

A Characteristics window displays after you create a directory. You do not need to enter any information
in it. Read the ENOVIA user guide to learn more about this window.
Piping Design
Page 223
Importing a Product
This task explains how you import a product, and work packages, from ENOVIA.
You need to import the product because you will be creating work packages under it. The top level
directories - product class root and product class - remain in ENOVIA, only the product is imported. You
must import the product (and existing work packages) each time you start a new session.
1. In the Product Editor, right click on the product and select Send To - XXX, XXX being the application
you are sending it to (such as CATIA V5). The product displays in the specifications tree.
2. You also need to import all the work packages that you need from ENOVIA to this application each
time you start a new session. The process is as described above (select the document
associated with the work package and go to Step 2 above). Note that if you
send a work package then the product is also sent - you do not need to send both.
You can use filters to determine which work packages you need. It is best, though not essential, to
import all the work packages that you need in one operation.
Piping Design
Page 224
Using Work Packages

This task explains the concept of work packages and how to create them. You can save work packages in
an ENOVIA database, or save them to a local drive or server. You should also refer to Connections
Between Work Packages and Managing Publications.
Work packages are necessary for efficient data organization and concurrent engineering. The biggest
benefit, perhaps, is that they allow you to organize data in easily manageable units. Concurrent
engineering refers to the practice of having several people, maybe even hundreds, work on the same
project. If the design is created in one document then only one person can work on it. Creating several
work packages provides the answer, by creating several documents under one root document.
Each document (or work package) contains the portion of design that one person is working on - such as
placing equipment in one compartment of a ship. "Publications" are automatically (see below) created at
the locations at which different documents connect. Each work package thus 'knows' where it belongs
within the product. If something is moved - say equipment to which a run connects - then the user will be
alerted about it. The steps central to using work packages are explained below.
Work packages must be organized in a certain way. See Organizing Work Packages to learn how to do it.
1. CREATE A WORK PACKAGE: To create a work package, select the product and, in the menubar,
click Insert - New Product. In the simple example below two work packages have been created. One
contains the equipment and the other contains the run and piping that connect the two pieces of
equipment. Thus, the person who owns the equipment work package can open the document at the
same time that the piping engineer is working on his work package.
Piping Design
Page 225
2. ADD DOCUMENTS: However, in order to be able to route from the equipment, the piping engineer
will need to be able to see the equipment. In order to do this the piping engineer will need to import
the equipment document. See Importing a Product for more information. Once he has imported both
documents he can make the piping document active and begin routing in it. When he saves, the
piping information will be saved in the piping document.
3. PUBLISH CONNECTORS: As stated earlier, publications need to be created so that a connection can
be established to objects in other work packages. To take the example given above, the piping
engineer has both documents open, but he has write access only to the piping document, which he
created. When he routes between the equipment publications are only created in his own document.
Publications are needed so that the connections between components are retained. To ensure that
publications are created even when someone without write access to a document connects equipment,
connectors must be published. In this case the equipment engineer needs to publish the connectors
on the equipment in his document so that when the piping engineer creates runs publications are
created on the equipment also. In most cases this is done when the part is placed, because most
parts do not exist in isolation and need to be connected to something. To learn how to create
connectors and publish/unpublish them see Creating Connectors.
Piping Design
Page 226

This task gives a brief explanation about a simple save operation after creating or working on work
packages. To learn more about the Save operation, and what the various options mean, you must see
ENOVIA documentation.
1.
Click the Save in ENOVIA LCA Server button
2. Click OK to save the work package.
. The Save in ENOVIA dialog box displays.
Piping Design
Page 227

This task explains how you should organize the work packages that you create.
This type of organization is usually done by an administrator. See ENOVIA documentation for more
information on components.
1.Work packages must always be created at the same level in the specifications tree, under the Product.
However, users can create "components" using the Component Editor, and group work packages under
these components.
2.To create a component, expand your tree in the Product Editor so that the Product is visible. Right click on
the Product, select Send To and then Component Editor. The Component Editor opens with your Product
visible.
3.Right click on the Product and select Insert Child. In the Product pane that displays, make sure Generic
Component is selected in the Type field. Enter a name for the component in the Product Component ID
field, in this example PipingComponent. Make entries in the Name and Description fields (for informational
purposes) if you want to, and click Add or OK. The component you created displays under the Product.
Make entries in the Name and Description fields (for informational purposes) if you want to, and click Add
or OK. The component you created displays under the Product.
4.Save your changes.
Piping Design
Page 228
5.When you open the Product Editor again you will see three columns, with the first column showing the
product and the newly created components, the second column showing the work packages and
components, and the last column showing characteristics - if you select an object. If you do not see work
packages in the second column then right-click on the product and select Open Assembly in Instance View.
6.To group one or more work packages under the component, right click on a work package and select Copy.
7.Next, right click on a component, and select Special Paste - Link. The work package will be grouped under
that component.
8.Save your changes.
Piping Design

This section explains ways of creating, modifying and deleting connectors.
Create Connectors
Use the Compass to Manipulate Connectors
Hide/Show Connectors
Page 229
Piping Design
Page 230
Create Connectors
This task shows you how to create a connector. Connectors can only be created on objects that have
existing geometry that satisfies the rules of connector creation. If existing geometry is not present, you
will have to create the geometry.
1.
If the resource is not active, make it active by double-clicking in the specifications tree.
2.
Click the Build Connector button. This will bring up the Manage Connectors dialog box.
You will not be able to add a connector on the instance of a part using the Add command in the
Manage Connectors dialog box. You can only add connectors on the reference of a part (the part in
the master catalog), using the Create Part command. However, you can add a connector to a unique
part using the Manage Connectors dialog box.
The Manage Connectors dialog box will list all connectors on the selected part. To see a connector
and its associated geometry on the part, select a connector from the list.
Adding a connector is explained below; Delete, Modify and Duplicate are explained elsewhere in this
section. To Publish a connector means you are allowing people who do not have write access to your
document to establish a connection. This is explained further in Using Work Packages. You can Publish
or Unpublish connectors using the two buttons.
Piping Design
3.
Page 231
Click the Add button. The Add Connectors box displays.
Select the type of connector - piping, HVAC, etc.

In some applications the flow direction field will be available. The piping (or tubing) part connector has
flow direction built in and you must select a flow direction also from the drop down menu. The
mechanical part connector has no flow direction.
Another type of connector - the nozzle connector - will be available if you are placing a connector on a
nozzle. A nozzle connector must be placed on the end of the nozzle that connects to equipment. A
part connector is placed on the end that connects to the pipe or duct.
An electrical part connector should only be placed on a socket. The electrical part connector should be
placed on the end of the socket that connects to equipment. A cableway part connector should be
placed on the free end of the socket that does not connect to equipment.
When you are placing a connector on a Bendable, such as a bendable pipe, you must use the Define
New Geometry option. You must not use existing geometry to place the connector.
You can name each connector by selecting in the Name field. This is useful for some functions, such as
designing using a schematic.
Piping Design
Page 232
The concept of Publishing or Unpublishing a connector is explained above. Check the checkbox as
necessary.
Face, orientation and alignment are explained below.
The orientation, alignment and face must be defined correctly before a connector can be created. To
explain what these are, the face is the surface to which you attach a connector. As an example, if you
want to attach a clock to your office wall, the wall is the face. You want the numeral "12" to be up, so you
orient the clock accordingly. This is the orientation. The alignment is the direction in which the clock face
is pointed - normally it would be perpendicular to the wall. When creating a connector, the alignment
always has to be perpendicular to the face.
The face is generally defined using a face of the part, such as the end of a pipe. Alignment is usually
defined using a line, such as the not-shown line along the centerline of a pipe. Orientation is defined using
the xy plane, or another plane or face to define an "up" direction.
In the illustration below the Z axis indicates the alignment of the connector. It also indicates the direction
in which routing will occur. The X and Y axis together define the orientation. They are useful when
attaching two resources.
It is necessary to select geometry in the part to which you want to attach a connector so that these three
characteristics are correctly defined. If the part does not have the necessary geometry then you must
create it.
4. If you want to create a connector using the part's existing geometry click the Use existing geometry
option.
Click the Select Face button to select a face. Selectable faces will highlight as you move your
pointer over the part.
Click this button to select the alignment. You will only be able to indicate the alignment by
selecting a line - from the construction geometry, or elsewhere in the part if there is one. You can
only select a line that is perpendicular to the face plane.
Piping Design
Page 233
Click this button to select the orientation. You will only be able to select a plane that is
perpendicular to the face you selected. If you cannot find a plane to select, click the Swap Visible
Space button (see below) to make the construction geometry visible, and select a plane.
Some connector types require you to place a datum point. The datum point is placed by clicking
this button and then clicking a 3-D point on the part. The datum point is used as follows:
Lofted reservation section: Datum is used to define where the spline will start and end when
creating lofted reservations.
Tubing & waveguide parts: Datum is used to define where the spline will start and end when
creating flexible tubes.
Hangers: See Hanger Design documentation.
You can display the part construction geometry, if there is any, to make it easier to select existing
geometry. Do this by:
Right click on the part entry in the specifications tree.
Click Hide/Show. The part will disappear from the screen.
5.
Click the Swap Visible Space button

. The part will reappear on your screen with the
construction geometry visible. Clicking the button again will toggle you back.
The fields under Classify Connector will become available after you have successfully selected the
geometry explained in Step 4. Click on the down arrows to make your selection.
Select a type.
For Flow direction, select In, Out, InOut or None.
Select the Face type. A Hole connection allows a routable to pass through it - it is useful for placing
parts like clamps along a run without cutting a tube. A Face connection will stop a routable and not
allow it to pass through.
Select an alignment.
Choose an orientation: Circular will allow the connector to attach to another connector at any
orientation; round ducts and pipes, for instance, do not need a well-defined "up" direction because
they can rotate. A Rectangular orientation is used for parts like rectangular ducts; they do not have a
strict ''up" direction. Up allows the connector to attach to another connector or part in the up position:
horizontal trays, for instance, require a well-defined "up" position. You can also use the "up"
orientation for a hole connector. In the image below, the connector on the right has the up
orientation, the connector on the left does not.
Piping Design
Page 234
6.
The number in the Number field is assigned by the application. This can be significant because when
you are creating a new connector, you have the option of using the alignment and orientation used in
the previous connector after you select the face. You can choose to do this, or select a new alignment
and/or orientation.
Click OK. The new connector will be listed in the Manage Connectors box.
7.
To define new geometry for placing a connector, select the option Define new geometry, then click
on the Select plane button
8.
. The Define Plane box will display.
Use the functions provided by the Define Plane box to reposition the connector, if necessary, as
explained below. (The colors of the buttons may be slightly different in some applications.)
face.
Click the Define Plane button to redefine the plane as well as the origin by clicking once on the
Click the Define Plane using Compass button to redefine the plane using the compass.
Click the Define 3-point Plane button to define the plane by clicking on any three points with
your pointer. The connector will be placed on the first point you click.
Click the Define Line-Point Plane button to select the plane by clicking on a point and a line,
like an edge. The connector will be placed on the first point you click.
Click the Define Line-Line button to select the plane by clicking on two lines. The plane will be
defined by the first line selected. But if the two lines are parallel the plane will be defined as the plane
in which both lines exist.
Piping Design
Page 235
Click the Define plane at center of circle button to select the plane by clicking three points on
the edge of a circle. This method is used for multi-CAD documents, usually for CGR circles. You can
click at points where two lines meet or in the center of a face. The Z axis of the plane manipulator
will be placed according to the right hand rule. If you click clockwise the Z axis will point into the
object. If you click counter clockwise the Z axis will point out from the object.
Click the Define plane at product origin button and then the object to place the plane
manipulator on the origin of the object. The plane manipulator axis will match that of the product.
Click the Define Orientation button to change the orientation. Click the button and then click a
point or a line. If you click a point the X axis will point to it. If you click a line the X axis will become
parallel to the line.
Use the Move Origin buttons to define the plane.

Define Origin at Plane or Compass allows you
to define the origin using the compass or plane command. You use the compass or plane as the base
plane along which the origin can be selected.
9.
Define Origin at Point or Center of Face lets you
Define Origin at Center of Circle allows to select

select the origin by clicking on a point or face.
the origin by clicking at three points - the origin will be placed in the center of an imaginary circle
drawn using those three points. The plane and orientation will not change when using this command.
Click OK. The connector will be placed and the Add Connector dialog box will display again.<
10. Make your selections in the fields under Classify Connector as described in Step 5. Click OK.
Piping Design
Page 236

This task shows you how to associate attributes to a connector. NOTE: This task was formerly called
Associate Specifications to a Connector.
"Associating attributes" means assigning specific attributes to connectors. If a value has been assigned to
the attribute then it is also associated with the connector. When you build a part, it inherits all the
attributes that you have assigned to the sub-class to which it belongs (this is done in the Feature
Dictionary). Values are assigned to these attributes using the Edit - Properties function. Now you need to
associate some of these attributes to connectors, to help in the designing process. If you assign a certain
end style to a connector, for instance, the part placement function will know what kinds of parts are
compatible with the end style assigned to that connector and filter accordingly. A piping part is used here
as an example. The process is the same for other types of parts too.
1.
With the part displayed click the Build Part button
to display the Create Part dialog box.
2.
Select the part and click the Associate Attributes to Connector button
Associate Attributes to Connectors dialog box.
to display the
Piping Design
Page 237
ATTRIBUTES: This section of the box displays all the attributes entered in the Connector Attributes
file (see below). You will need to decide which ones you want to associate to specific connectors. The
drop down arrow allows you to select how many of each attribute you want to be available to you nominal size and end style have two attributes each in this example. Click the down arrow and make
your selection. Click Assign when you have finished.
The second pane displays the connectors on your part and the attributes associated with them. In
the example above, for instance, Connector 1 is associated with EndStyle, while Connector 2 is
associated with EndStyle2. You can use the Edit - Properties function to edit the values assigned to
these attributes.
The third pane will display how many of each type of attribute are associated with the part, and the
values, if any, assigned to them. You can also use it to change the attribute assigned to each
connector. To display the attributes, select one of the attributes in the second pane, say EndStyle.
The window displays all the available end styles on the part and their values.
Piping Design
Page 238
To change the attribute associated with a connector: Click on the attribute beneath the connector in
the second pane. Then, in the third pane, select the attribute you want to replace it with. In the
example above, for Connector 1, if you want to change EndStyle to EndStyle2, select EndStyle in the
second pane and EndStyle2 in the third pane.
Click OK when you have finished.
Piping Design
Page 239
CONNECTOR ATTRIBUTES FILE

The Connector Attributes file controls the attributes that are displayed in the Associate Attributes
to Connectors dialog box. A part may have dozens or even hundreds of attributes associated with
it. Since only some of these need to be associated with connectors, the Connector Attributes file
gives you a way of controlling the number. There are sample ConnectorAttributes.txt files for each
application, located in the directory ...intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\XXX\
YYY\ComponentCatalogs where XXX is the discipline, like Piping, and YYY is the application, like
Piping Design.
Sample files for Equipment Arrangement are located a little differently:
...intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\Equipment\XXX\
EquipmentArrangement\ComponentCatalogs where XXX is a discipline like Piping. This simply
allows for placing different types of equipment (piping equipment, HVAC equipment etc.) in their own
directories.
If you want to display more or different attributes in the Associate Attributes to Connectors
dialog box then make appropriate changes in the ConnectorAttributes.txt file using a text editor like
WordPad.
The location of the Connector Attributes file must be correctly referenced in the project resource
management file.
You must save the CATPart file to the directory in which you store the parts that you create.
Piping Design
Page 240
Using the Compass to Manipulate Connectors

This task shows you how to use the compass to manipulate connectors placed on resolved parts.
You can use the compass to manipulate connectors placed on resolved parts only. Use this method when
adding a new connector, or by using the Modify command. Both are explained below.
1. To manipulate while adding a connector, drag the compass and place it over the connector while the
Define Plane box is displayed.
2. To manipulate using the Modify command, select the resource, click the Manage Connectors button
and, in the Manage Connectors dialog box, select the connector in the connectors list. Click the
Modify button.
3.
The Modify Connectors box will display. You can now drag the compass and place it over the connector.
4. Click on one of the handles on the compass and manipulate the connector to the desired position.
You can change alignment, orientation and origin using the compass.
5. Click OK on the Modify Connector or the Define Plane dialog box when done. Remove the compass from the
connector by dragging it to the axis.
Piping Design
Page 241

This task shows you how to modify or delete connectors.
You will not be able to modify or delete a connector that has constraints or connections.
You will not be able to modify or delete a connector on the instance of a part using the Modify or Delete
commands in the Manage Connectors dialog box. You can only modify or delete connectors on the
reference of a part (the part in the master catalog). You need to use the Create Part command to
modify a reference part. However, you can modify or delete a unique part using the Manage
Connectors dialog box.
1. To delete a connector select the resource by double clicking in the specifications tree and click the
Build Connectors button. This will display the Manage Connectors dialog box.
2. Select the connector in the connectors list and click the Delete button. The connector will be deleted.
3. To modify a connector click the Modify button in the Manage Connectors box. The Modify
Connectors dialog box displays.
4. Follow the procedures described in Step 4 and subsequent of Creating Connectors.
Piping Design
Page 242

This task shows you how to create one or more duplicate connectors.
You can only make duplicate connectors on a resolved part. Connectors can only be duplicated on the same
part.
With your resolved part displayed, click the Build Connectors button. This will open the Manage
1. Connectors dialog box.
2. Select the part. This will display all connectors on it and also display a list in the dialog box.
3. Select the connector you want to duplicate and click Duplicate in the Manage Connectors dialog box. The
Duplicate Connectors dialog box displays.
4. Enter the spacing between the connectors and the number of connectors you want.
Piping Design
Page 243
5. Drag the compass and place it on a surface with the Z axis pointing toward the direction in which you want
the new connectors located. The two illustrations below show how you can change the location of the new
connectors by changing the direction of the Z axis.
6. Click OK.
Piping Design
Page 244

This task shows you how to use the plane manipulator.
You can use the plane manipulator to change the orientation, alignment, plane and location of the plane
you propose to create. The X and Y axis indicate the orientation and the Z axis indicates the alignment.
For example, if you create a connector and route from it, routing will occur in the direction indicated by
the Z axis.
1. To change the orientation of an axis, click on the dot at the end of it. It will flip 180 degrees.
2. To move the manipulator along any axis, click and drag on that axis. The manipulator will move and
the distance will display.
3. Click on the origin (red square) and drag to move the manipulator to a new plane.
4. To change the orientation you can also click and drag any of the arcs in the manipulator to rotate it.
It will rotate in increments, which is 15 degrees in the image below.
To change the degree of rotation click Tools-Options, select Equipments & Systems and select
the General tab. Enter the degree of rotation in the Snap Angle field. For instance, if you enter 45,
the manipulator will snap in increments of 45 degrees, counting its starting position as 0. It will snap
to the nearest 45 degree step - if you move it to 88 degrees from its starting position it will snap to
90 degrees.
Piping Design
Page 245
Piping Design
Page 246
Show/Hide Connectors
This task shows you how to hide or show connectors.
Connectors may be hard to select during certain processes, such as when you are in cache mode, or
trying to select a connector in a hole. This step makes them visible so that you can select easily.
1.
Click the Show/Hide Connector button
. This button may be located in the lower toolbar.
2. Select the part whose connectors you want shown. The connectors display.
3. To hide the connectors, click the Show/Hide Connector button and select the part again.
Piping Design
Page 247

Documents can be transferred to other computers or networks. However, there are some factors you need to
consider to ensure that the documents display correctly. You must either transfer the following to the new
computer or network, or ensure that they can be accessed from there:
Line IDs used in the document. Each line ID you create has a file associated with it. These may be in the
default directory, or your system administrator may have designated a different directory. To find out which
directory it is click on Tools - Project Management select the Browse tab and scroll to the directory under
Resources for your application.
Resolved parts. These may be in the default directory, or your system administrator may have designated a
different directory. To find out which directory it is click on Tools - Project Management select the Browse
tab and scroll to the directory under Resources for your application.
The setup data, such as that relating to standards, specifications catalog and design rules. If you want to
make changes to the document at the new site then you must also move the relevant catalogs. If you only
want to view it then you do not need to move the catalogs. To find out more about setup data read
Understanding Project Resource Management.
Piping Design
Page 248
This section explains how you can migrate your V4 models to V5.
To explain the process briefly, you have to convert the classes and attributes in your V4 Project Registration
Model to an XML file and ftp it to a V5 directory. You have to do the same with the classes and attributes in your
V5 Feature Dictionary.
A tool compares these two XML files and another tool then imports the classes and attributes that do not exist in
V5 from the V4 XML file and makes them available to you in V5.
You also have to export V4 piping lines, standards and parts to V5 and bring all the migrated data together
before migrating the model. The migration process places a part into the new V5 document from a V5 catalog of
migrated parts. Piping parts are migrated once and placed into a V5 catalog from which they are selected as
needed, based on the attributes of the V4 part that is to be migrated.
A process is also available to export all piping parts as catalog parts from a piping model. Another process
allows you to create parts from an import file and place these parts in a catalog.
If you decide not to use the sample directories provided with this application for your data then you must enter
your new location, as needed by this process.
To learn how to customize line thickness, see documentation for Interactive Drafting in the section Advanced
Tasks/Manage Standards. Once defined, line thickness is applied to elements as a property.
You should generally follow the following sequence for migrating models:
Create a directory structure if you plan to store your migrated data in a location other than the location in which
the sample data is stored.
Classes and attributes:
Export V4 Project Registration Data
Export V5 Feature Dictionary Data
Compare the XML Output
Import the XML Output
V4 piping data:
Export V4 Standards Data
Export V4 Catalog Parts
Export V4 Piping Lines
You created a directory structure earlier, but you also need to create/modify set up data, which refers to design
Piping Design
rules, standards, etc.

Migrate the V4 Model to V5
Additional tools:
Export Parts from a V4 Model
Import Parts from Other Software

Exporting the V4 Project Registration Model
Exporting the V5 Feature Dictionary
Comparing the XML Output
Exporting V4 Standards Data
Page 249
Piping Design
Page 250

This task shows you how to create directories for your migrated V4 data.
Data that you migrate from V4 into V5 will usually be stored in directories that are separate from the
directories in which V5 generated data is stored. Sample directories are included with this application for
storing migrated data. The default location is:
...intel_a\startup\EquipmentandSystems\MigrationDirectory\XXX where XXX is a discipline like Tubing or
Piping.
You can continue using the sample directories if you want. However, if you choose to store your data
elsewhere you should take the following steps.
1.
Create a directory and give it any suitable name.
2.
Create a DiscreteValues directory under it and move into it the data from the sample DiscreteValues
directory.
3.
Create directories for all the disciplines that are of interest to you (Piping, HVAC, etc.). Recreate the
directory structure under them as it exists under MigrationDirectory. You do not need to move the
sample data - sample catalog, sample specifications, etc. - into your newly created directories if you
do not intend to use it.
4.
Change the entries in your project resource management (PRM) file to reflect the new location of
your data. The sample PRM file points to the default locations. Most entries are under the heading
AEC Migration Discipline Resources.
Piping Design
Page 251
Exporting the V4 Project Registration Data

This task shows how to convert class and attribute data from the V4 Project Registration Model to XML format, in
preparation for importing it to V5.
You need to convert the classes and attributes in the V4 Project Registration Model to XML format and export it to a
V5 directory so that they can be compared with the classes and attributes that exist in the V5 Feature Dictionary,
and later imported into it.
You do not need to do this if you did not make any modifications to your V4 Project Registration Model - that is,
you did not define classes and attributes of your own.
1. You can convert (and export) all the classes and attributes in the Project Registration Model or you can convert
classes and attributes by context. If you convert by context you will only convert those that are associated with
the context you select, such as HVAC or Process. To convert by context you should either be in the application
that sets the context, or click Context - Discipline/Role/Workshop in the menu bar. The Context Definition
box will display.
2. Select the context you want. In the image above the context Process Discipline is selected.
Piping Design
Page 252
3. You now need to change a setting. Click Settings - User Interface Level in the menu bar to display the AEC
Frame User Interface Mode box.
4. In the Display Information On field select Current Context Only. If you have not selected a context then
select All Project.
5. Now you need to enter the command that will create the XML file. In the key-in line enter /aecrprj and hit Enter.
The Report the Project Registration box displays.
6. Enter the directory in which you want to save the XML file and check the line Report All Data in One File. Click
OK. The XML file will be generated and stored in the directory you specified.
If you specified All Project then the file name will be Preg_All.xml. If you specified a context then the name will be
related to that context.
NOTE: An html file will also be generated. You do not need this file and can delete it.
7. Place the XML file in the directory
...intel_a\startup\EquipmentandSystems\MigrationDirectory\dictionary\
V4_Exported_XML so that it is available to your V5 applications.
The V4 project registration model must be moved to the following directory, by ftp or any other method:
...intel_a\startup\AEC\preg. The project registration model is used by both Plant and Ship Review applications and
by the migration process.
Piping Design
Page 253
Exporting V5 Feature Dictionary Data

This task shows how to export V5 Feature Dictionary data to XML format and make it available for
comparison with the XML file of V4 Project Registration Model data. This process is also used when
comparing two V5 feature dictionaries.
As part of the process of converting a V4 model to V5, you need to convert class and attribute data in a
V5 Feature Dictionary to XML format. The XML file will be placed in a specific directory at a location where
it will be available to your V5 applications.
When you use this command then all the feature dictionaries listed in your project resource management
(PRM) file will be "exported" - in actual fact the classes and attributes they contain will be converted to
XML format for further processing. To determine the location of the CATfct files, the application examines
the entry "ImporterCATfcts" in the PRM file. This entry should indicate the location of your CATfct files. If
left blank the default location is: ...intel_a\resources\graphic. The sample PRM files provided with this
application are in: ...intel_a\startup\EquipmentandSystems\ProjectData. To determine which type of data
is exported, the exporter program examines the value of the Visible field for each application in the PRM
file. In the V4 to V5 Migration section of the PRM file there are resources named CATPiping, CATTubing,
etc. If the value of the Visible field for these resources is No, then the data will not be migrated, if it is
Yes, it will be migrated.
This step is not needed if you did not define new classes and attributes in V4.
1. Change to the directory ...intel_a\code\bin at a command prompt and take the following steps:
If you changed the location of your installation execute:
set CATDisciplinePath=XXX\startup\EquipmentandSystems\ProjectData (see note below)
set AECMIGR_PROJECT=Project where XXX is the directory path to your installation.
If you want to use a PRM file with a name other than "Project" then change the word "Project" to the
name of your file (AECMIGR_PROJECT=XXX).
Execute: catstart.exe -run CATAecDictionaryExporter.exe -env Environment_name
...\application data\ DassaultSystemes\CATEnv .
--direnv
Replace Environment_name with the name of the environment you are using. Your system
administrator should be able to give you this information.
Replace ..\application data\ DassaultSystemes\CATEnv with the full path to your
environment directory, in this case CATEnv.
The environment file (...\CATEnv\Environment_name.txt) must have correct settings for
CATDictionaryPath (...intel_a\code\dictionary) and CATGraphicPath (...intel_a\resources\graphic).
If it has a setting for CATDisciplinePath it should be the same as the path you defined above. Do
not leave this setting blank. This command will override the path you set in an earlier step (set
CATDisciplinePath). You should adjust your steps accordingly.
After you execute the command, the Data Export Application dialog box displays.
Piping Design
Page 254
2. The Choose Modeler for Export window displays all the modelers available to you. Simply put, a
modeler contains the list of applications whose CATfct files will be exported. The PlantShip Modeler
seen here includes all plant-ship applications as of R10. Select the modeler you need. Even if an entry
is highlighted, as in the image above, you should click on it.
3. In the Output File field browse to or enter the directory path and name of the file where you want the
XML output to be placed. If you select an existing file then it will be overwritten. If you enter the name
of a file that does not exist then a new file will be created.
4. Once you have filled in these fields the Export button will become available. Click on it to generate the
XML content. A message will inform you when the process is complete. The image below shows an
excerpt from a generated XML file.
5. Click Quit when you are finished.
Piping Design
Page 255
The next step will be to compare the classes and attributes contained in the V4 and V5 XML files.
Comparing
the XML Output Page 256
Piping Design
This task shows how to compare the V4 and V5 classes and attributes. This task should be performed after you have exported the V4 project registration
model and the V5 feature dictionary.
Your goal is to have a mapping table that shows the V4 classes and attributes you want to import and their corresponding V5 classes and attributes. Once you
have converted and exported the V4 and V5 classes and attributes, the two must be compared to determine which ones do not exist in V5. This is done by a
tool developed for the purpose. Once you have run this tool it will produce three files which tell you: which classes have problems (do not exist in the mapping
table or the XML file of V5 classes), which classes need to be added to V5 and an overall report of what the tool has performed.
Before you begin this process you must set the directory path - this tells the tool the directory path in your installation. Open a command prompt and move to
the directory intel_a\code\bin.
In Windows, press Enter after typing: set AECMIGR_DIRECTORYPATH= XXX\startup\EquipmentandSystems\MigrationDirectory where XXX is
the directory path to your installation.
Do the same in Unix, but replace "set" with "export".
The user can check the current path by executing the comparator, or executing CATAecDictionaryComparator -h. The comparator will show the path as the
first line of output.
1. To run the tool open a command prompt, change to the directory ...intel_a\code\bin, and enter the following: CATAecDictionaryComparator -i (V4file)
(V5file) -m (name of mapping table) -o (name for output)
Where:
(V4file) is the XML file which contains the V4 classes. It must include the XML extension.
(V5file) is the XML file which contains the V5 classes. It must include the XML extension.
(name of mapping table) is the name of the mapping table against which you want to compare. The default mapping table provided with this application
is V4ToV5ObjectMapping.csv. You must include the .csv extension. The mapping table is in the following directory:
intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\MigrationDiretory\Dictionary\Mapping Table.
(name for output) is the name for the three output files. If you enter the name MAR, for instance, then three files will be produced: MAR.html, MAR.xml
and MAR.csv.
An entry may look like this: CATAecDictionaryComparator -i Preg_ALL.xml catpiping.xml -m V4toV5ObjectMapping.csv -o MAR
2. When the tool (called Comparator) has finished

running
it will produce
three reports and place them in thePage
following
257 directories: XML and CSV files in
Version
5 Release
15
Piping Design
intel_a\startup\EquipmentandSystems\MigrationDirectory\Dictionary\DDL_Files and the HTML file in ...\Reports.
Open the HTML file in a Web browser to see a full report. The report begins with a table of contents that is hyperlinked to the entries. (The names in
parentheses are internal names.) The entries in the report are color coded as follows:
Green: No action was taken. The V4 class appears in the mapping table and the XML file of V5 classes.
Blue: The V4 class appears in the mapping table, but not in the V5 XML file.
Red: The V4 class was not found in the mapping table or V5 XML file.
Orange: V5 mapping does not exist in the mapping table ("no mapping"), or is badly mapped.
Piping Design
Page 258
3. Open the XML file (using a text editor like Wordpad) to see a list of the classes that do not exist in the V5 feature dictionaries and can be imported.
<Class
Name="PipingPartFunc"
DisplayName="Piping Part Function"
Superclass="Component_Function"
Creator="System"
Domain="PIP"
UUID="b7acacd1_83_3a707981_10">
4. Open the CSV file using Microsoft Excel. It will look similar to the image below, except that it will not have the entries shown in the first line (shaded red).
In the first three columns this table displays existing

in V4.
Page 259with whatever you want the
Versionclasses
5 Release
15You should fill in the 4th, 5th and 6th columns
Piping Design
corresponding entry to be in V5. In column 7 you should enter the domain, or application. (PIP=Piping Design, PID= Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams,
EQT= Equipment Design, HVA=HVAC Design, etc.)
An asterisk in the Attribute column indicates that the entry is a class. If it has attributes then the lines that follow it will list the attributes under the same
class name. In the example above, Line 2 shows a class. Lines 3, 4 and 5 show that the entries are attributes of the class Piping Line and are called Size,
Part Description and Design Speed.
NOTE: V5 entries should refer to the internal name of the class or parent. The internal name is the name within the application and is not the one the user
sees. Frequently it is similar, though, and the class name Piping Line may have the internal name PipingLine. You can find the internal name by looking at
the V5 XML file where it's referred to as Name and Superclass.
5. Once you have entered the information you need to copy and paste it into the mapping table - in the current example it is V4ToV5ObjectMapping.csv, found
in intel_a\startup\EquipmentandSystems\MigrationDirectory\Dictionary\MappingTable. However, you should not directly modify the table the table with the
.csv extension. In this same directory you will find a table with the same name but with the extension .xls. Modify this table, save it, and then save it again
as a .csv file also. It is faster for this application to read .csv files.
6. If you have V4 classes and attributes that do not have equivalent classes and attributes in V5 then you must repeat the steps explained in Importing the
XML Output.
You can repeat these steps as many times as you want - until you are satisfied that your mapping table has all the V4 classes and attributes you want and
the corresponding V5 classes and attributes.
Piping Design
Page 260

This task shows you how to import the class and attribute data in the XML output file after the comparing
process, as explained in Comparing the XML Output.
The xxx.XML file that is generated at the end of the comparing process contains the list of V4 classes and
attributes that do not exist in V5 and that need to be added to the CATfct files. The entries will be added
to the relevant CATfct file - if the class and attribute belong to the V4 HVAC discipline then they will be
added to the V5 HVAC CATfct file. The importing process described here creates these classes and
attributes in V5 using the Feature Dictionary.
1.
Change to the directory intel_a\code\bin at a command prompt and execute the following:
catstart.exe -run CATAecDictionaryImporter.exe -env DefaultEnvironment -direnv
...\application data\ DassaultSystemes\CATEnv. The Data Import Application dialog box
displays.
2.
3.
4.
The Choose Modeler for Import window displays all the modelers available to you. Simply put, a
modeler contains the list of applications whose CATfct files will be updated with new classes, if
there are any. The PlantShip Modeler seen here includes all plant-ship applications as of R10.
Select the modeler you need. Even if an entry is highlighted, as in the image above, you should
click on it.
In the Input File field browse to or enter the name of the XML file that was output by the
comparing process (Comparing the XML Output). The file is placed in the directory:
intel_a\startup\EquipmentandSystems\MigrationDirectory\Dictionary\DDL_Files.
Once you have filled in these fields the Import button will become available. Click on it to begin
the importing process. Your existing CATfct files will not be overwritten. If they do not contain a
class or attribute that exists in the XML file then it will be added. The process will create a new
CATfct file if something is added to it. The new file name will contain the word "new". If an
existing CATfct file to which an entry was added was named XXX.CATfct, then the new file will be
XXX_new.CATfct You should examine the new file and rename it as necessary - in most cases you
will want it to have the original name, XXX.CATfct.
Piping Design
Page 261
5.
A report appears in the Data Import Application dialog box window at the end of the process,
listing all classes and attributes that were added.
6.
Click Quit when you are finished.
Piping Design
Page 262
Exporting V4 Standards Data to V5

This task shows how to export your V4 standards and specifications data to V5.
You need to export the data associated with your V4 standards - such as ASTL - and specifications, like
CS150R, so that when your V4 catalog parts and design models are converted to V5 they have access to
this data.
1. To begin with you need to set the working units in your V4 session so that they are the same as
contained in your tables: if the length in the tables is in inches you should set the length to inches in
your session. Plane angle should in most cases be degrees.
2. In the PROSETUP function open the Tables menu and the Import Export submenu.
Piping Design
Page 263
3. Set the Import/Export toggle switch to Export.

4. Select a standard, such as ASTL.
5. Enter a file name, say All_tables, in the Content List File Name field. The table type and table name of
all tables that are exported will be included in this file. The file itself will need to be moved to V5 and is
needed in the migration process.
6. Select all the tables you want to export in the Table Type list. The tables will display in the Contents
List as you select them. If more than one table is associated with a table type then the table names will
display. Select all or as many as you need. You do not need to export certain tables. These are: End
dimension, Part dimension, End symbol definition, Pipe support, Insulation specs and ISO
part mapping.
7. When you have selected all the tables for one standard you can change to another standard and repeat
the process with the tables associated with it. You may not need to select your specifications tables
again.
8. When you have selected the tables you need from all your standards click the Apply button. All the
tables you selected will be placed in the ...setup\PRO\table directory. The file All-tables will also be
placed there.
9. Go to the PIPSETUP function, and the menu Catalog - Pipe Spc - Create. Select a Pipe Spec name and
note which tables your specification uses. One way to determine this is to note the table name - the
name of the specification will be included in it (not all tables are named this way). Note the table
names because they are needed in a later step.
10. Transfer, by ftp or any other method, all the tables as well as the All_tables file to your V5
application. They should be placed in the following directory:
intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\MigrationDirectory\PipingSystems\
V4_Exported_Tables.
11. You now need to edit the All-tables file (using a text editor like Notepad) to include the name of the
V5 directory where each table must be placed. It is best to make a copy of the All_tables file and edit
the copy. The entries as exported from V4 will look like this:
/*Table,Filter*/
Nominal OD,ASTL-Nominal_OD
Schedule,ASTL-Schedule
Wall Thickness,ASTL-Wall_Thickness
End Style,ASTL-End_Style
Rating,ASTL-Rating
Material Category,ASTL-Material_Category
You need to change the header and add a comma and the name of the directory as a third field. The
directory name must either be a standard name (ASTL) or specification name (CS150R) for the
transparent automatic parts, compatibility rules and process function mapping rules tables. For an
example see MigrationDirectory\Piping
Systems\V4_Exported_Tables\V5_TableMigrationList_sample.txt.
V4 Table Type,V4 Table Name,V5 Folder Name
Nominal OD,ASTL-Nominal_OD ,ASTL
Schedule,ASTL-Schedule ,ASTL
Wall Thickness,ASTL-Wall_Thickness ,ASTL
End Style,ASTL-End_Style ,ASTL
Piping Design
Page 264
Rating,ASTL-Rating ,ASTL
Material Category,ASTL-Material_Category,ASTL
12. If a table is used in more than one specification then you may have to duplicate the rows. Refer to the
notes you made in Step 9 to identify the tables used by a specification. In the example below, the
table 3D Part Function - In-line Instrument, FUNCTION_TABLE_INLINE_INSTRUMENT does
not mention any specifications. If you want to use it in all four specifications then you must duplicate
the rows and add the specification name to each row.
3D
3D
3D
3D
3D
Part
Part
Part
Part
Part
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Inline Instrument,FUNCTION_TABLE_INLINE_INSTRUMENT,CS150R
Inline Instrument,FUNCTION_TABLE_INLINE_INSTRUMENT,SS150R
In-line Instrument,FUNCTION_TABLE_INLINE_INSTRUMENT
Make sure there are no trailing blanks at the end of each row.
13. Open a command prompt window and change directories to intel_a\code\command. Enter the
following line and hit Enter: CATAecV4ToV5PipingTables.bat (name of file) where (name of file) is
the name of the file which you edited in Step 10. It should include the file extension. You need to edit
the bat file if you use a standard that is not named ASTL. Find the letters ASTL in the file and change
them to the name of your standard.
All the tables will be placed in the following V5 directory (unless you set the
AECMIGR_DIRECTORYPATH variable to a different location):
intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\MigrationDirectory\PipingSystems\
V5_Migrated_Tables
14. Move the tables to wherever you need to have them. You will need to add references to these tables in
the appropriate CATProduct and catalog files. See MigrationDirectory\Piping for an example.
Piping Design
Page 265

This task shows how to export your V4 catalog parts to V5.
This process will migrate the parts geometry and parts attributes from your V4 library to V5. Before you
perform this procedure you should export project registration and standards data, which is explained
elsewhere in this section.
The process described here is the preferred method of exporting parts. However, if for some reason you
do not want to export the V4 library, or you do not have access to it, you can export parts directly from
a V4 model. The procedure is described in Exporting Parts from a V4 Model.
1.
Parts in compressed form cannot be migrated. If your catalog is in compressed form then you
must re-create it in uncompressed form using standard V4 procedures. This requires adding to
your DCLS file following declarative: CATAEC.SETUP.PRO.CATALOG_COMPRESSION=FALSE; You
may also need to set the MAXTIM variable appropriately, such as: catia.MAXTIM_CPU=150000;.
The uncompressed parts geometry will be placed inside "timestamp" details (*.library files) in the
following directory: ...setup\PRO\APD\lib. The catalog file will be placed in the following
directory: ...setup\PRO\catlg.
2.
In the same ...\catlg directory, create an index type file and name it PRTMGXXX, where XXX is
your catalog number. The V4 sample catalog number is frequently 005 and that is the number that
will be used in this document. You need to create a special file - you can name it migrateXXX which will be used to create the index file. You can create this input file by copying an existing file
(convert1_catalog_parts, which is in the same directory) and editing it. Enter the following in
the file:
/* */
*TYPE
create_CCAPS_index
*INPUT
/aecsite424/setup/PRO/catlg/PRTDA005
*OUTPUT
/aecsite424/setup/PRO/catlg/PRTMG005
*KEYS
PARTDEF CATEGORY 8
PARTDEF PARTTYPE 8
Piping Design
Page 266
PARTNUM PARTNO 40
PIPESIZE SIZE 40
ELCATLOG ELTIME 16
STANDATA STANDARD 8
VNDRCODE VNDRCOD 40
PARTNAME PARTNAME 40
PIPESPEC ENDS 40
ENDSPEC ENDS 40
ENDSPEC RATG 40
See ...MigrationDirectory\Piping Systems\V4_CatalogMainFile\migrate999

for an example.
3.
Also in the ...\catlg directory enter at a prompt: run catutil -l RF0CPT -i migrate005 -o
migrationindex.out
This will create the file PRTMG005 in the ...\catlg directory. Ignore error messages "Undefined
Attribute Group Name". This only indicates that pipes do not have part end styles and parts do
not have pipe end styles.
4.
Move the the PRTMG005 file to its V5 location, in the directory:

...intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\MigrationDirectory\PipingSystems\
V4_CatalogMainFile
Piping Design
5.
Page 267
Move all the <timestamp> files that were created when you uncompressed your V4 catalog to
their V5 location:
V4_Catalog_Details. They are called timestamp files because each file will have a date and time
stamp for a file name as shown below:
2001248204613737.library
2001248204623132.library
2001248204625529.library
2001248204627914.library
2001248204630318.library
6.
You must migrate the standard encode/decode tables from V4 using

CATAecV4ToV5PipingTables before you start the migration of piping parts. The
migrated tables must reside in ...MigrationDirectory\Piping
Systems\V5_Migrated_Tables\ASTL (or another directory with your standard's
name).
7.
In V5, open a command prompt window and change directories to ...intel_a\code\command. Type
in the following and hit Enter: CATAecV4ToV5PipingCatalog.bat 005 (replace the numerals 005
with your catalog number). This will create your V4 parts in V5, placing them in
V5_Generated_CATParts (unless you set the AECMIGR_DIRECTORYPATH variable to a different
location). Each part will have a unique, generic part name.
8.
For Unix execute the script CATAecV4ToV5PipingCatalog.sh 005 (replace 005 with your
catalog number).
Create a parts catalog, a suggested name being PipingParts005.catalog, and place the parts in it.
See ...MigrationDirectory\Piping\Piping Design\ComponentCatalogs for an example.
Piping Design
Page 268

This task shows how to export your V4 piping lines to V5.
The piping line data in V4 is converted to XML format using this process, and can then be imported into
your V5 application using the Importing Line IDs function. This task should be performed only after you
have a satisfactory mapping table because this process looks for attributes in the mapping table.
You also need to copy the file PlantShipLineIDImport.dtd from
intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\Piping\SampleData to
intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\MigrationDirectory\LineLists\ImportFiles.
1. Place a copy of the V4 Process_Shared.model, which contains the V4 shared piping lines, into the
V4Models directory in your V5 application. The default location for this directory is
intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\MigrationDirectory\LineLists.
You can ftp this file to V5 or use any other method for transferring it. The data in this file will be
used to generate the XML data.
2.
The model you use to export piping line data does not have to be Process_Shared.model. Any piping
model can be sent to this program and its line data exported to an import file.
To start the process of converting the V4 lines to XML format, open a command prompt window,
change to the directory intel_a\code\command and enter the following at a DOS prompt:
CATAecV4ToV5LineIDs.bat Process_Shared.
(For Unix enter: CATAecV4ToV5LineIDs.sh Process_Shared ) Click Enter. After the conversion
process ends the generated XML file will be placed in the LineLists\ImportFiles directory.
It is normal for some attributes to be not transferred to V5 from V4. You can ignore any messages you
get during the conversion process that read "...no V5 attribute in table." However, there may be some
attributes that you do want to add to V5, such as Unit Name. In such cases you must create the attribute
in V5 using the Feature Dictionary, re-export the V5 feature dictionary, add the new attribute to the
mapping table and repeat the process of importing piping lines described here.
3. You can now use the Import Line IDs function in Piping Design to import the piping lines in the XML
file into your application.
Piping Design
Page 269

This task shows you how to create or modify setup data that is needed to use your migrated V4 models.
Data that you migrate from V4 into V5 will usually be stored in directories that are separate from the directories in which V5
generated data is stored. Sample directories are included with this application for storing migrated data. The default location is:
intel_a\startup\EquipmentandSystems\MigrationDirectory\XXX where XXX is a discipline like Tubing or Piping.
You need to create the following setup data in the directory that you use to store your resources, and which is referenced in the
project resource management file. If you continue to use the sample directories the changes should be made there, if you choose to
create a new location, that is where the setup data should be added.
In the instructions below it is assumed that you have created a new location. If you continue to use the sample directories then you
should adjust the instructions accordingly.
1.
Discrete Values
You will need a set of discrete value text files as a default set of possible values for piping attributes. You can copy these from
the sample migrated piping discipline (\intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\MigrationDirectory\DiscreteValues) into your own
\DiscreteValues directory. You can throw away what you do not want, and edit what you want so you are satisfied with your set
of text files.
Also, if you had user-defined attributes defined in your V4 Project Registration Model containing a discrete list of values, then you
will need to create a discrete values text file in your \DiscreteValues directory containing the name of your mapped V5 attribute
name and the values you want available in V5 for your user-defined attribute.
2.
Design Rules
\intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\MigrationDirectory\PipingSystems\V5_Migrated_Tables contains a directory called
DesignRules. Move this directory to your \Piping directory. Copy the design rules catalog from the sample piping discipline into
your \Piping\DesignRules directory. Borrow additional design rule resources as desired from the sample piping disciplines, and
rename and edit them as desired. When you are satisfied you have all of the design rule data you want, you are ready to edit the
design rules catalog. Rename the design rules catalog you copied, as desired. Bring up the application again and edit your
design rules catalog as needed. Change the links to reference your own text files. Take out previous entries ("Remove
description") and add your own entries. Refer to the section Standards and Design Rules for more information.
3.
Standards
Under your \Piping directory create a directory called Standards. Your migrated standard data in
\intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\MigrationDirectory\PipingSystems\V5_Migrated_Tables is separated in different
directories for each standard. Move these standard directories to your \Piping\Standards directory. Copy the piping standards
catalog from the sample piping discipline into your \Piping\Standards directory. Borrow additional standard resources as desired
from the sample piping disciplines, and rename and edit them as desired. When you are satisfied you have all of the standard
data you want, you are ready to edit the standards catalog. Rename the standards catalog you copied, as desired. Bring up the
application again and edit your standards catalog as needed. Take out previous entries ("Remove description") and add your own
entries. Refer to Standards and Design Rules for more information.
4.
Specifications
Under your \Piping directory create a directory called Specification. Your migrated spec data in
\intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\MigrationDirectory\PipingSystems\V5_Migrated_Tables is separated in different
directories for each specification. Move these specification directories to your \Piping\Specification directory.
Copy the piping specification catalog from the sample piping discipline into your \Piping\Specification directory, or copy a sample
empty specifications catalog from \intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\MigrationDirectory\PipingSystems\V5_Catalog. Or
create a new material specifications catalog by following the instructions in Creating a Specifications Catalog.
Borrow additional specification resources as desired from the sample piping disciplines, and rename and edit them as desired.
When you are satisfied you have all of the specification data you want, you are ready to edit the specifications catalog. Rename
the specifications catalog you copied, as desired. Bring up the application again and edit your specifications catalog as needed.
Take out previous entries ("Remove description") and add your own entries. You will notice that the specifications catalog has
two logical sections under each specification - you see a list of tables and then a list of parts. At this time, you are only editing
the table entries. After you have built your parts catalog, you will come back to this specifications catalog and edit and add
entries for your parts. Refer to Creating a Specifications Catalog for more information.
Piping Design
5.
Page 270
Parts Catalog
Under your \Piping directory create a directory structure called \PipingDesign\ComponentCatalogs\CatalogXXX, where XXX is your
catalog number. See the sample migrated piping discipline for an example. In the \CatalogXXX directory you will place your
migrated catalog parts and your parts catalog.
You will probably not want to borrow and edit an existing piping parts catalog because of the number of part entries you would
have to delete. You can copy the empty sample catalog in
\intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\MigrationDirectory\PipingSystems\V5_Catalog, and rename it. Bring up the application
and add all of your parts to it.
Refer to Modifying a Catalog for more information. You can use the Create/Modify catalog button to add your parts to the catalog.
6.
PRM File
Edit the project resource management (PRM) file because the final two steps need to reference your standard data. In
\intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\ProjectData\Project.xml, you can define a new discipline in that PRM file, or copy it and
rename it (e.g., ProjectABC.xml), and then edit the Migration section to reference your new discipline resources.
Before bringing up the application during the next steps, you need to set the CATDisciplinePath variable.
In Windows:
set CATDisciplinePath=XXX\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\ProjectData
In UNIX:
export CATDisciplinePath=XXX\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\ProjectData
Where XXX is your installation path.
When you bring up the application and open a piping document, you must go to Tools + Project Management and choose your
discipline to make it active.
7.
Specifications Catalog
Now that you have built your parts catalog, you can edit the parts sections of your piping specifications catalog. You need to
define part queries in your specifications catalog.
To aid you in defining these queries, you will need to reference your V4 class catalog definitions. In V4, go to the PIPSETUP
function and to the menu Catalog + Options, set your catalog number, then go to Catalog + Pipe Spc + Generate. Select All, and
then Export. The file CLSEXxxx, where xxx is your catalog number, will be created in setup/PRO/catlg. You will need to
reference this file as you define your class queries in your V5 specifications catalog.
Piping Design
Page 271
The first row of your CLSEXxxx file contains "/*". The fifth row contains "*/". Rows 2, 3, and 4 begin with PSPEC. You can
consider row 4 as containing the column headings of attribute names. The rows that follow, starting with row 6, each contain a
"part class query", with encoded values for certain attributes. An asterisk ("*") beside a value indicates that this is a value for a
"generic attribute", whose encoded value will be used in the part number of a fully resolved piping part. You will see that the
fourth part entry, row 9, has a pipe specification of CS150R, a pipe standard of ASTL, a part category of Valve, a part function of
Gate Valve, a size range from .5 to .75, a (generic) material category of CS (carbon steel), a (generic) material code of A105, a
rating1 of 800, a wall thickness1 of .0000, an end style1 of SW (socket weld), an end style2 of TH (threaded), and other (2/3/4)
wall thickness values of .0000.
See Creating a Specification Catalog to learn how to create an attribute filter file and use it to define all your part queries.
CREATING A V5 ATTRIBUTE FILTER FILE
You can edit the V4 CLSEXxxx file and turn it into a V5 attribute file by following these instructions:
a. In Windows NT, copy CLSEXxxx to CLSEXxxx.txt. Open CLSEXxxx.txt. Remove rows 1(/*), 2, 3, 5, and 6(*/). Old row
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
4 (PSPEC,Standards,Category ...) should now be the top row and the remaining rows should be the V4
queries. Copy CLSEXxxx.txt to V5SpecxxxInput.csv.
Open V5SpecxxxInput.csv. It will open in Microsoft Excel. Save it as V5SpecxxxInput.xls.
Open V5SpecxxxInput.xls. You may wish to save this beginning version and then save intermediate versions as you edit
this file, because it will take several hours. (Hint: Replace All will do most of your work. If you have many catalogs, you
may wish to merge all of your V5SpecxxxInput.xls files together into one file, then edit headers and values once, then
break the file apart again. This is so you will not have to do the same Replace All operation in many different files.)
The first row contains the headers for each column. Delete all columns that are completely empty under the header
name. You may also wish to delete the Primary Option Flag column and the Wall thickness columns.
Rename the column called Standards to Standard. In front of this column insert a new column called PartType.
For each row, under the column called PartType, enter the appropriate V5 part type. Use the entries in the two columns
Category and Function to determine the approximate name of the part type, and use the part type browser in CATIAV5 to
determine the exact name of the V5 part type. For example, for Category/Function Branches/Tee, use PartType Tee. For
Category/Function Valve/Gate Valve, use PartType Gate Valve. For Category/Function Flanges/Blind flange, use PartType
Blind Flange (note the f became F). For Category/Function Elbows/90 Degree Elbow, use PartType Elbow (and delete any
duplicate rows, because 45 Degree Elbow will also map to Elbow). For Category/Function Gasket/, use PartType Gasket.
And for Category/Function Pipe/, use PartType Pipe with bends (do not use V5 Pipe; V4 pipes are bendable pipes not
straight pipes). Then delete the columns Category and Function.
Rename the column called Material category to MaterialCategory. Refer to your material category encode/decode table
(e.g., Piping\Standards\ASTL\ASTL-MaterialCategory.txt) to edit each row in this column: change

CS* to Carbon steel*; CS to Carbon steel; etc.
h. Rename the column called Material code to MaterialCode. You will likely not have to edit the rows under this column, but
check your material code encode/decode table (e.g., Piping\Standards\ASTL\ASTL-MaterialCode.txt)

table to make sure. If you edit any value with an * at the end, make sure it still has an * at the end after you finish your
edit.
i. Rename the column called Part name to PartName. The rows under this column will likely already have the decoded
values.
j. Rename the column called Part code to PartCode. Make sure every code in the column is in your part code table (e.g.,
Piping\Standards\ASTL\ASTL-PartCode.txt).
k. Rename the column called Rating 1 to Rating. Refer to your rating encode/decode table (e.g.,
Piping\Standards\ASTL\ASTL-Rating.txt) to edit each row in this column: change 150 to 150#; change
300 to 300#; etc.
l. Rename the column called Schedule 1 to Schedule. Refer to your schedule encode/decode table (e.g.,
Piping\Standards\ASTL\ASTL-Schedule.txt) to edit each row in this column: change STD to STANDARD;

change STD* to STANDARD*; change XS* to EXTRA STRONG*; change 160 to SCHEDULE 160; etc. Be careful to
maintain existing *, but do not add * when not needed.
m. Rename the column called End style 1 to EndStyle. Refer to your endstyle encode/decode table (e.g.,
Piping\Standards\ASTL\ASTL-EndStyle.txt) to edit each row in this column: change BW to BUTT WELD;
change RF to RAISED FACE; etc.
n. Rename the column called End style 2 to EndStyle2. Refer to your endstyle encode/decode table (e.g.,
Piping\Standards\ASTL\ASTL-EndStyle.txt) to edit each row in this column: change SW to SOCKET
WELD; etc.
o. Rename the column called Start size range to MinOutsideDiameter(in). You may wish to change in (inches) to mm
(millimeters) or m (meters) or to another unit, depending upon the unit your data uses. You will be editing the
row values, changing them from V4 nominal size values to V5 actual size values (outside
number, not nominal size character string).
diameter real
Refer to both your nominal size table (e.g.,
Piping Design
Page 272
Piping\Standards\ASTL\ASTL-NominalSize.txt) and your standard pipe dimensions table (e.g.,

Piping\Standards\ASTL\ASTL-PipeDimensions.txt). Find the unit used for OutsideDiameter in your
standard pipe dimensions table and use that unit for MinOutsideDiameter. Your standard pipe dimensions table may have
different outside diameter values for the same nominal size for different schedules. Edit the V4 nominal size value in the
MinOutsideDiameter(in) column with the appropriate V5 outside diameter value, taking care to use the correct value for
the schedule defined in your row. You may wish to use a slightly smaller value to insure against any roundoff errors. For
example, you may change 0.5 to 0.84 (or
smaller to 6.62).
slightly smaller to 0.83) and change 6 to 6.625 (or slightly
p. Rename the column called End size range to MaxOutsideDiameter(in). You may wish to change in (inches) to mm
(millimeters) or m (meters) or to another unit, depending upon the unit your data uses. You will be editing the
row values, changing them from V4 nominal size values to V5 actual size values (outside
diameter real
number, not nominal size character string). Refer to both your nominal size table (e.g.,
Piping\Standards\ASTL\ASTL-NominalSize.txt) and your standard pipe dimensions table (e.g.,
Piping\Standards\ASTL\ASTL-PipeDimensions.txt). Find the unit used for OutsideDiameter in your
standard pipe dimensions table and use that unit for MaxOutsideDiameter. Your standard pipe dimensions table may
have different outside diameter values for the same nominal size for different schedules. Edit the V4 nominal size value in
the MaxOutsideDiameter(in) column with the appropriate V5 outside diameter value, taking care to use the correct value
for the schedule defined in your row. You may wish to use a slightly larger value to insure against any round off errors.
For example, you may change 4 to 4.5 (or
larger to 6.63).
slightly larger to 4.55) and change 6 to 6.625 (or slightly
q. Now save your file. Also save it as an intermediate file for any future reference. Copy this file several times, one for each
Specification you have defined in it. Name the new files with each specification name (e.g.,
V5SpecxxxInput_CS150R.xls and V5SpecxxxInput_CS300R.xls).

r. Edit each of these input specification files. Remove the rows that do not apply to this specification, and then delete the
PSPEC column. Save each file.
s. Start CATIAV5R14. Open your Piping Specifications catalog. Double-click on the first specification defined, but not
Default. Select the icon for Create/Modify Catalog. Define the Application as Piping. Define the Parts directory (e.g.,
Piping\PipingDesign\ComponentCatalogs\Catalogxxx). Define the Attribute filter (e.g.,

Piping\Specification\V5SpecxxxInput_CS150R.xls). Select Documents: File base (since Model
Migration can only be done in File base, not ENOVIA base). Select OK. This may take an hour or
8.
more, depending upon the number of catalog part documents and the number of rows in your attribute filter input file.
When done, save your Piping Specifications catalog and then repeat the process for each of your piping specifications.
t. You now have a completed migrated Piping Specifications catalog.
Piping Lines
After performing the task Exporting V4 Piping Lines, you will have an Import file that you can use in V5 to create your V4 piping
lines in V5. Before performing the Import step of that task, you had to set up your piping discipline and PRM file.
You will likely want to copy the V4 migrated piping lines and catalog from
\intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\MigrationDirectory\Piping\SampleData\PipingLines to your own piping lines directory
(\Piping\SampleData\PipingLines). This will be the piping lines catalog your PRM file should reference and which your Import Line
IDs operation will update.
Piping Design
Page 273

This task shows how to migrate V4 models to V5. This task should only be attempted after all the other
tasks in this section have been completed.
Before performing this task you should make sure that options are correctly set in your project resource
management file. These options help you control which portions of a model you want to migrate - if you
want to migrate only certain parts of it. If your V4 model has data from Piping and Instrumentation
Diagrams, Piping Design, HVAC Design, Structures and Equipment Arrangement, you can decide which
type of data you want to migrate by setting these options. If you choose to only migrate Tubing data,
then you can do so. See Understanding Project Resource Management, AEC V4 V5 Migration section, on
how to set the options. NOTE: The sample PRM file references "Big Scale" structures catalogs. Because of
this you have to set the CATCGMBigScale variable to 1 before migrating structures models, shown below.
1. Move your V4 model (by ftp or any other means) to the same platform as V5, in this case Windows.
2.
Set the following variables. In Windows, open a command prompt window and change to the
directory ...intel_a\code\command. Enter the following: set
CATDisciplinePath=XXX\intel_a\startup\EquipmentandSystems\ProjectData where XXX is the
directory path to your installation. In Unix use the command "export" instead of "set".
For Structures models only, you need to set the following: set CATCGMBigScale=1 (in Unix replace
set with export).
The batch shells CATAECV4ToV5Migration.bat (Windows) and CATAECV4ToV5Migration.sh (Unix)
assume you edited the project resource management (project.xml) file. If you copied and renamed it
then you must edit this batch shell and replace "Project" with your own file name (as referenced by
AECMIGR_PROJECT variable).
For Tubing Design use the batch shell CATAECV4ToV5MigrTubing.bat (.sh for Unix). For all
other applications use the batch shell named above.
3.
For Tubing Design, when migrating models, the project resource management file must reference a
proper tube dimensions table in order to map outside diameter to nominal size. In the PRM file find
the 'TubingDimensions' entry and correct the location if necessary.
At the ...intel_a\code\command prompt, enter CATAECV4ToV5Migration.bat (.sh for Unix) to
execute a bat file. (For Tubing use the file named in Step 2). This will bring up the Migration Batch
dialog box.
Piping Design
Page 274
4.
In the Target Directory field enter (or navigate to by clicking the button) the directory where the
migrated V4 model will be stored.
5.
Click the Browse File button and, in the box that displays, navigate to the directory where you stored
your V4 models. Select (you can select more than one if you want to) a model and click Open. The
V4 model will display in the V4 Documents to Migrate window of the Migration Batch dialog box.
You can use the Remove button to remove files you do not want to migrate.
Piping Design
6.
7.
Page 275
If you are migrating a 2-D model then you need to set the path for certain files by clicking the
Options button. The process is explained in the Infrastructure User Guide: Customizing Customizing Settings - General - Compatibility - V4 Data Reading - and scroll down to PROJECT File
Path.
Click the Migrate button. When the process is complete the Migrate Report will display. You can also
to see the report. If the migration was successful you will get an OK
click the Report button
message. If you get a message that says "Error during migration" then you must check for mistakes
and repeat the process. Your V4 model is migrated as several documents, as explained below.
8.
The V4 model will be migrated as several documents, and each one will display in the specifications
tree when you expand it.. Each object in the document will be in a separate document. To open the
document click File - Open on the application menu bar and navigate to the directory you specified in
the Target Directory field. The document with the same name as the V4 document is the "master"
document, which contains (references to) all the components. Other documents underneath it will
have identifying letters - such as EQ for Equipment - to indicate what they contain. The document
will contain references to all parts - piping or tubing documents, for instance, will contain references
to all parts that are in the piping or tubing line. Similarly, equipment documents will contain
references to parts and nozzles that make up the equipment. You need all the files to recreate the
document.
Piping Design
Page 276

This task shows you how to export parts from a V4 model to the V5 catalog. This step can be used as an
alternative to exporting your entire V4 catalog as described in Exporting V4 Catalog Parts. You do need to
migrate piping lines and standards data as described elsewhere in this section. You can export piping line
data from any piping model.
When you use this procedure the exported parts will not be generic parts, which is the preferred method
of exporting V4 parts to V5. The exported parts will be fully resolved or non-specification parts.
Unless you set the variable AECMIGR_DIRECTORYPATH to a different location prior to executing the batch
shell, the V4 model from which parts will be exported should reside in the following directory:
...intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\MigrationDirectory\SampleV4Models.
The input directory for pipe geometry is ...MigrationDirectory\PipingSystems\V4_Catalog_Details.
1.
Place your V4 model in the V5 directory listed above. You can ftp it or place it there using any other
method you prefer.
2.
In V5, open a command prompt window and change to the directory: ...intel_a\code\command.
Enter the following line and press Enter: CATAecV4ToV5ModelParts.bat
XXX.model where
XXX is the name of your V4 model.
In Unix execute the following command: CATAecV4ToV5ModelParts.sh
3.
XXX.model
The generated parts will be placed in the directory:

...MigrationDirectory\PipingSystems\V5_Generated_CATParts.
Each part will have a unique part number. Parts with the same part number will not be duplicated.
4.
Place these parts in your V5 parts catalog and modify your specifications catalog. You can now
migrate the model using the procedure described in Migrating the V4 Model.
Piping Design
Page 277

This task shows you how to import parts into V5 from third-party software. The process involves exporting part data attributes and values - to a prescribed XML format, and applying it to a template CATpart (or the physical shape of the part)
created in V5. This process can also be used to create resolved parts and is especially useful when you have to create a large
number of parts.
1.Create a set of template CATParts, corresponding to the parts that you want to import. You can create the parts by following
instructions given in Building Parts. The parts must have the part type defined.
They can contain part geometry or they could also be empty, allowing you to add geometry later.
They should have the attributes defined - when you run the command explained below, only the attribute values from
the imported part will be added or changed in the template CATPart. The attributes should already exist.
Pre-existing attributes will not be erased - they will remain after the procedure has been executed.
If the CATParts have multiple representations then they will have corresponding CATShape documents.
To create the body or physical shape of the part you will have to use the Part Design product, for which a separate
license is required. You could, however, get by with the set of sample parts provided with this application if you remove
any link to a design table.
Sample template CATPart documents are in the directory:

...intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\MigrationDirectory\PartGeneration\TemplateCATParts
2.Define a set of part definition files, or one file containing all part definitions. A part definition file is in XML format and must
follow the structure as shown in the sample part definition file which is in:
...MigrationDirectory\PartGeneration\PartDefinitions
A portion of the sample part definition file is shown above.
You must have separate entries for each size. As you can see, GateFLHW 6 inches and GateFLHW 4 inches have separate
entries.
Piping Design
Page 278
The name you enter in the Part Name field will be used to name the part in this application (the part number).
The Type field refers to the part type as defined in the feature dictionary.
The Template field names the template CATPart document you are using.
You can use the same CATPart document for creating different sizes of that part.
You can change the attribute names and values as needed, but make sure you follow the format shown above.
You can also add a line showing a new attribute, again following this format.
You can use a special program - if you have one or can write one - to extract data from your parts. Or you can use the
sample file mentioned above and enter the data in that file.
3. Before you run the commands described in Steps 4 & 5, you must edit the script and enter the location of the Migration
Directory (AECMIGR_DIRECTORYPATH) on your installation. The script is named CATAecPartGeneration.bat and is located
in ...intel_a\code\command. Using a text editor like Notepad, change the words "Your Path" in the DIRECTORYPATH field to
define the directory path in your installation. A portion of the part generation script is shown below.
If the value of CNEXTOUTPUT equals CONSOLE then a window will inform you of the progress of the process. If you change
the value of CONSOLE to a file name and location then the results of the process will be saved in that file.
4.After you have the part definition file and the template CATParts set up, you can run the command to add attributes to the
template CATPart and generate resolved parts. The template will not change. Open a command prompt window and change
to the directory: ...intel_a\code\command. Enter the following and press Enter: CATAecPartGeneration.bat XXX.xml
where XXX is the name of your part definition file. You can run this command several times, if you have more than one part
definition file. You will get error messages if there are inconsistencies, such as if the part type in the template CATPart does
not match the part type listed in the part definition file (this has been left in the sample part definition file as a test case). A
message will inform you when the process is complete and the generated parts will be placed in the directory
...MigrationDirectory\PartGeneration\ResolvedCATParts.
For Unix run the command: CATAecPartGeneration.sh
XXX.xml
The two images below show the template CATPart "Gate Valve FLHW" and a 4-inch gate valve FLHW after it was generated using the sample
part definition file. You can see that the attribute values and geometry have changed.
Piping Design
Page 279
5.To place the parts you just generated in a catalog, move them from
...MigrationDirectory\PartGeneration\ResolvedCATParts to your desired location. Then you can add them to a new or
existing catalog, using the create/modify catalog command.
Piping Design
Page 280
Creating a 2-D Isometric drawing

This section describes how to create a 2-D isometric drawing from a 3-D document. There is also a function
called Drawing Production that allows you to customize the drawings and create them to scale.
Setup Requirements
Creating an Isometric Drawing from a 3-D Document
Piping Design
Page 281
Setup Requirements for Isometric Drawings
This task shows how to complete the setup requirements for creating an isometric drawing from a 3-D document.
It is recommended that you obtain Alias I-Run V3. The setup process is greatly shortened if you use V3 instead of V2, and you do not
need to install Microsoft VC++ 6.0 compiler. The setup process using both versions is given below.
This procedure only works on the Windows platform.
Version 2
You must install certain third party software for this procedure to work. These are Alias I-Run V2, Microsoft VC++ 6.0 compiler and two
files from Alias I-Run that may only be available if you have a developer's license.
The objective of this setup is to ensure that all applications have access to correct directory paths so that they can work with each other.
When you are done with setup you will have generated a file that acts as interface between Piping Design and the third party software,
and you will have created certain directories that are needed to create and store the isometric drawings.
If necessary, you can also use three design rules table to map terms used in this application to terms used in Alias I-Run. The function
also uses the Bolting design table to obtain certain values. See Rules Overview to find out which tables to use.
1. Install the third party software mentioned above. Check to see if the following two Alias files have installed: pisogen.lib;
encrypt.lib. If they have not installed then obtain them and install them in the following directory: ...Alias\I-Run
2.0\Development.
Using any text editor open the file CATIALinkIso.bat, which is in the following directory: ...intel_a\code\command. There are two
2. fields which you may need to edit. For the entry ISOGEN_DIR = enter the location where I-Run is installed, including the drive
letter. For the entry DEV_STUDIO_DIR = enter the location where Visual C++ is installed.
3. In a command prompt window change directories to... intel_a\code\command, enter CATIALinkIso and hit enter.
4. When the file has stopped executing it will have created the file CATIAPcf2Dxf.exe. Move this file from the intel_a\code\command
directory to the intel_a\code\bin directory. This file creates the interface between Piping Design and the third party software.
5. Open the I-Run Project Manager: Programs - Alias Isometrics - I-Run V2 - Project Manager.
Piping Design
Page 282
You need to create three directories that will be used when generating isometric drawings. The process will be mentioned briefly
here because full documentation for using I-Run is provided by Alias and should have been loaded along with the application.
6. Click the Create New Isometric Directory button on the Project Manager. A dialog box will display in which you can enter the name
and location of a directory. Click Create Directory and then OK and the directory will be created. It will display in the Project
Manager - in this example it is IsogenRoot.
7. Select the directory you just created (in this example IsogenRoot) and click the Create New Project Directory button. A dialog box
will display in which you can enter a directory name. Click OK to create the directory (Project1 in this example).
8. Select the directory you just created and click the Create New Style Directory button. This directory is used for user-defined
configuration of drawings. Under Template Styles select a template. Some templates are not intended for DXF-type files and you will
not be able to generate a drawing if you select a template for any other file format. Read I-Run documentation for the correct
templates. You can modify the template after you have selected it. Enter a name for the directory and click OK. The directory will be
created.
Piping Design
Page 283
9. In Piping Design click Tools - Options, select Equipment & Systems - Piping Design and the ISOGen Setup tab. If you are doing this
for the first time there will be no entries in the fields Root, Project and Style directory. You do not have to enter anything in the first
two fields. In the Style field, navigate to the directory you just created. You must not enter anything in the field I-Run.exe path.
The field Error File lists the name and location of the file where errors in generating drawings are noted.
For Units, select the units you want displayed in the 2-D drawing that will be generated, i.e. weight can be displayed in the drawing
in kilograms or pounds.
10. Version 3
Install Alias I-Run V3.
In Piping Design click Tools - Options, select Equipment & Systems - Piping Design and the ISOGen Setup tab. If you are doing this
for the first time there will be no entries in the fields Root, Project and Style directory. Enter the full path where the I-Run
executable is located in the I-Run.exe path field (the default installation for Alias is: Program Files\Alias\I-Run v3\I-Run.exe).
Follow Steps 6 to 9 above.
Piping Design
Page 284
Creating an Isometric Drawing from a 3-D

Document
This task shows how to complete create an isometric drawing from a 3-D document. You need to
complete the setup requirements first.
1.
With your document open click the Generate ISO button
displays.
. The Generate ISO dialog box
The select options buttons allow you to select what you want to convert.
2.
to select by line ID. When you click this button a dialog box
Click the Select Line IDs button
will display all line IDs available to you, from which you can make your selection. Everything
belonging to the line ID will be converted.
3.
Click the Select Spool button
button to select by spool. When you click this button all spools
available to you will be displayed. Select one or more. Everything belonging to the spool(s) will be
converted.
Piping Design
Page 285
4.
Click the Select Elements button
Networks dialog box will display.
to select a range. When you click this button the Analyze
Click the Network tab and then an object in your document. All objects connected to it will be
selected and the name of the object will display in the Selected Object field. All objects connected to
the selected object will be converted.
You can also select a range within your document. To do this click the Path tab in the Analyze
Networks box, select the first object in your range (its name will display in the From Object field) and
select the last object in your range (its name will display in the To Object field). It is better to select
the objects in the specifications tree, but you can select in the viewer also. All objects within the
range will be converted.
5.
Enter a file name for the isometric drawing and hit Enter when you are using the Select Elements
options.
In other cases a default file name will be generated for the drawing, but it is best to give your own
file name because default file names can confuse. If you are converting everything belonging to a
line ID, for instance, the file name will be that of the line ID. If you perform the step again the
application will create a second file with the same name and the letter "A" (or whatever sequence it
is) attached.
6.
Check the box Display ISO drawing if you want to see the drawing when it is generated. If you do
not check the box the drawing will be stored and you can view it later.
7.
Click OK to generate the drawing. The Converting Data window will display progress.
8.
When the drawing has been generated the New Drawing dialog box displays. Select any of the
options you want and click OK.
Piping Design
9.
Page 286
If you had checked the Display ISO Drawing option then the drawing will display. It will contain
various kinds of information and will display dimensions. You can change unit dimensions by going to
the ISOGen Setup tab described in Setup Requirements.
A large drawing will be split into manageable sections and only the first section will display initially.
10.
To view the drawing later click the View ISO Drawing button
in the toolbar. A window will open
at the Drawings directory. This is a subdirectory of the Style directory you created earlier.
Piping Design
Page 287

This task shows how to generate a PCF format file from a 3-D document.
1.
2.
3.
You need to create certain directories, with a specific structure, that will be used by the process.
You can give then any name you want. There should be a root directory, in this illustration it is called
IsogenRoot. Within this directory there should be a second directory, in this example Project1. Within
the second directory there should be a third directory, called usersCheck in this example. In addition,
you must create a directory within the second directory called Inputs (the generated PCF file will
reside in this directory). When you are done you should have this structure:
In Piping Design click Tools - Options, select Equipment & Systems - Piping Design and the ISOGen
Setup tab. If you are doing this for the first time there will be no entries in the fields Root, Project
and Style directory. Navigate to the directories you just created, in the first three fields, as shown
below. You do not need to enter anything in the Error File field.
With your 3-D document open, follow Steps 1 to 4 as explained in Creating an Isometric Drawing. A
file with the .pcf extension will be generated and stored in the directory
...IsogenRoot\Project1\Inputs. You can view the file using a text editor.
Piping Design
Page 288
Piping Design
Page 289

This task explains the usage of mapping tables specifically for generating isometric drawings.
Mapping tables are how the applications determine which Alias symbol to place in a 2-D drawing for a
given 3-D part. They are also needed to map attributes, and display information in a drawing. This
application comes with tables that contain the mapping needed for the sample parts provided. However,
if you build new parts, or create new attributes, then you need to modify the mapping tables accordingly.
The tables are in the directory ...intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\Piping\DesignRules. Do
not change the location or file name of the tables. The table structure and column headings must not be
modified. Use the tab key to move between columns, and do not add leading or trailing spaces to your
entries.
1.
If you add a new attribute then you need to modify the file
Piping-ISOAttributeMapping.txt. Mapping the attributes and adding the "Type" in the table allows you
to display these attributes in the generated drawing. The attributes can be displayed in the
generated drawing.You will need to see Alias documentation to find out how to customize the
display. Entering the information in the attribute mapping table allows the information to be picked
up. There are three columns in the table:
Type: You can enter attributes as one of three types - pipeline, component and description.
There is a fourth type in the column, attr-categoryXX, and its usage is explained below.
Any attribute that is typed as 'pipeline' will display in a specific area of the generated drawing,
depending on the format you select. If the attribute has a value then the value will be displayed; if
there is no value then the value field will be left blank. The following image shows one format you
can use to display the information in a drawing.
If the attribute belongs to a component then enter 'component' in the type field. There are several
customizable lines in the table that you can modify. The lines display the Alias attribute but not the
corresponding V5 attribute. If you create an attribute that corresponds to the listed Alias attribute
then you can remove the words USER-DEFINED and enter your attribute. You can also add new lines
if you want, entering the V5 and Alias attributes. The display of component attributes in a drawing
depends on how you customize it.
Use 'description' as the type if you want the values for the attributes to display in a Description
column. You can format Alias to add a column with the heading Description to the generated
drawings. The values of attributes you type as description will display in this column.
The type ATTR-CATEGORYXX is used to add a column to the drawing, to display additional
attributes. Some attributes are typed like this in the sample mapping table. To add columns change
Piping Design
Page 290
one of the blank lines in the table. There are several lines in the table that read ATTR-CATEGORYXX
USER DEFINED USER DEFINED (XX is a number). These are essentially blank lines. If you want to
display an attribute value in a column then change the entries 'USER DEFINED' to reflect the names
of V5 and Alias attributes. The attribute will be added to the columns already displayed. A drawing
can have a maximum of 20 columns. The image below shows one format for displaying attributes in
columns in the generated drawing.
In the column AttributeName enter the attribute name used in this application.
In the column ISOGenAttributeName enter the equivalent Alias attribute name. You will have to
see Alias documentation to determine which name to use.
If you add a new end style then modify the table: Piping-ISOEndStyleMapping.txt
2.
The table has two columns:
3.
EndStyle: Enter the end style from Piping Design.

ISOgenEndStyle: Enter the equivalent Alias end style. You need to refer to Alias documentation
to determine which end style to enter.
If you add a new piping symbol then you need to modify the table:
Piping-IsoSymbols.txt. Parts have an attribute, Symbol Name, and you need to modify the table if
you create a part with a value that is not shown in the table.
The table has two columns:
Piping-Symbol: Enter a symbol name attribute value that is not included in the table.
Iso-Symbol: Enter the equivalent Alias symbol. You need to refer to Alias documentation to
determine which symbol to enter.
Piping Design
Page 291
Drawing Production
This section explains how to customize and create a 2-D drawing from a 3-D document. It differs from the
function "creating isometric drawings" in that the drawing production function allows you to customize the way
your 2-D drawing will appear. Another significant difference is that a drawing produced using this function is
created to scale.
Some 2-D endstyle graphics are included with this application. If you need more graphics then you must create
them. The catalog in which endstyles are stored is called Graphic Replacement True View Catalog. It is in the
following directory: ...intel_a\startup\EquipmentandSystems\Piping (or other discipline)\PipingDesign (or other
application)\DrawingCatalog. You need to place all endstyle graphics in the file
GraphicReplacementTrueView.CATPart, which is in the same directory, and then link a graphic name in the
catalog to the actual graphic.
Creation of the drawing correctly also depends on a design table. See Rules Overview and Modifying Design
Rules to find out more.
Piping Design
Page 292

This task shows you how to change the settings that affect the appearance of your 2-D drawing.
Unlike earlier versions, the appearance of the 2-D drawings that you generate using this function is now
controlled by entries in a file, which is in XML format. You need to use a text editor to open this file and
change the entries (it is recommended that you make a copy and change that). You will be able to
generate drawings with the default settings - you only need to change them if you want to customize.
This task explains how to find the file and how its contents are set up.
You need to make sure of a setting before you can use this process. Go to Tools - Options - Mechanical
Design - Drafting, open the Administration tab, and uncheck the option Generative View Style.
1. The default file provided with this application is called EquipmentAndSystems-3-DLayout.xml. It is
located in the directory ...intel_a\resources\standard\generativeparameters.
It is recommended that you make a copy of the default file to make changes in and replace the
default file with your copy. Do not change the location or file name.
2.
The first part of the file, between the lines "Drafting application parameters" and "End of Drafting
parameters" refers to options in the Drafting application. The Drawing Production function uses the
Drafting application to generate 2-D drawings, and a fuller explanation will be found in Drafting
documentation. These entries are:
AxisLines, CenterLines, Fillets, HiddenLines, Threads, 3DPoints, Wireframe, Using3DColors,
Using3DSpec.
3.
The possible values for all of these (except Fillets) are Yes or No. For Fillets the values are: none,
boundaries, symbolic, original edges, projected original edges.
The remainder of the file is organized by application, each one contained within the headings "Start
Application XXX" and "End Application XXX". The entries relating to Piping Design are explained
below. Other applications have similar entries.
The drawing production function allows you to create up to three graphic representations for each
object. Mirroring this, in the default file each application is divided into four sections. The first section
under each application contains settings that apply to all the graphic representations you may create
in your 2-D drawing. Following this section are settings for individual graphic representations,
identified by GR_1, GR_2 and GR_3.
Piping Design
4.
Page 293
The entries in the top section under each application are:
Visible: Yes means this type of part (i.e. piping part) will be generated in the drawing. No means
it will not be generated.
Color: The RGB value of the color of the generated part.

LineType: The value showing line type - bold, dashed etc. This is further explained in the Drafting
application documentation.
EndStyleSymbol: Yes means an end style symbol will be displayed in the drawing for each piping
part.
FabricationBreakSymbol: Yes means a symbol will display at the ends of each spool.
CornerBendPoint: If set to Yes, the intersection of adjacent pipe and tube segments will display a
point.
The following entries do not apply to all applications:
FB-Dimension: When set to Yes, you can get information on the actual dimensions (as it applies
to the 3-D part) of a part in a 2-D drawing, using the Technological Feature Dimension function.
CenterofGravitySymbol: A symbol is displayed at a part's center of gravity when set to Yes.
Entries defining individual graphic representations are:

Single (double, envelope, etc.): Type of graphic representation. If you do not want a representation
to display enter the words _NoGeneration after it, like Double_NoGeneration.
MaxNominalSize: Pipes larger than this value will not be generated in the 2-D drawing. No entry
means there is no limit.
MinNominalSize: Pipes smaller than this value will not be generated in the 2-D drawing. No entry
means there is no limit.
LineGapping: Yes means line gapping will display.
LineGappingValue: The length of a gap in a line at a point where it is crossed by another line, in
millimeters.
CenterLines: Yes means a center line will display (available in objects with a "double" graphic
representation),
CenterLinesExtensionLength: The length by which a center line will extend beyond a pipe.
Piping Design
6.
Page 294
Endstyles
Some 2-D endstyle graphics are included with this application. If you need more graphics then you
must create them. The catalog in which endstyles are stored is called XXX2DSymbolsCustomization.Catalog (XXX stands for the application, such as Piping). It is in the following
directory: ...intel_a\startup\EquipmentandSystems\Piping (or other discipline)\PipingDesign (or other
application)\DrawingCatalog. You need to place all endstyle graphics in the file XXX2DSymbolsCustomization.CATDrawing, which is in the same directory, and then link a graphic name in the
catalog to the actual graphic.
When you create a new endstyle (or modify an existing one) you must enter the correct size in the
EndDiameter column of the catalog. Samples included with the application are sized at 25.4 mm,
which is the actual size of the detail. This size is important because it is used to scale the endstyle to
the size of the component to which it is attached. All endstyles provided with this application, except
butt weld, can be scaled. The vertical dimension of your detail will be interpreted as the end
diameter. Therefore, the value you enter in the EndDiameter column should reflect this.
Piping Design
Page 295
This task shows you how to generate a 2-D drawing from a 3-D document.
Piping parts have been used in this task. The procedure is the same for all types of parts.
You need to make sure of a setting before you can use this process. Go to Tools - Options - Mechanical
Design - Drafting, open the Administration tab, and uncheck the option Generative View Style.
1. Open the 3-D document from which you want to generate a drawing.
2.
3.
4.
On the menu bar, click Start - Mechanical Design - Drafting. The New Drawing box will display. Click
OK.
A new drawing will open. Click Windows - Tile Vertically so that you can view both your documents.
Select a view for your document. In the image below, the Front View has been selected by clicking
the Front View button
your document.
. You should select a view that allows you to best manipulate and view
Piping Design
Page 296
A Generative View Style dialog box will display. If it is not already selected, you need to select the
XML file that contains the settings you want to use to generate your drawing.
5.
You can select one or more objects in the document, and the generated drawing will include only
these. To select, click the objects(s) in the specifications tree. If you do not select any object then
the entire document will be used to generate the drawing.
You must have the Drafting workbench active, and select a view function by clicking one of the View
buttons, as described above, before you can do the following. To make Drafting active click anywhere on
the drawing. The make a view function active click on a button.
If you have a run displayed in your document, it may interfere with the following steps because you may
not be able to select the center line. You can display a run as Line/Curve section, or "hide" it, to more
conveniently complete the following steps.
6. Define a plane - this will determine the view in the generated drawing. To define a plane, click two
objects (if it is a pipe you must click the center line) or the face of a part to define the X and Y axes.
After you click the first object or face, you can move the pointer over the document and the Oriented
Preview box will display a preview. In the image below the user has selected the X axis. The Preview
box is displaying what the plane will be if the user selects the displayed center line for a Y axis.
Piping Design
7.
Page 297
Click to complete selection of the plane. A preview will display in your drawing.
8.
You can use the manipulator

to change the view. Click anywhere in the
document when you are done to create the 2-D image. The image below was made after selecting
the "single" graphic representation.
The following image shows a "double" graphic representation. The center line will only display as a
straight line. It will not follow a curve, if one is present.
Piping Design
You can get more information on manipulating 2-D drawings in Drafting documentation.
Page 298
Piping Design
Page 299

This task shows you how to create your own endstyle symbols.
Some endstyle symbols are provided with this application. if you want to create your own, single or double
line, symbols then follow the procedure described below. As of Release 14, you can customize only endstyle,
center of gravity and fabrication break symbols.
1. You will first need to create a catalog, using the standard catalog facility provided. Click Infrastructure Catalog Editor in the menu bar to open the editor, and then open the CATfct file for the application, in this
and navigate to the CATfct
case Piping. To open the CATfct file click the Open User Dictionary button
file you are using. The sample file is CATPipingSample.CATfct, located in ...intel_a\resources\graphic.
2. Click the Add Catalog Template button to display the Add Catalog Template dialog box and make sure the
entries match those displayed in the image below.
Click OK to create a catalog.

3. Select Endstyle in the specifications tree and the Reference tab to display all the part descriptions.
Piping Design
Page 300
Delete the descriptions you do not need - right click on a description and, in the drop down menu, select
Remove Description.
4. You now have to link the remaining descriptions to an actual drawing. You do this by double clicking on
the description to bring up the Description Definition dialog box and following steps explained below. One
sequence you could follow is:
Open the drawing that contains the 2D geometry you want to link to a description. NOTE: Each
endstyle symbol must be defined in a separate view in the 2D drawing, and each symbol MUST be
defined in a 1 inch by 1 inch (25.4 mm) size. Each detail must have the same name as the one that
appears under the NAME field in the catalog, and to which you will link.
Tile the screen so that you can see the drawing as well as the catalog.
Double click on the description (if you haven't done so already) to bring up the Description Definition
dialog box. Click on Select External Feature in this box.
Select the 2D view containing the geometry you want to associate. The association between the
description and the symbol is done.
Repeat these steps to associate other symbols to descriptions.
Save the catalog and the drawings.
Point to the catalog in the project resource management file.
Piping Design
Page 301
Piping Design
Page 302

This section discusses ways of creating a 3-D document from a schematic.
When you are creating the 3-D document you must follow this placing order: place your major equipment, place
nozzles on them, create the runs, place primary parts such as valves and, lastly, place the secondary parts such
as pipes, flanges etc.
You must also set the Schematic Driven flag. Click Tools - Options, select Equipment & Systems, click the
Design Criteria tab and check the Schematic Driven box.
Piping Design
Page 303

This task shows how to place equipment and parts using a schematic drawing. The procedure below describes
placing equipment. The same method is used for placing parts.
You must follow the parts placement order described in Schematic Driven Design. You must also set the Schematic
Driven flag described in the same section.
Beginning Release 15, 3D versions of runs must be 'associated' with the corresponding schematic, if you want to do
schematic driven parts placement on a run. Runs will automatically be associated if you create them in Release 15
using a schematic. Runs that are not associated with the corresponding schematic must be associated by you - if you
want schematic driven parts placement. See Analyzing Schematic Driven Design to learn how to do this.
In order to place equipment you must be in the Equipment Arrangement workbench. To create a run and place parts
you should be in the appropriate workbench.
If the Function Driven flag in the project resource management file is set to 2, then schematic driven parts
placement will not be possible in Equipment Arrangement.
1.
Click the Place Equipment button
. Two dialog boxes display - the Place Equipment box and the Schematic
Browser box. If the Schematic Browser box does not display the schematic you want to use to place parts then
click the Open Schematic Diagram button and select the schematic you want to use to place parts.
If your resources are stored in ENOVIA then you first need to import it using procedures described in the ENOVIA
section of this manual.
Piping Design
Page 304
Click the equipment you want to place first, in this case EQ-19.
2.
NOTE: Use of the Select Mode buttons is explained in Placing Parts. Refer to that task.
If the equipment you selected has a part number defined then you do not have to do anything more than place
it.
If the Part Type was not defined (it will display in the Place Equipment box), then you need to click on the
down arrow in the Part Type field and select a part type.
If the Clear Filter button is enabled it means that values from a previous part placement exist in the Filter
Definition dialog box. (See Step 5.) Click the button if you want to clear these values.
Piping Design
Page 305
If you want to change the values of one or more properties of the part you want to filter for, then click the
Filter Definition button to display the Filter Definition dialog box. Select the property whose value you want
to change and then select the new value from the drop down box in the Value field. (The Value field will display
after you select a property.) This new value will appear in the Override value column. The values in the
Override value column will be used when searching for parts in the catalog.
The Override button brings up the Manage Override Parameters dialog box, allowing you to change attribute
values.
The Flip Part button allows you to flip parts that can be flipped, such as a reducer.
The Move/Rotate button displays the Move/Rotate dialog box, allowing you to manipulate the part.
The Pipe Selection and Pipe Segment Shortcut buttons are shortcuts that let you select part type.
The Change to Schematic Mode button lets you toggle between schematic and non-schematic mode. You will
exit the command when you click this button and need to click the Place Part command again.
3.After you define the Part Type, the Part Selection box will display and you can select a part. If both Function Type
and Part Type were defined then the Part Selection box will display when you click on any equipment in the
schematic and you can select the part.
4.Click in your 3-D document to place the equipment.
Piping Design
Page 306
Parts and equipment have "ordered placement" capability. To give an example, in the image below if you have
placed the valves 1 and 3, then valve 2 will only place between those two. You will not be able to place it to the right
of valve 3.
5.Using the procedure described above, continue to place all equipment and nozzles you want to from the
schematic.
If you assigned names to connectors when you added them (both in the 3-D and schematic application) then your
3-D nozzles will be placed at the correct connector on the equipment - the nozzle will place on the connector which
has the same name as the connector in the schematic application.
Piping Design
Page 307

This task shows how to create a run using a schematic drawing.
You must follow the parts placement order described in Schematic Driven Design. You must also set the
Schematic Driven flag described in the same section.
Beginning Release 15, 3D versions of runs must be 'associated' with the corresponding schematic, if you
want to do schematic driven parts placement on a run. Runs will automatically be associated if you
create them in Release 15 using a schematic. Runs that are not associated with the corresponding
schematic must be associated by you - if you want schematic driven parts placement. See Analyzing
Schematic Driven Design to learn how to do this. As a visual aid, runs that are associated display a
check mark in the specifications tree
. Runs that are not associated display an X
.
You can use a schematic with a branched run, or a run that is not connected to other objects.
In order to place equipment you must be in the Equipment Arrangement workbench. To create a run and
place parts you should be in the appropriate workbench.
1.
Click the Route Run button
. The Schematic Browser and Run dialog boxes display.
Piping Design
Page 308
Piping Design
Page 309
Note: Some of the buttons display after you have selected a run.
In the schematic displayed in the Schematic Browser, click on the run you want to create. The 3-D
2. viewer will show a possible route.
The function can distinguish the schematic objects (equipment and nozzles only) between which the
run existed, and select their 3-D equivalents to route between.
Piping Design
Page 310
3. If you want the application to show you possible paths between two objects, then select your
beginning and end points and click the Display Alternate Path button
field showing the number of possible paths:
actual paths.
. The first click displays a
. Subsequent clicks show the
4.
by clicking on the down arrow. This affects the
Select From/To or Logical Line
display of objects in the specifications tree, and the Route Through Hangers option (see below). If
you select Logical Line only the logical line will display in the tree. If you select From/To then the
objects routed from and to will also display.
5.
Once you have a route you want to accept, click OK or the Create the Run button
and the run
will be created. If you click the button you can select another run. If you click OK you will exit the
command.
If you named the connectors when you created them (in both the schematic and 3-D applications)
then the run will be created between connectors that have the same name as in the schematic.
6.
if you want to define a route yourself, such as through one
Click the User Defined Path button
or more hangers. To route though hangers, click the button and then select the hangers you want to
route through.
The User Defined Path button is only available when the two points
you want to route between exist in the 3D window.
Piping Design
Page 311
The Run dialog box displays other options. These are regular Routing options that are explained in
Routing a Run, and allow you to route as you would normally. The Reframe button
zoom in on an object in the 3-D viewer.
FOR HVAC DESIGN ONLY
allows you to
displays in the Type field if the 2D segment you select has the Equivalent
The Ductulator button
Diameter property defined and valuated.
The Ductulator is a tool for calculating the area of a rectangular or square duct that is equivalent to the
diameter of a given round duct. It enables you to place the correct-sized duct. Click the Ductulator
button to being up the Duct Size Computation dialog box.
The diameter of the line you clicked on is displayed in the Equivalent Diam field. Select a value for the
Inside Height property to obtain a value for Inside Width. Or select a value for Inside Width to obtain
Inside Height. You should select by clicking on the down arrow next to each field - the values displayed
are obtained from your catalog. The Exact Result field displays the exactly computed result - instead of
this figure the application will select a size that is available to you. The Aspect Ratio field displays the
aspect ratio of the two values.
Piping Design
Page 312
This task shows how to analyze a document that has been created using a schematic. This function allows you to determine that parts
placement is in accordance with the schematic drawing.
This procedure allows you to compare the 3-D document you created to the schematic from which it was created for errors and
inaccuracies. You can only analyze equipment and parts, not routes.
1. With the 3-D document open, click on Analyze - Functional Physical Integration - Analyze Functional Physical Integration Status. The
Analyze Functional Physical Integration dialog box displays, with the associated schematic drawing open. If your 3-D document and
schematic are not associated then you need to click the Open button, navigate to the schematic and select it.
Piping Design
Page 313
The buttons below the tree are used to open a document or manage the display of the tree and schematic. You can click on the down
arrow next to the field that reads Logical Line to select another element, which will then display in the tree.
Click the Selected Objects option and click on a part in the schematic. Information about the part will appear in the Functional Status
2. window. If the schematic function is associated with a 3-D part then the relevant information will display in the Related Physical
Objects window. The two can be dissociated by clicking on the Dissociate button.
3. If the schematic function you clicked is not associated with an object in the 3-D document then the Related Physical Objects window
will suggest 3-D objects to which it can be associated, if there are any. In the image below Vessel Function can be associated with two
objects in the 3-D document. If you want to associate it then select an object and click the Associate button.
You can also associate a schematic function with a 3-D object by using the Analyze function in the menu bar. With your 3-D document
open click Analyze - Functional Physical Integration - Associate Functional Physical Objects. The Associate Functional Physical Objects
window will display. Click the Open button to open the schematic you want to use, and select the function you want to associate. Make
sure From/To is selected in the drop down menu, and select Entire Model. The window will display the 3-D objects you can associate to.
Select one and click Apply and OK. NOTE: It is possible to associate one schematic run segment to more than one 3D run.
You can create an Exception for certain objects, in which case you will not be able to associate to them. These objects will also be
overlooked by the Analyze function. With your 3-D document open, click Analyze - Functional Physical Integration - Manage Exceptions.
The Exception Manager will display. Select the object for which you want to create an exception and click Create. You can use the same
procedure to remove the Exception.
4. Use the Clear List button to clear the entries in the Functional Status window. Select an entry and click Properties if you want to see its
properties.
5. Click Analyze. The Inconsistencies dialog box displays, listing any errors. In the illustration below the entries indicate that the valve is
not connected to the tank or the pump - only a run is present, there are no pipes or elbows.
Piping Design
Page 314
Piping Design
Page 315

This section discusses penetration management; which refers to the process of routing a pipe or a duct - as an
example - through a structure. If you are working with a ship, for instance, you may need to create
penetrations through bulkheads, move objects, or reroute your pipe or duct, in order to do so. The penetration
management function works within the ENOVIA environment only - and you must be in the ENOVIA Product
Structure.
You must take certain setup steps before using the function. See Penetration Management Setup to learn how
to set up the function.

Create a Cutout Sketch
Piping Design
Page 316

This task shows you how to query your document to identify penetrations and cutout solutions. Within
the overall design process, querying is done after a penetration request has been created, to determine
what these requests are. The subsequent step will be to create cutout sketches.
There are two methods for querying penetrations. You can query locally by selecting the object
(bulkhead, plate, etc.); or select the product in the specifications tree, which will generate a list of all
penetrations in the product and all sub-tier products in your document.
1.
With your document open, click on the Penetration Management button
Management dialog box opens. Select the object which is being penetrated.
2.
. The Penetration
The object you selected will appear in the Selected object to query field. The Penetration
Management dialog box lists the penetrations associated with the object you have selected and the
current status. To retrieve geometry that has not been loaded from ENOVIA, select the penetrations
you want to query, then click the Load Geometry button
updated.
. The list of penetrations will be
Piping Design
3.
Page 317
To create a cutout sketch you will select one or more penetrations from the list. This process is
explained in Creating a Cutout Sketch.
Piping Design
Page 318
Creating a Cutout Sketch

This task shows how to create a cutout sketch for a penetration.
The sketch may be created using penetration design rules, by selecting from a list of cutout shapes, or by
creating the cutout manually. When creating a cutout using design rules, the cutout shape and clearance
are defined by penetration cutout rules and the penetration shapes catalog.
1. Select the penetration from the Penetration Management dialog box. The related objects highlight in
your document, and will be used in calculating the penetration location.
2.
Click the Create Cutout Sketch button
and the Create Cutout Sketch box will display. Select
the Rules tab is you want to use the design rules to create a cutout sketch.
Piping Design
3.
Page 319
The Create Cutout Sketch dialog box displays the shape and size for the proposed sketch, as
computed by the design rules. Click OK if you accept it.
If, instead, you want to select a sketch from a catalog, then select the Standard Catalog tab and the
Catalog Browser button
The Catalog Browser displays. Select a sketch to place it.
Piping Design
4.
Page 320
5.
If you want to create a sketch then select the Manual Sketch tab. The Sketcher will open. Create
your sketch and click the Exit Workbench button. The sketch will be placed.
The Place on Side buttons allow you to place the cutout sketch on one side or the other of a
6.
structure, and is used for visibility purposes.

Click OK. You must save the document before you can take the next step.
Piping Design
Page 321

This task shows you how to add an object to a penetration.
By adding an object to a penetration you are associating the cutout sketch you created earlier to the
penetration record. Before you take this step you must save the document in ENOVIA.
1. With your document open click the Penetration Management button and query the penetrations. The
Penetration Management dialog box will open listing the active penetrations. Select the penetration
for which you want to add an object.
2.
Click the Add Object to Penetration button
displaying the Penetration ID you selected.
. The Add Objects to Penetration dialog box opens
3. Select the cutout sketch(es) in your document, or from the specifications tree, that you want to add
to the penetration and click OK. The objects are added.
4. Click OK to close the Penetration Management dialog box.
Piping Design
Page 322
Piping Design
Hole Placement
This section explains placing, defining, modifying and querying holes on piping parts.
Modifying a Hole
Page 323
Piping Design
Page 324

This task shows how to define and place a hole on a part.
When you place a hole you are creating a point from which to route so as to add a run and smaller duct,
pipe or tube. When you define the hole you are editing certain default parameters such as the diameter,
orientation and tangent direction to meet the requirements of the hole you want to create and route
from. There is no length (or depth) parameter to a hole although it appears so when placed in your
document.
When defining and placing a hole you should set the connector display options. Go to Tools - Options Equipment & Systems. Select the Display tab, scroll down to 3D Viewer Display Options and check the
Part connections and Part connectors options.
1.
With your document open, click the Place Hole button
. The Hole Parts dialog box opens
displaying choices for round or rectangular holes on either round or rectangular ducts or pipes.
2.
Select the desired hole type. The tangent-plane appears as a visual aid. Move it to the location you
have chosen for the hole and click.
Piping Design
Page 325
3.
When you click to place the hole the Manage Override Parameters dialog box opens displaying the
list of parameters that you can edit.
5.
Edit the parameters as necessary to meet the intended design. Click Apply after you edit each
parameter to update the product.
When finished editing the parameters click OK. The hole is placed. To modify the hole further, see
Modifying a Hole.
6.
When placed, the hole has a connector from which you can continue routing.
Piping Design
Page 326
Modifying a Hole
This task shows you how to modify a hole that has been placed on a part.
1.
2.
With your document open, select the hole you want to modify in the document or in the specifications tree.
Click the Edit Part Parameters button
. The Manage Override Parameters dialog box opens.
For rectangular parts, i.e. ducts, the hole is placed on the Side: Top, Bottom, Left or Right. When placing a hole on round parts such as tubes,
pipes or round ducts the hole placement surface parameter is the Orientation Angle.
Tangent Angle is used only with holes placed on round parts. Set this to change the tangent of the connector for subsequent routing. When set
to zero, the tangent angle will be the same as the orientation angle.
The Inset is the origin of the hole. Making this a positive value, say 1 inch, 'insets' the origin of the hole into the part 1 inch below the surface. A
negative value will raise the origin of the hole above the part surface. This is parameter used for both round and rectangular parts. (After
'insetting' the hole in the part you will not be able to select it in the 3D viewer. Click the Edit Part Parameters button and select the hole from the
specifications tree.)
Center Offset is used when placing a hole on a rectangular part. Set this value to adjust the side-to-side location of the hole.
For rectangular hole parts the hole size is modified using the Height and Width parameters.
3.
Make the necessary changes to the parameters and click Apply to see the effect.
4.
Click OK when finished. The hole is modified.
Piping Design
Page 327

This task shows you how to query a hole.
When you query a hole, as with other objects, you are querying its properties.
1.
Select the hole in the document or in the specifications tree. Right click to display the drop down
menu and select Properties.
2.
The Properties dialog box opens. Click the various tabs to obtain the desired information. The Object
tab includes information regarding the hole's parent Line ID.
Piping Design
Page 328
Piping Design
Working With Bendables

This section explains how to extract data and perform design checks on bendable pipes and tubes.
Extract Bending Data from Bendable Pipes and Tubes
Page 329
Piping Design
330 Tubes
Version 5 Release
Extracting Bending
Data15from Bendable PipesPage
and
This task shows you how to extract bending data from Bendable Pipes and Tubes and transfer it into a Microsoft Excel worksheet. Bending data can be fed into Bending machines to
precisely create bends in bendable tubes and pipes.
The standard macro supplied with this product displays bending data in a sample format. However, a user with some Microsoft VBScript experience can change the script supplied to
change the format.
The sample script assumes that the bendable objects are placed on a run under a distribution system or a logical line.
For more information on placing parts, see Placing a Part.
1. Using Windows Explorer, locate the intel_a\code\command subdirectory.

2. Copy the files PslTubingExtract.CATScript
and PslTubingExtractTemplate.xls to C:\temp (with read-write access). Select the two files and click the right
mouse button. Click Properties in the drop-down menu that displays. The Properties dialog box will display. Uncheck the Read-Only option.
3. In the specifications tree, select the line (piping or tubing) under which the run containing the bendable objects has been placed.
4. Click Tools - Macro - Macros. The Macro dialog box will display. Select External File from the drop down list, select PslTubingExtract.CATScript
and click Select. The Select
Page 331
Piping Design
External File dialog box will display. Select PslTubingExtract.CATScript and click Open. This will again display the Macro dialog box. Select PslTubingExtract.CATScript
and click Run. Data will be extracted from the bendable objects and displayed in an Excel worksheet, part of which is displayed below. (The application will create the table, but you
must have Excel installed!)
Piping Design
Page 332

This task shows you how to perform design checks on bendable pipes and tubes. The design checks will
tell you whether the radius of a bend, the total length of the run and the rest length are within prescribed
limits.
The rest length is the straight segment between two nodes (with bend radius).
Click the Update button

whenever you see it active (not greyed out) during this process. Also,
don't forget that you need to have the Knowledge Expert product installed for this process. In the
following example the maximum bend radius will be checked.
1.
Click Start - Infrastructure - Knowledge Expert to enter the Knowledge Expert workbench.
2.
Set up your options correctly or you will not be able to do the following steps correctly.
Click Tools - Options and select General from the left column of the window.
Click the General tab.
Select Automatic for the Update function.
Click Product in the left column of the window and scroll to the Product Structure tab.
3.
Under the Specification Tree function make sure the Relations and Automatic Expand options
are selected.
Make the run active.
4.
Click the Insert Rules button
and navigate to the KnowledgeRules directory.
Piping Design
5.
Page 333
Select Bendable_CheckMaxBendRadius.CATProduct and click Open.
6.
If the desired bend radius violates the bend radius rules, a red light will show against the relevant
CATProduct line icon in the specifications tree, in this case CATKWEBendRadiusCheck.1. If there is
no violation then a green light will show next to it. In the illustration below the red button is showing
(with the mouse pointer pointed at it).
7.
To change the maximum bend radius do the following: Each check has a parameter element beneath
it in the specifications tree - in this case it is MaxBendRadius. Double-click on the element to display
the Edit Parameter dialog box. Enter your maximum bend radius in this box.
To check for rest length and total run length select the appropriate CATProduct in the Load Report
dialog box. Make sure it has the word "check" in it.
Piping Design
Page 334
Computed Attributes
This section provides several tables, each of which lists Knowledgeware computed attributes and methods for a
specific product or discipline. Unlike the Feature Dictionary attributes, which are user customizable, you cannot
modify the value of computed attributes. Computed attributes are so called because the software computes
their values based upon other data in your document. For example: In the Compartment and Access product,
you can create a compartment consisting of 6 boundaries: 4 walls, a floor and a ceiling. There is a computed
attribute (for compartments) called TotalSurfaceArea that is calculated based on the individual surface areas of
each boundary.
Also included in these tables are methods. Methods can take input parameters and return values which enable
you to define checks and rules based on the values you provide. Please note that the computed attributes and
methods in the PlantShipLayout Knowledgeware dictionary can apply to several products and disciplines. This
dictionary contains higher-level object types that other products and disciplines can inherit.
You can access computed attributes and methods in Knowledgeware rules and checks. Computed attributes are
also accessible through the Edit - Search dialog, the Tools - Report Definition dialog, and the Insert Link
Template dialog when defining a text template (in schematic diagrams).
The organization of these computed attributes and methods matches that of the Knowledgeware dictionary.
Piping
Piping Design
Page 335
Piping
The following computed attributes and methods are in the PipingLayout Knowledgeware dictionary. Not all
methods take input parameters, and for those that do, the parameters are described in the Description column.
Whether you can see the value returned by the method depends upon how you are using it in Knowledgeware.
For example, if you write a Knowledgeware rule or check causing a component to display differently based on
the outcome of that rule or check, you won't see the calculated value; just the result of the calculated value.
You can see the value returned by a computed attribute in:
A report you generate through the Tools - Report Definition dialog.

The text displayed in your diagram, after you define a text template using the Insert Link Template
dialog.
The Edit - Properties dialog, providing the administrator configured them to display as described in
Changing the Display Order of Properties.
Object Type
Attribute/Method Name
Description
PipingBendablePipe
CumulativeLength
Total length of a "Pipe with bend" object. This

includes the computation for all bends.
PipingBendablePipe
IsBendRadiusConsistent()
Compares the pipe's bend radius (at each

segment) with the bend rule radius. The bend rule
radius is derived from the values for the pipe's
nominal size, material category and schedule.
PipingBendablePipe
Compares the bending rule mini grip length with

the length of each bendable segment. Bending
IsMinimumGripLengthConsistent() rule mini grip length is derived from the values for
the pipe's nominal size, material category and
schedule.
PipingBendablePipe
NodeBendAngle
Bend angle of a specific node of a run.
PipingBendablePipe
NodeBendRadius
Bend radius of a specific node of a run.
PipingBendablePipe
NodeNumber
Node number that is generated automatically

during route definition.
PipingBendablePipe
NodeRotationAngle
Rotation angle for a specific node on a run.
PipingBendablePipe
NodeSlopeAngle
Slope angle for a specific node on a run.
PipingBendablePipe
NodeX
Absolute X Coordinate for a specific node on a run.
PipingBendablePipe
NodeX_LocalAxis
The axis where X is defined by the first two

segments (node 1 and node 2) of a bendable. The
Y and Z axes are rotated and transformed relative
to X.
PipingBendablePipe
NodeY
Absolute Y Coordinate for a specific node on a run.
Piping Design
Page 336
PipingBendablePipe
NodeY_LocalAxis
The axis where Y is defined by the first two

X and Z axes are rotated and transformed relative
to Y.
PipingBendablePipe
NodeZ
Absolute Z Coordinate for a specific node on a run.
PipingBendablePipe
NodeZ_LocalAxis
The axis where Z is defined by the first two

X and Y axes are rotated and transformed relative
to Z.
PipingBendablePipe
SegmentLength
The length between 2 nodes on a run
PipingGasket
HexBoltCount
Total number of hex bolts
PipingGasket
HexBoltDiameter
Diameter of each hex bolts
PipingGasket
HexBoltLength
Length of each hex bolt
PipingGasket
StudBoltCount
Total number of stud bolts
PipingGasket
StudBoltDiameter
Diameter of each stud bolts
PipingGasket
StudBoltLength
Length of each stud bolt
PipingLine
FromToTable
Returns a list of the objects that are members of a

line, between two selected points. Other piping
lines that join the selected line are also included.
PipingLine
TotalDryWeight
Total dry weight of an object. This is computed by

multiplying the length with the dry weight per unit
length.
PipingLine
TotalWetWeight
Total wet weight of an object. This is computed by

multiplying the length with the Wet weight per
unit length.
PipingPart
ParentPipingLineName
Returns the name of the piping line to which the

object belongs.
PipingPart
ParentPipingLineObject
Returns a pointer to the piping line to which the

object belongs.
PipingPart
ParentPipingSpoolName
Returns the name of the spool to which the object

belongs.
PipingPartFunc
IsInPipeSpec()
Checks if the pipe specification attribute of the

input piping part function is "in spec." (That is, its
pipe specification value is derived from its piping
line.)
PipingPartFunc
IsNominalSizeConsistent()
Checks if the input object has the same nominal

size as anything connected to it.
PipingPartFunc
IsPipeSpecConsistent()
Checks if the input object has the same pipe

specification as anything connected to it.
PipingPartFunc

object belongs.
PipingPartFunc

object belongs.
Piping Design
Page 337
PipingPartFunc
PhysicalEndStyle
Returns a string describing the endstyle type:

threaded, butt-weld, plain-end, raised-face.
PipingPartFunc
PhysicalMaterialCategory
Material used to create the part: carbon steel,

stainless steel, copper, aluminum.
PipingPartFunc
PhysicalMaterialCode
Industry standard code that identifies the material

used to create the part.
PipingPartFunc
PhysicalOutsideDiameter
The outside diameter of the pipe.
PipingPartFunc
PhysicalPartCode
Industry standard code that identifies the part.
PipingPartFunc
PhysicalPartName
User-assigned name for the part.
PipingPartFunc
PhysicalRating
Industry standard code that describes how much

pressure the material can withstand.
PipingPartFunc
PhysicalSchedule
Industry standard code that describes the wall

thickness of the pipe.
PipingPartFunc
PhysicalStandard
Industry standard for the part. For example:

ASTL, Iron, PVC.
PipingPartFunc
PhysicalWallThickness
Thickness of the material used to create the part.
PipingPartFunc
PhysicalWeightDry
Dry weight of an object.
PipingPartFunc
PhysicalWeightWet
Wet weight of an object.
PipingPartFunc
ParentICLoopName
Returns the name of the instrumentation and

control loop to which the object belongs.
PipingPartFunc
ParentICLoopObject
Returns a pointer to the instrumentation and

control loop to which the object belongs.
PipingPipe
BottomElevation
Defines the bottom Z elevation of a specific duct.

You can use this parameter to label the required
elevations while drafting.
PipingPipe
IsTotalLengthConsistent()
Compares the actual pipe length with the

maximum design length, which is derived from the
values for nominal size and material category.
PipingPipe
TopElevation
Defines the top Z elevation of a specific duct. You

can use this parameter to label the required
elevations while drafting.
PipingPipeFunc
IsNominalSizeConsistent()
Returns true if the input object has the same

nominal size as anything connected to it.
PipingPipeFunc
IsPipeSpecConsistent()
Returns true if the input object has the same pipe

specification as anything is connected to it.
PipingPipeFunc

object belongs.
PipingPipeFunc

object belongs.
PipingSpool

object belongs.
PipingSpool

object belongs.
Piping Design
Page 338
PipingSpool
TotalDryWeight
Total dry weight of an object. This is computed by

multiplying the length with the dry weight per unit
length.
PipingSpool
TotalWetWeight
Total wet weight of an object. This is computed by

multiplying the length with the wet weight per unit
length.
Piping Design
Page 339
Customizing
This section describes ways in which you can customize the Piping Design workbench. The task Setting Up the
Application describes the various steps you have to take, and the order in which you have to do them, to set up
Piping Design.
(3-D) Setting Up the Application
Feature Dictionary: Creating Classes and Attributes
Cache Mode
Creating Reports
Catalogs
Line ID Catalogs
Resource Map
Defining Options
Working with ENOVIA
Piping Design
Page 340
This section describes the settings that you can access through the Tools - Options command in the
menu bar. These settings are stored in permanent setting files and will not be lost when you end your
session. Some of these settings affect the looks of the workbench. Others affect the way certain functions
behave. Still others are necessary to have access to certain functions. When they are necessary for a
function they are also identified in that specific task.
1. Click Tools - Options in the menu bar. The Options dialog box displays.
2.
Click Equipment & Systems under the Options heading in the left column. Tab pages become
available in the main window. These apply to more than one application.
These tab pages allow you to customize the following:
3.
General settings
Display settings
Design Criteria
Standards
Not all options in these pages are relevant for all applications.
Also available to you are pages listed below the heading Equipment & Systems. These are specific to
the applications mentioned.
Piping Design
Click Piping Design to customize.
Page 341
Piping Design
Page 342
ISOGen Setup
The Piping Design heading under Equipment and Systems contains a tab for setting options for generating
isometric drawings. You can:
View and select directories necessary for the process.
Select the units in which values should display.
Directory Structures
The directories needed for generating isometric drawings are noted in the fields above. The fields for Root
Directory, Project Directory and Error File are populated by the application. You will need to enter directories
for the fields Style Directory and I-Run.exe path. See Creating an Isometric Drawing - Setup Requirements for
more information.
Units
Piping Design
Page 343
Select the units in which you want values to display in the generated 2-D drawing. Click on the down arrow and
make your selection.
Piping Design
Page 344
Setting Up the Application

This application provides you with powerful tools for creating and managing system designs. Before you
can begin using it, however, you need to set it up so that it is correctly tailored to your needs. This task
describes broadly the different steps that are needed. The individual steps listed here are explained
elsewhere in this manual, and links are provided in most cases. You need to understand these
thoroughly.
Most of the steps described here will be performed by a system administrator or someone who is in a
similar position. You may be able to change the order in which these steps are laid out, but it is
recommended that you follow the order given below, at least in the beginning.
1. Create classes, subclasses and attributes in the feature dictionary.
2.
Every part you create will belong to a certain class and subclass, and will have certain attributes. For
instance, if you want to create a part, say a threaded ball valve, it will be under the subclass "ball
valve", which in turn will be under the class "valve". Some classes and subclasses are provided with
the application, but most users will want to create others of their own. In addition, each part you
create will have certain attributes, such as size. Attributes are also added in the feature dictionary.
Make changes to the project resource management (PRM) file to point to your resources (such as
line list catalogs, user dictionaries, etc.).
(It is recommended that you do not keep your resources in the default installation. That is because
when you install a service pack or new release your setup modifications may be overwritten. It is
recommended that, after you install the application, you make a copy of the subdirectory
...intel_a\startup\EquipmentandSystems (maintaining the default directory structure) and store your
resources at this location. The PRM file should point to resources at this location.)
The PRM file identifies resources to the application. Specifically, the PRM file identifies each resource
and its location (directory path). The PRM file also organizes the resources by discipline and
application, associating resources to specific applications. Therefore, you get the correct resource,
equipment catalog for instance, for the resource you are working in.
The project administrator needs to define a PRM file for the project, identifying the location of all
resources needed by the application. The file is in XML format and can be edited with any text or
XML editor.
3.
At this stage in the setup process you will not be able to enter the location and/or names of all
resources, but you need to enter all that you can. You need to return to the project resource
management file at the end of the process and enter names and locations of resources you will have
created by then.
Modify the object naming rules.
Every object that you create (except a run), or part that you place, in your design document can be
given a unique identifier. This identifier usually consists of a prefix that identifies the type of object
or part it is, followed by a unique number. When you create an object or place a part in your
document the application will generate a name as defined by the naming rules that are associated
with the object being created. A set of default rules is included with this application, but most users
will want to modify these rules to suit their own requirements. You need to do it at this step.
Piping Design
4.
Page 345
Make any changes you want to the general design rules.

This application incorporates intelligent design functions. This means that as you design, the
application ensures your designing meets certain criteria. These criteria are established by the
design rules. For instance, the compatibility design rules will match the threaded end of a pipe to the
threaded end of a part.
There are different sets of design rules. Some are specific to a standard. Others are specific to a
specifications catalog. And there are still others that apply every time you are placing a part. These
last are known as "global" or "general" design rules. Although you cannot add a new design rule to
the general design rules, you can modify existing ones; and, you can add attributes for informational
purposes to the Design Rules Catalog.
5.
Compartment and Access does not use general design rules.

Map the functional physical classes. As explained below, this means "mapping" each class to a
function.
The feature dictionary has both functional and physical classes. A functional class is a more abstract
concept - it assigns a function to an object. Functional classes are used mostly in 2-D (schematic)
designing, where designers only have to assign a function to objects they place in their designs,
without having to specify exactly which physical part goes at that location.
In 3-D design you place physical objects, with unique part numbers. But you will use a schematic to
assist in creation of 3-D design, which is why you need to link each physical class to a function. That
is what is meant by mapping the functional physical classes. As an example, the physical subclasses
butterfly valve and globe valve are mapped to the throttle valve function, whereas the subclass
diaphragm actuator is mapped to the valve operator function.
You add these mappings in a mapping table. The application has one table that is global or general
in nature. In addition, each specifications catalog has a separate mapping table. For this step you
only need to map the general mapping table.
6.
Raceway & Conduit Design, Hanger Design and Compartment and Access do not have functional
physical mapping tables.
Create your standards.
A sample standard is provided with this application but almost all users will be creating one or more
standards. The simplest explanation of a standard is that it is a collection of specifications. You use
a standard because it ensures that all the parts you place, and the manner in which you place them,
will meet certain minimum requirements or their attributes will be within a certain range. The
specifications themselves apply to many different properties, such as material or pressure ranges,
maximum bend angles, maximum or minimum length, etc.
As an example, if you define your standard by material, then the list of allowable nominal sizes for
stainless steel will be different than the sizes for carbon steel.
When you create a standard you should also create design rules specific to that standard. HVAC
Design, Hanger Design and Compartment and Access do not have standard-related design rules.
Piping Design
7.
Page 346
Build parts and create a master catalog.

You will need to build the parts you intend to use and place them in a master catalog. During actual
use, the parts available to you will depend on the standard and specifications you are using.
8.
When you modify the catalog (the most common occurrence is adding a new part) you must
synchronize the specifications catalog. This is done by resolving the queries associated with the part
type family.
Create the specifications catalog(s). A specifications catalog allows you to specify which parts can be
used for a certain project or part of a project. A specifications catalog allows you to further refine the
choices available in a parts catalog. If you are building a system for conveying hot gases under
pressure, for instance, you will only want to use pipes and parts that have a certain heat tolerance,
are made of certain materials and have a certain pressure rating. You achieve this by defining in the
specifications catalog what the properties should be for the parts you want to use. When you place
parts using the specifications catalog, you will only be able to use parts from the main catalog that
meet the criteria you have defined in that specifications catalog.
You should synchronize the specification catalog whenever you modify the master catalog (the most
common occurrence is adding a new part). This is done by resolving the queries associated with the
part type family.
When you create a specifications catalog you should also create design rules for that specifications
catalog, such as welding rules, turning rules, etc. You should also define the functional physical
mapping table for the specifications catalog. Raceway & Conduit Design, Hanger Design and
Compartment and Access do not have specifications-related design rules or functional physical
mapping tables.
Do not forget to enter the names and locations of the resources you just created in the project resource
management file.
Piping Design
Page 347

Users need to manage their resources in a way that is different from what they have been used to. Previously,
system administrators could click Tools - Options in the menu bar, navigate to a tab and field, and enter
information. Information such as directory paths for various resources without which the application cannot
function - line list catalogs, user dictionaries, catalogs, etc.
The same information is still needed, but the way of entering it is different. Administrators can no longer enter it
using the Tools - Options dialog boxes. Instead, they need to enter the information in one file, which is in XML
format. What they enter will be visible in the Options dialog boxes, but it cannot be changed there.
Piping Design
Page 348

This task shows how you can select a project for your session.
1.
From the appropriate CATIA workbench, launch the project resource management (PRM) command by
selecting Tools - Project Management - Select/Browse from the menu bar.
The Project Resource Management dialog box is displayed:
Note that when the dialog box opens the last project that you used is selected.
The Select tab lists all the XML projects setup found in the directory defined by the environment
variable CATDisciplinePath. This list begins with a CNEXT project which contains only the applications
with their resources as defined and delivered with CNEXT.
2. Select the project of your choice, here Project.
The corresponding PRM file is read and the disciplines it contains are listed.
3. Select the corresponding discipline, here Piping. Click OK to use the project and discipline you have
selected.
Piping Design
Page 349
4. The following step is used for informational purposes only - to see a list of resources for a particular
discipline. To select a project you only need to take the steps explained above.
Select the Browse tab. Once a project and a discipline have been selected, the dialog box lists all the
applications defined for the chosen discipline, the description of the active application, and the list of
resources of that application. The list of resources displayed is always that for the active application.
You should also note that the applications displayed include the applications under that particular
discipline, and any applications that are at the project level, which means above the discipline in the
PRM hierarchy. In the example below, the Piping discipline displays Piping Design and PID, which are
part of that discipline. It also displays the Equipment, Hanger Design and Penetration Management
applications, because some of their resources have been placed at the project level. The reason for
placing them at the project level is that most disciplines make use of these applications.
When the Project Resource Management dialog box first displays, as explained in Step 1, it may contain a
third tab - XML Parsing Error. This indicates that there is an XML syntax error in the file that corresponds
to the Project you have chosen.
Click the XML Parsing Error tab to display the error, as shown in the image below.
Piping Design
You will need to correct the PRM file to get rid of the error.
Errors in defining resources in the PRM file are explained in Checking a PRM File for Errors.
Page 350
Piping Design
Page 351

This task shows you how to manage project resources like catalogs and dictionaries. These changes can only be
made at system administrator level.
For a more complete list of resources and flags see List of PRM Resources and Flags.
The project resource management (PRM) file identifies resources (such as line list catalogs, user dictionaries,
etc.) to the application. Specifically, the PRM file identifies each resource and its location (directory path). The
PRM file also organizes the resources by discipline and application, associating resources to specific applications.
Therefore, you get the correct resource, equipment catalog for instance, for the resource you are working in.
It's hierarchical structure allows you to share resources, so that you do not have to place duplicate copies of the
same resource in several directories.
The PRM file is also used for certain other purposes, such as setting flags. These are explained below.
A sample file is provided with this application, and it is best to make a copy of it and edit it. The default location
is ...intel_a\startup\EquipmentAnd Systems\ProjectData and the file is named Project.xml.
The application will function even if the user does not enter information particular to his site, but nothing can be
saved. Therefore, the first task an administrator needs to do is enter information relevant to his site or project.
1.If there is more than one project at your site you will need to make a project resource management file for
each project. You can name the file anything you want to and change its location too (see below). However,
you must set the variable in the Environment Editor. You do this by opening the Environment Editor dialog box
and entering against the line CATDisciplinePath the directory in which your project resource management
files are:
If you have more than one project resource management file then by default the application will start with the
file named Project.xml, if there is such a file, or the last file used. If you wish to select another resource
management file you must open it by clicking Tools - Project Management. Go to the Select tab and select
the file and discipline you need. This dialog box shows each resource available to you, unless the value of
"Visible" (see below) against a resource or application is set to No.
2.The resource management file is organized into several sections to make it easier to manage and utilize
resources. The image below shows its hierarchical structure, with an exception, which is explained below.
"Other disciplines" refers to other disciplines like Tubing, or AEC V4 to V5 Migration Discipline, that are placed
at the same level. They are not shown in this image for reasons of space.
Piping Design
Page 352
The Project box refers to the project for which the PRM file has been created, and will frequently be identified
by the file name. In this case it is Project.xml.
When you look at the Project.xml file you will see that the resource listings begin with project resources.
Any resources you place under the heading Project Resources can be used by all applications that are included
in the file. In the sample file you will see items like zones, feature dictionary and application-generated object
names in this section. All disciplines and applications shown under project resources will be able to access the
resources identified under the heading project resources.
The next level is the discipline level. All resources placed under a discipline, such as Piping, can be used by
all the applications which are listed under it. In the example above, Piping Diagrams, Piping Design and
Equipment applications are shown under the Piping Discipline. Resources such as various catalogs and report
definitions are listed at the discipline level and can be accessed by all applications that belong to that
discipline.
The next level of resource management is the application itself. Any resource referred to at this level can only
be used by that application. Resources like catalogs, files that contain connector attributes and resolved parts
directories are listed at this level.
Equipment Arrangement and Hanger Design have been placed under several disciplines. These applications
are considered multi-discipline because their resources are used by all disciplines. When you are working in
these disciplines you may need Equipment or Hanger resources. However, in different disciplines you may not
use the same resources from Equipment Arrangement or Hanger Design and this structuring allows you to
place different different resources under each discipline. For instance, under the Piping Discipline, Equipment
Arrangement may have a different catalog (with Piping related equipment only) than under the HVAC
Discipline.
Piping Design
Page 353
Equipment and Hanger applications have also been placed at the project resource level, primarily to allow
sharing of resources, under the headings "Equipment Application Resources" and "Hanger Design Application
Resources."
To explain: If you are working in Piping Design you are in the Piping Discipline. You select the discipline by
clicking Tools - Project Management, or simply by opening an application, which will activate the correct
discipline. For this to happen your PRM file must be set up correctly.
Now, while in the piping workbench, you want to place equipment in your document, and you launch
Equipment Arrangement. When you do so you will only have access to equipment resources that are identified
in the PRM file under the piping discipline, for instance the "piping equipment catalog," containing piping
related equipment. But let us assume that in your project you have certain types of equipment that are used
by all disciplines. You can create a catalog that contains all this common equipment and identify it under
"Equipment Application Resources" at the project level (it should not be identified under discipline also). When
you do this you will have access to this catalog when you open Equipment Arrangement under any discipline.
Some applications have the entry "Visible = yes". If you set the value to No then this application cannot be
used and will not be visible in the Tools - Project Management dialog box.
3. A resource entry looks like this:
<Resource Name="PipingIDSchema" Description="Piping ID Schema Directory">

<ID Type="Path" Driver="File" Location="..\..\EquipmentAndSystems\Piping\DataDictionary"/>
</Resource>
You should not change the Resource Name, even if you replace a resource with a different one.
You can change the Description if you want to - this is a brief explanation of the resource.
The Type field refers to file type. If the Type field says Catia, it refers to a file type unique to Catia, such
as .catalog. The type Misc is used for resources which are of a type not unique to Catia and must be
opened in another way. The type Path is similar, except that in the Location field only the directory in
which the resource is located is named.
If your resources do not reside in Enovia, enter File in the Driver field. Define the Location field as
follows: As shown in the resource example above, the location entry is relative - it is relative to the entry
you made in the Environment Editor as shown in Step 1. The entry in the location field will be added to the
entry you had in the Environment Editor and it is in that location that the application will look for the
resource. Which is why it is preferable to enter absolute paths - including the drive letter - in the location
field.
If your resources are Enovia-based, enter EnoviaV5 in the Driver field. For Enovia-based resources, all
you need to enter in the Location field is the file name of the resource without the file extension. For
instance, the catalog PipingParts.catalog would be entered as PipingParts.
The Location field usually gives the location of the resource. If this is a directory path then you can
change the location, with an associated change in the PRM file. This entry is sometimes used to enter a
value for a flag or behavior, such as 0 or 1, or True and False.
Some resources have the entry "Visible = yes". If you set the value to No then this resource cannot be
used and will not be visible in the Tools - Project Management dialog box.
Some resources have the entry Access="RW" or "R". These refers to file permissions: read-write or
read.
When you change from using file-based resources to Enovia-based resources: You must go through the PRM
file and change the "Driver" and "Location" entries as noted above. This must be done for all resources that
Piping Design
Page 354
have been placed in the Enovia database.

4.The Project Resources listed in the sample Project.xml file are described in following sections, beginning
with the resources referred to under Project Resources:
ID schema resources: The "location" lists the directory where the rules for naming objects are stored.
Use the default location provided in the sample file. You need to have this for every application you use. In
addition, there is an entry for "MultiDisciplineIDSchema." This location is used for objects -such as zones that are used by all disciplines.
User dictionary resources: In the location field enter the name of the CATfct file for each application.
You do not need to enter the location. The CATfct file is used to store all the classes and attributes created
by you. The default names for CATfct files in each application are included in the sample project.xml file
and you should use these names unless you have created a different CATfct file, or changed the default
name. There is also a MultiDisciplineUserDictionary - this CATfct file can be referred to by all applications.
Zones catalog: The zones that you create need to be stored in a catalog accessible to all users, because
they are shared. The default location is CATMldZone.catalog. Even though zones are only created in
schematic applications, other applications may use them when documents are moved from schematic to
3D. Enter a different name or location if you change them.
Discrete values: Many attributes have discrete values and this directory is used to store them.
Schematic driven: This is a flag that needs to be set for schematic driven routing and parts placement. If
the value of "Location" is set to 0 then individual users can check or uncheck an option that allows
schematic driven 3D design. If the value is set to 1 then the option "schematic driven" is always selected
and users cannot uncheck it. (In Equipment Arrangement, schematic driven parts placement is not
possible if the Function Driven flag is set to 2.)
Delete Part On Run: This entry is used to control whether all parts on a run will be deleted when you
delete the run. If you enter the value of "Location" as 1 then the parts will be deleted. If you enter the
value 0 then the parts will not be deleted when you delete the run.
Graphic representations: When you create graphic representations for a part you need a file in which to
store the categories (single, double, etc.). That file is created within an application, as you will see later.
There is also a file under Project Resources because the categories must be available to all applications. If
you add a new category you must include it in this file too. Enter a new location and file name if you want
to change them.
Penetration openings catalog: The profiles of the holes you may want to make through walls and
partitions to pass pipes and ducts are noted in this catalog. If you make a new profile you must enter it
here too. Enter a new location and file name if you want to change them.
ID Sequence Number directory: The IDSequenceNumbers directory contains the last sequence number
that was generated for an object. You should specify a location for it.
Importer CATfcts: This lists the location of your CATfct files, and is used when migrating V4 models to
V5. If you change the location of the CATfct files you must enter the new location in the "Location" field.
You do not need to do anything if you continue to use the default location.
Reference Grid System: Location of the CATPart that contains the reference grid definition used by
applications. You need to modify this entry if you change the location of the CATPart or rename it.
Discipline super class: This is a text file that lists the object classes that will be visible in a class browser
when you are in the Equipment Arrangement workbench. You can have files at project, discipline and
application level. The filter will only work with a user-generated PRM file.
Computed attributes: This entry shows the location of the ComputedAttributes.txt file. The computed
attributes contained in this file will display in the Properties dialog box. You can change the location of this
file, and update the PRM file accordingly. You can also change the entries in the file.
Unique reference part number options & partially resolved reference part number options: These
two entries define how a placed part will be named. 'Unique reference' parts are those that have at least
one property (or all properties) that can have infinite values. An HVAC duct is an example. 'Partially
resolved' parts are those in which the values of all properties are defined by a design table. Valves are an
example. In this entry, if you enter 1 in the Location field then the name of the placed part will be derived
from the design table. If you enter 2 then the name will be derived from the object naming rules.
Publication Based Connections: This entry controls whether publication based connections will be used
Piping Design
Page 355
when establishing connections between elements in different work packages. When this flag is on (the
value in the Location field is 1), the system will use publication based link technology. This link technology
is intended to improve support for configuration management, revision management and concurrent
engineering. When working in an ENOVIA environment, publication based connections are used for all
cross document connections, regardless of the setting of this resource.
5.The next level, as explained above, is the Discipline level. Resources placed under the Discipline category
can be used by all the applications in that discipline.
The sample Project.xml file places the following resources at the Discipline level. Each entry names the file and
gives its default location. If you intend to use different resources, which is likely, then you must enter the new
file name and location, as appropriate. The following resources are referenced, but not all disciplines will have
all of these resources.
Specifications catalog
Insulation specifications catalog
Material specifications catalog
Standards catalog
Design rules: You need to use the default location and file name
Parts catalog name and location: contains parametric parts
Piping lines shared catalog: The file where shared piping lines are stored and its location.
Sample data directory: This is the location where the reports you run will be stored.
Report definitions directory: The formats (definitions) you create for running reports are stored in this
directory.
6.In addition to resources placed at the Project and Discipline levels, resources are also placed at the
application level and are only available to the application under which they are placed. 2-D applications
have all or most of the following resources.
Component catalog: The parts catalog.
Shared instrument lines catalog.
Annotation catalog.
Sample data directory: When you create graphic representations for a part you need a file in which to
store the categories (open, closed, etc.). If you add a new category you must include it in this file too.
Enter a new location and file name if you want to change them.
Design rules for Equipment Arrangement: This is used when assigning a part type to a 2D part.
The parts catalog for Equipment Arrangement: This is used when assigning a part type to a 2D part.
3-D applications will have most of the following resources or entries.
Graphic representations file: When you create graphic representations for a part you need a file in which to
store the categories (single, double, etc.). If you add a new category you must include it in this file too.
Enter a new location and file name if you want to change them.
Connector attributes file: This file lists the attributes that will be inherited (from the part) by a connector
when you are placing it on a part. If you want to make changes to the attributes you want a connector to
inherit you must do it in this file. Do not change the name of this file.
Resolved parts: When you place a parametric part in a document it assumes specific dimensions. Once a
part has specific dimensions it is placed in the Resolved Parts catalog. The location of the default Resolved
Parts catalog is listed here.
Design rules: You need to use the default location and file name.
Piping Design
Page 356
Parts catalog name and location: contains parametric parts

Report definitions directory: The formats (definitions) you create for running reports are stored in this
directory.
Graphic 2D Symbols Catalog: For Piping, this is the catalog in which the 2-D equivalents of 3-D endstyles
are stored. For Equipment, this catalog contains 2-D symbols for center of gravity. See Drawing Production
for more information.
Growth Factor: Some applications allow you to reserve space in some parts for future growth. You can, for
instance, reserve space in a conduit for future growth. The space saved for future growth will be equal to
the value you enter in the "Location" field. If you enter 0.2 it means that 20 percent of the space in a
conduit will be reserved for future growth and you will only be allowed to use 80 percent of the space in it.
Function Driven: This is a flag that controls parts placement in Equipment Arrangement. The value in the
Location field dictates: 1 - Function driven equipment placement is possible; 2 - Only functionless
equipment placement is possible. (Schematic driven parts placement is not possible in Equipment
Arrangement.); 3 - Both function driven and functionless equipment placement are possible (a final Tools Options setting is needed. See Functionless Parts Placement in Equipment Arrangement documentation.)
Hanger Cable Clearance: The value in the Location field is the cable clearance, in millimeters. This value
plus the diameter of the cable you are routing must be less than the tier spacing of the hanger. The cable
clearance value is assigned when a hanger is placed.
HVAC Up Direction: The value in the Location field determines the 'Up' direction of a part that is placed on
a run. There are two numerals in this field - the first dictates the up direction for a part placed on a
horizontal run, the second is for a vertical run. Thus, if the value is 00, the Up direction will the same for
both horizontal and vertical runs. The values are: 0 - follow the run's Up Direction; 1 - Up direction will
follow the X axis; 2 - follow Y axis; 3 - follow Z axis.
7.The AEC Migration Discipline refers to a product that enables you to migrate V4 models to V5. It has Piping
Design, Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams, Equipment Arrangement, Tubing Design and HVAC Design
resources under it.
Most resources have been described above and do not need further explanation. Enter the location and file
names if they are different from those in the sample Project.xml file.
In addition, under the heading AEC V4 V5 Migration there are several options you should know about. They
are explained below.
AEC V4 V5 Migration
There are several options that you need to set to True or False. The first several are about migrating data to
Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams, Piping Design, Equipment Arrangement, Tubing Design and HVAC
Design and Structures. If a V4 model has data of all these types, but you have set two of them to False, then
you will only receive V5 data relating to the applications set to True. If you want data of all types to be
migrated then you must set all the options to True.
Other options are:
Create runs without parts: If set to True a run will be migrated without the parts.
ImportPipingLine (or other type of line): If set to True a line will be created in the V5 Piping Line catalog if
it does not exist. When set to False, the migration process will stop if the line does not exist in V5.
Mapping Table: You need to enter the location and name of the migration mapping table if you change the
default name or location.
MigratedPIDNoShowSheetFormat: The sheet format (also known as title block) will not be visible if the
value of "Location" is set to False.
MigrateXXXWithMissingLines: If set to True the sheet will be migrated even if some Lines cannot be. If set
Piping Design
Page 357
to False the migration process will stop if missing lines are encountered.
MigratedXXXSheetSize: Enter the size in the Location field: Letter, Legal, A0, ISO/A1, ISO/A2, ISO/A3,
ISO/A4, ISO/A, ANSI/B, ANSI/C, ANSI/D, ANSI/E, ANSI/F, ANSI).
8.In addition to some of the resources explained above, the Structure Discipline includes the following
resources or entries:
Sections catalog: If you change the default location of the AISC_BigScale catalog then enter the location in
this entry. The location should include the directory AISC in which the catalog should reside, so that the
path reads: ......AISC\AISC_BigScale.catalog.
Structure sections path: The path of the directory in which the available sections are stored. The default
location is ...startup\components\StructuralCatalogs\ModelsResolved.
Structure Thickness List: This is the location of the thickness list sample file, which contains the list of
thicknesses that can be applied to a plate.
Structure openings catalog: Location of the openings parts catalog.
Structure materials catalog: Location of the structure materials catalog.
Structure detail design: Location of the catalog that contains user defined features.
Naming section characteristics: Location of the NLS file that lists names of sections whose names should
not be changed. This is for internal use. Do not change anything in this entry.
Structure Functional Connections Catalog: Location of the Structure Functional Connections Catalog. This
catalog contains the names of connection types between objects.
Project Bounding Box: This specifies the dimensions of your project - if you are designing a ship then it will
be set within these dimensions. You can define the unit used for measuring - the default is millimeter - and
change the default values for each direction. The values are measured from the origin (000).
9.Make sure to save your changes.
Piping Design
Page 358

This task shows how you can check a project resource management (PRM) file for certain errors.
This tool will only check required and optional resources in the PRM file for errors. Required resources are those that the
application needs, such as catalogs. Optional resources are those without which the application can still be used, and example is
the ID sequencing number. There are other resources in the PRM file that are not checked at all - these are resources that add
functionality to the application. Examples of these are flags that are set through the PRM file - these cannot be checked for
errors because there is no way of telling what the user has set them to.
See Using the PRM Command for information about syntax errors in the PRM file.
The environment variable CATDisciplinePath should be defined to point to the directory where your PRM files are stored.
1. Click Tools - Project Management - Validation in the menubar to bring up the Project Management Validation dialog box. The
image below shows part of it without any selections having been made. The active project, discipline and application will be
selected by default when the dialog box opens.
2. Select a Project, Discipline and Application as necessary. If you select ALL in the Discipline and Application fields then the
entire project resource management file will be checked (required and optional resources only).
3. Click Apply after you have made your selection. The dialog box will display the resources that have errors. The errors are
explained below.
If there are no errors then a message will state that all required - or optional - resources are okay, in the Status column.
Select a resource to see more information about the error in the Selected Resource field below.
Click on the column headings to sort by that heading.
A Y in the Required column shows if a resource is required. No entry means it is an optional resource.
Piping Design
Page 359
4. The errors are explained below. Also see the PRM task for more information.
Resource definition has incorrect type: The value of the 'Type' field in the resource's PRM entry is incorrect. The Type field
refers to file type. See the PRM task for more information.
Resource not found in the project management xml file: There is no entry for the resource in the PRM file.
Resource Data not found: The file or directory corresponding to the resource cannot be found at the location defined in
the PRM file.
Access specified for location for resource is not correct: Some entries have a field called 'Access'. This refers to the
permissions set for the file corresponding to the resource. One common error is that some files need to have access set to
RW (read-write) and not R (read only).
5. You can save the report. Click the Export button and enter a file name and location in the Save dialog box that displays. The
file must be saved in .htm format.
Piping Design
Page 360

This task shows how you can organize and change the location of resources in a project resource
management (PRM) file. This function is also sometimes referred to as "using an alias".
After an initial setup effort, this allows you to change the location of resources as shown in the PRM file
by simply changing the directory path on one line. This makes it easier to use a different set of
resources, for instance, especially if you have organized like resources into individual directories.
1.
You need to add the data at the beginning of the PRM file. In the sample PRM file the data is shown
beneath the following line:

2.
Under this line, you need to identify the organizational name (the alias name) in which you want to
group certain resources, and the directory path to it. The following line is an example. You need to
follow the format shown in it.
<Alias Name="Startup_Directory" Value="..\..\EquipmentAndSystems\" />
You can use any alias name. You can replace ..\..\EquipmentAndSystems\ with an absolute path,
in which case the application will look for the resource at that location. The following is an excerpt
from the sample PRM file, to show what the beginning of the file looks like:
<!DOCTYPE Project SYSTEM "Project.dtd">
<Project Name="Sample_Project">

<Alias Name="Startup_Directory" Value="..\..\EquipmentAndSystems\" />
<Alias Name="Components_Directory" Value="..\..\components\" />
<Alias Name="MultiDiscSample" Value="MultiDiscipline\SampleData\" />

3.


You now need to replace the value of the Location field for each resource that you want to place in
the organizational element you just created - in this case it is Startup Directory. The Location field
should read:
Location="${Startup_Directory}\Piping\DataDictionary"/>
In the example above, the application will replace the words "Startup Directory" with the value
..\..\EquipmentAndSystems\ so that the directory path of the resource is actually read as
..\..\EquipmentAndSystems\Piping\DataDictionary. Whenever you want to change the
location from the directory "EquipmentAndSystems" to another directory you only need to change it
once in the appropriate line in the Aliases section.
You need to do this for all resources you want grouped under a certain organizational element.
Piping Design
4.
Page 361
You can enter more than one alias name in the Location field for a resource. For instance, using the
example given above, you can enter the following:
"${Startup_Directory}\${MultiDiscSample}\EquipmentComputedAttributes.txt"
5.
in which case the application will look for the directories defined under the two alias names
(..\..\EquipmentAndSystems\MultiDiscipline\SampleData) followed by the file name
(EquipmentComputedAttributes.txt).
You also have the ability to add the Path field to a resource. This is a matter of choice and provides
the same functionality as using the Location field only. In the following example, both Location and
Path fields are used:
Location="EquipmentComputedAttributes.txt"
Path="${Startup_Directory}\${MultiDiscSample}"/>
6.
The application will read it as ..\..\EquipmentAndSystems\MultiDiscipline\SampleData\

EquipmentComputedAttributes.txt.
Instead of adding the alias names to a PRM file, as explained in Steps 1 & 2, you can add an
environment variable to your environment file. To use the same example given in Step 2 above, you
would add the following line in the environment file:
set Startup_Directory=..\..\EquipmentAndSystems\
You can use an absolute path also.
You then need to replace the value of the Location fields in the PRM file, as explained in Step 3
above.
The application uses the following order to determine if an alias is used:
The environment file.
The project resource management file.
The application management resource file.
Piping Design
Page 362

A list of the resources and flags used in the sample project resource management file is provided here.
The list is generally in alphabetical order. However, where a resource name is preceded by an
application name, then the application name is usually dropped. (This may not be the case when a
resource is unique to just one application.) For instance, the resource IDSchema exists for most
applications, and is listed as PipingIDSchema, EquipmentIDSchema, etc. This resource is listed only as
IDSchema below.
1. Annotation Catalog: Catalog of text templates. Text templates allow the user to quickly and easily
annotate a diagram or drawing.
Catalog: The parts catalog for 2D applications, e.g. PIDCatalog. The parts catalog for 3D applications
is generally referred to as a "parts catalog", e.g. PipingPartsCatalog. Catalog locations can be
changed, with an associated change in the PRM file.
Computed Attributes: This entry shows the location of the ComputedAttributes.txt file. The
computed attributes contained in this file will display in the Properties dialog box. You can change the
location of this file, and update the PRM file accordingly. You can also change the entries in the file.
Color Schema Directory: When you assign default colors to objects using the feature dictionary, a
file is created for each object containing that definition. These files are stored in this directory,
defined under "Location."
CompAccessPlateGenerationOptions (Compartment Access Plate Generation Options): A file
in which attribute values for Structures plates, that are generated from Compartment and Access wall
geometry, can be defined.
Connector Attributes: This file lists the attributes that will be inherited (from the part) by a
connector when you are placing it on a part. If you want to make changes to the attributes you want
a connector to inherit you must do it in this file. Do not change the name of this file.
Create XXX Run Without Parts: XXX is an application name, such as Piping. If set to True a run
will be migrated (from V4 to V5) without the parts.
Delete Part On Run: This entry is used to control whether all parts on a run will be deleted when
you delete the run. If you enter the value of "Location" as 1 then the parts will be deleted. If you
enter the value 0 then the parts will not be deleted when you delete the run.
Design Rules Catalog: Usually preceded by an application name. You need to use the default
location and file name.
Discipline Super Class: This is a text file that lists the object classes that will be visible in a class
browser when you are in the Equipment Arrangement workbench. You can have files at project,
discipline and application level. The filter will only work with a user-generated PRM file.
Discrete values: Many attributes have discrete values and this directory is used to store them.
Piping Design
Page 363
Equip Design Rules Catalog: This is used by 2D applications when assigning a part type to a 2D
part.
Equip Parts Catalog: This is used by 2D applications when assigning a part type to a 2D part.
Function Driven: This is a flag that controls parts placement in Equipment Arrangement. The value
in the Location field dictates: 1 - Function driven equipment placement is possible; 2 - Only
functionless equipment placement is possible. (Schematic driven parts placement is not possible in
Equipment Arrangement.); 3 - Both function driven and functionless equipment placement are
possible (a final Tools - Options setting is needed. See Functionless Parts Placement in Equipment
Arrangement documentation.)
Graphic 2D Symbols Catalog: For Piping, this is the catalog in which the 2-D equivalents of 3-D
endstyles are stored. For Equipment, this catalog contains 2-D symbols for center of gravity. See
Drawing Production for more information.
Graphic Representations: When you create graphic representations for a part you need a file in
which to store the categories (single, double, etc.). That file is created within an application, as you
will see later. There is also a file under Project Resources because the categories must be available to
all applications. If you add a new category you must include it in this file too. Enter a new location
and file name if you want to change them.
Growth Factor: Some applications allow you to reserve space in some parts for future growth. You
can, for instance, reserve space in a conduit for future growth. The space saved for future growth will
be equal to the value you enter in the "Location" field. If you enter 0.2 it means that 20 percent of
the space in a conduit will be reserved for future growth and you will only be allowed to use 80
percent of the space in it.
Hanger Cable Clearance: The value in the Location field is the cable clearance, in millimeters. This
value plus the diameter of the cable you are routing must be less than the tier spacing of the hanger.
The cable clearance value is assigned when a hanger is placed.
HVAC Up Direction: The value in the Location field determines the 'Up' direction of a part that is
placed on a run. There are two numerals in this field - the first dictates the up direction for a part
placed on a horizontal run, the second is for a vertical run. Thus, if the value is 00, the Up direction
will the same for both horizontal and vertical runs. The values are: 0 - follow the run's Up Direction; 1
- Up direction will follow the X axis; 2 - follow Y axis; 3 - follow Z axis.
ID Schema Resources: The "location" lists the directory where the rules for naming objects are
stored. Use the default location provided in the sample file. You need to have this for every
application you use. In addition, there is an entry for "MultiDisciplineIDSchema." This location is used
for objects -such as zones - that are used by all disciplines.
ID Sequence Number: The IDSequenceNumber directory contains the last sequence number that
was generated for an object. You should specify a location for it.
Import...: Usually followed by a type of line, such as Piping Line. Used when migrating V4 data to
V5. If set to True a line will be created in the V5 Piping Line catalog if it does not exist. When set to
False, the migration process will stop if the line does not exist in V5.
Importer CATfcts: This lists the location of your CATfct files, and is used when migrating V4 models
to V5. If you change the location of the CATfct files you must enter the new location in the "Location"
Piping Design
Page 364
field. You do not need to do anything if you continue to use the default location.
Instrument Line Attribute Filter: A file that defines the list of instrumentation related attributes
used to filter the Instrument Line ID selection list.
Instrument Lines Catalog: The file where shared instrument lines (line IDs) are stored.
Insulation Spec Catalog: Usually preceded by an application name, such as HVAC. If you intend to
use different resources, which is likely, then you must enter the new file name and location, as
appropriate.
Line ID Attribute Filter: A file that defines the list of attributes used to filter the application Line ID
selection list.
Lines Catalog: Usually preceded by an application name. The file where shared lines (line IDs) are
stored.
Material Spec Catalog: Usually preceded by an application name, such as HVAC. If you intend to
appropriate.
Migrate...: Usually followed by an application name. This option is used when migrating V4 data to
V5. Set the value of Location to True if you want data of this type to be migrated into your V5
document. Set it to False if you do not want it migrated.
Migration Mapping Table: The migration mapping table maps V4 classes and attributes to V5.
There are other mapping tables specific to applications, such as Tubing Migration Mapping Table,
which maps V4 tubing detail names to V5, and Structures Migration Mapping Table, which maps
structures names from V4 to V5.
Migrated PID No Show Sheet Format: The sheet format (also known as title block) will not be
visible if the value of "Location" is set to False.
Migrated XXX Sheet Size: XXX is an application name, such as PID. Enter the size in the Location
field - Letter, Legal, A0, ISO/A1, ISO/A2, ISO/A3, ISO/A4, ISO/A, ANSI/B, ANSI/C, ANSI/D, ANSI/E,
ANSI/F, ANSI).
Migrate XXX With Missing Lines: XXX is an application name, such as PID. If set to True the sheet
will be migrated even if some Lines cannot be. If set to False the migration process will stop if
missing lines are encountered.
Molded Conventions: Location of a file that contains the rules defining molded conventions for
structural objects.
Naming Section Characteristics: Location of the NLS file that lists names of sections whose names
should not be changed. This is for internal use. Do not change anything in this entry.
Offsheets Catalog: Usually preceded by an application name, such as PID. The catalog of offsheet
symbols to be used in a schematic diagram.
Piping Design
Page 365
Orientation Naming Convention: This is a variable that defines the ship coordinate system,
whether it is American or European. For American convention enter the following in the Location field:
CATStrOrientNamingUSAConv.
Partially resolved reference part number options & unique reference part number options:
These two entries define how a placed part will be named. 'Unique reference' parts are those that
have at least one property (or all properties) that can have infinite values. An HVAC duct is an
example. 'Partially resolved' parts are those in which the values of all properties are defined by a
design table. Valves are an example. In this entry, if you enter 1 in the Location field then the name
of the placed part will be derived from the design table. If you enter 2 then the name will be derived
from the object naming rules.
Parts Catalog: The parts catalog for 3D applications, e.g. PipingPartsCatalog or TubingPartsCatalog.
Contains parametric parts. If you intend to use different resources, which is likely, then you must
enter the new file name and location, as appropriate.
Penetration Openings Catalog: The profiles of the holes you may want to make through walls and
partitions to pass pipes and ducts are noted in this catalog. If you make a new profile you must enter
it here too. Enter a new location and file name if you want to change them.
Project Envelope: (Bounding Box) Location of a file that specifies the dimensions of your project if you are designing a ship then it will be set within these dimensions. You can define the unit used
for measuring - the default is millimeter - and change the default values for each direction. The
values are measured from the origin (000).
Project Parameters: Location of a file that defines a ship's coordinate system.
Project Reference Planes: Location of a file that contains user-defined project reference planes
used in some Structures applications.
Publication Based Connections: This entry controls whether publication based connections will be
used when establishing connections between elements in different work packages. When this flag is
on (the value in the Location field is 1), the system will use publication based link technology. This
link technology is intended to improve support for configuration management, revision management
and concurrent engineering. When working in an ENOVIA environment, publication based connections
are used for all cross document connections, regardless of the setting of this resource.
Reference Grid System: Location of the CATPart that contains the reference grid definition used by
applications. You need to modify this entry if you change the location of the CATPart or rename it.
Report Definitions: Usually preceded by an application name, such as Hanger. The formats
(definitions) you create for running reports are stored in this directory.
Resolved XXX Parts: (XXX is an application name.) When you place a parametric part in a
document it assumes specific dimensions. Once a part has specific dimensions it is placed in the
Resolved Parts catalog. The location of the default Resolved Parts catalog is listed here.
Schematic Driven: This is a flag that needs to be set for schematic driven routing and parts
placement. If the value of "Location" is set to 0 then individual users can check or uncheck an option
that allows schematic driven 3D design. If the value is set to 1 then the option "schematic driven" is
always selected and users cannot uncheck it. (In Equipment Arrangement, schematic driven parts
placement is not possible if the Function Driven flag is set to 2.)
Piping Design
Page 366
Specifications Catalog: Usually preceded by an application name, such as Piping. If you intend to
appropriate.
Standards Catalog: Usually preceded by an application name, such as Piping. If you intend to use
different resources, which is likely, then you must enter the new file name and location, as
appropriate.
Structure Detail Design Catalog: Location of the catalog that contains user defined features.
Structure Drawing Symbols Catalog: Location of the catalog that contains the 2D symbols used in
the drawing production function.
Structure Functional Connections Catalog: Location of the Structure Functional Connections
Catalog. This catalog contains the names of connection types between objects.
Structure Hull Model: The location of the CATpart that contains the hull you want to use in your
ship design. This hull feature will automatically be loaded when you create a system.
Structure Hull Feature Name: The name of the hull feature defined in the CATpart document that
is specified in the PRM resource 'Structure Hull Model'.
Structure Materials Catalog: Location of the structure materials catalog.
Structure Openings Catalog: Location of the openings parts catalog.
Structure Sections Catalog: If you change the default location of the AISC_BigScale catalog then
enter the location in this entry. The location should include the directory AISC in which the catalog
should reside, so that the path reads: ......AISC\AISC_BigScale.catalog.
Structure Sections Path: The path of the directory in which the available sections are stored. The
default location is ...startup\components\StructuralCatalogs\ModelsResolved.
Structure Thickness List: This is the location of the thickness list sample file, which contains the list
of thicknesses that can be applied to a plate.
Unique reference part number options & partially resolved reference part number options:
These two entries define how a placed part will be named. 'Unique reference' parts are those that
have at least one property (or all properties) that can have infinite values. An HVAC duct is an
example. 'Partially resolved' parts are those in which the values of all properties are defined by a
design table. Valves are an example. In this entry, if you enter 1 in the Location field then the name
of the placed part will be derived from the design table. If you enter 2 then the name will be derived
from the object naming rules.
User Dictionary: Usually preceded by an application name. In the location field enter the name of
the CATfct file for each application. You do not need to enter the location. The CATfct file is used to
store all the classes and attributes created by you. The default names for CATfct files in each
application are included in the sample project.xml file and you should use these names unless you
have created a different CATfct file, or changed the default name. There is also a
MultiDisciplineUserDictionary - this CATfct file can be referred to by all applications.
Piping Design
Page 367
Zones Catalog: The zones that you create need to be stored in a catalog accessible to all users,
because they are shared. The default location is CATMldZone.catalog. Even though zones are only
created in schematic applications, other applications may use them when documents are moved from
schematic to 3D. Enter a different name or location if you change them.
Piping Design
Page 368
Feature Dictionary: Creating Classes and

Attributes
The feature dictionary editor allows you to create, delete and manage object classes. Object classes are
classifications under which you create various objects, like components, for storing in the catalog. You may, for
instance, want to have several object classes under valve_function, one of them being check_valve_function,
and create various types of check valve functions under the class. Each of these check valve functions can have
one or more physical parts under it. The physical parts are linked to the function in a mapping table called the
Function Physical Mapping table in order to become available in the Class Browser during parts placement.
In addition to that documentation, you may want to learn how to define class names in a CATfct file.
Also refer to the Understanding Project Resource Management.
If you choose to delete the sample CATfct file provided with this application and create a new one then any
resource that uses attributes or subclasses will be unusable. You will need to create a new parts catalog, for
instance, and add new parts in it.
You will not have this problem if you use the sample CATfct file to add classes to. You will learn more about
these in this section.
Starting the Feature Dictionary Editor
Creating a New Object Class
Adding Properties to an Object Class
Defining Discrete Values for a Property
Generating a Report
Creating a New Feature Dictionary
Opening a Reference Dictionary
Comparing Feature Dictionaries
Piping Design
Page 369

This task shows you how to add new Function and Physical subclasses to the Function Physical Mapping
table.
When new object classes (subclasses) are added to the Feature Dictionary they must be "mapped" in the
FunctionalPhysicalMapping tables - the subclasses must be mapped to the physical part types. Only by
mapping the new classes will they become available in the Browser during parts placement.
In the following paragraphs the term 'NewSubclass' is used for illustrative purposes only. In actual
practice substitute the class you are adding, e.g., 'Drain_Valve' for NewSubclass.
1. While in the Piping Design workbench, click File - Open. Navigate to
..\intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\Piping\DesignRules, remove the Read Only status and open
Piping-FunctionalPhysicalMapping.CATProduct.
From Release 13 you have the capability of modifying the text table directly, instead of going through
the CATProduct. To do so, open the XXXFunctionPhysical.txt file and make your changes. Go to Step 4
if you are changing the text file.
2. Expand Relations in the tree and double click the FunctionPhysicalMapping node. The Knowledge
Advisor workbench is activated. Double click the same node again to bring up the Design Table for
FunctionPhysicalMapping.
Piping Design
Page 370
3. Click the Edit Table button. The Piping-FunctionPhysicalMapping.txt file will open in Notepad. You can
now add, delete and modify entries in the table.
4. Start on a new line at the bottom of the table and enter NewSubclassFunction in the Function Name
column.
Note: The column headings in the .txt file are Function Name and Physical Part and represent the
columns Function and Part Type, respectively, in the design table.
You must enter 'internal' function and part type names. To obtain the internal names open the feature
dictionary in the feature dictionary editor and click the Generate Report button. Specify a location for the
file. In the report, the name shown against 'Object Key' - under each function or part type - is the
internal name that you need to use.
5. Use the tab key to separate the columns. In the PhysicalPart column, enter NewSubclassPhysical. File
and Save the txt file.
6. Now when you reopen the FunctionPhysicalMapping Design Table, the new line is added.
Piping Design
Page 371

You may need to change class or attribute names in the feature dictionary sometimes - to another language, for
instance. Or, in the case of user created class names, you may want to add spaces or certain characters that
this application does not permit normally. Ways of doing this are explained below.
You will come across references to the CATfct file elsewhere in the feature dictionary documentation. Briefly, the
CATfct file is the file which stores the user-created classes that you see in each feature dictionary. The CATfct
file must be kept in the default location, though you can change its name with a corresponding change in the
project resource management file.
The basic classes - the classes that display when you create a new feature dictionary and that cannot be deleted
- are stored in a .feat file.
CHANGING USER CLASS NAMES: The CATfct file is linked to another file which is of the type CATNls. The
classes that you see in the feature dictionary are actually defined in the CATNls file. It is set up this way so that
users can customize class names without having to change the dictionary.
When you add a new subclass you cannot use certain characters or even spaces. You cannot add the class
Piping Valve - it has to be PipingValve. Only alphanumeric characters can be used, without any spaces.
If you want to override these restrictions you can create a CATNls file and enter your preferred names. The
format of a CATNls file is reproduced below. To use your own name enter the subclass name as you created it in
the first column, followed by your preferred name.
PipingValve = "Piping Valve";

PipingPipeFunc = "Pipe Function";
PipingPartFunc = "Piping Part Function";
If you create a new CATNls file you have to follow a naming convention so that the application can recognize it.
If your feature dictionary is named CATPipinguser, then the CATNls file must have the name CATPipinguserNLS
with the extension CATNls. Thus the file would be named CATPipinguserNLS.CATNls. All CATNls files must be
stored in the directory ...intel_a\resources\msgcatalog.
CHANGING BASIC CLASS NAMES: Basic class names are those that you see when you create a new feature
dictionary. These classes are stored in a .feat file, which in turn is linked to a CATNls file.
Feat files must be located in the directory ...intel_a\resources\graphic. The Piping Design file, for instance, is
named CATPiping.feat. The corresponding CATNls file is in the directory ...intel_a\resources\msgcatalog. In the
case of Piping Design the file is named CATPipingNLS.CATNls. The format of the file is as described above, and
you need to change it in a similar manner.
CHANGING ATTRIBUTE NAMES: All attribute names are contained in the file
CATPlantShipModelerAttrNLS.CATNls, which is in the directory ...intel_a\resources\msgcatalog. You cannot
create a new file for attributes - you must use the existing file. Enter a name using the conventions described
above.
Piping Design
Page 372
Extreme caution must be used in changing names because all documents linked to them will be affected. It is
recommended that the basic class names not be changed. For the same reason you should not delete attributes
and classes.
Piping Design
Comparing
Feature DictionariesPage 373
This task shows how to compare the classes and attributes in two feature dictionaries. A separate task allows you to import classes and attributes from one feature
dictionary into another.
This task allows you to compare the classes and attributes in one feature dictionary to those in a second one. There can be several uses for this function, one of them being
importing the classes and attributes that a subcontractor has added to a feature dictionary into the feature dictionary maintained by the main contractor.
Your goal is to have a mapping table that shows the classes and attributes in the feature dictionary you want to import and the classes and attributes in the feature
dictionary you are comparing against. This is done by a tool developed for the purpose. Before you run this tool you must "export" both feature dictionaries, explained
elsewhere. Exporting them converts them into XML format, which is needed to compare the two. Once you have exported them and run the comparing tool (called
comparator) you will get three files which tell you: which classes have problems (do not exist in the mapping table or the XML file of your feature dictionary), which classes
need to be added to your feature dictionary and an overall report of what the tool has performed.
Before you begin this process you must set the directory path - this tells the tool the directory path in your installation.
In Windows, open a command prompt and press Enter after typing: set AECMIGR_DIRECTORYPATH= XXX\MigrationDirectory where XXX is the directory path to
your installation.
In Unix: export AECMIGR_DIRECTORYPATH= XXX/MigrationDirectory where XXX is the directory path to your installation.
The user can check the current path by executing the comparator, or executing CATAecDictionaryComparator -h. The comparator will show the path as the first line of
output.
1.Export your own feature dictionary (Dictionary_B) and the feature dictionary you want to compare against (Dictionary_A). The process is explained in Exporting the V5 Feature Dictionaries.
1.To run the tool enter the following at a DOS prompt: CATAecDictionaryComparator -i (Dictionary_A) (Dictionary_B) -m (name of mapping table) -o (name for
output) -V5
Where:
(Dictionary_A) is the XML file which contains the classes and attributes from the feature dictionary you are comparing against. It must include the XML extension.
(Dictionary_B) is the XML file which contains classes and attributes from your feature dictionary. It must include the XML extension.
(name of mapping table) is the name of the mapping table against which you want to compare. If you do not have a mapping table create an empty workbook using
MS Excel, with a .csv extension. Enter the file name in this field - include the .csv extension. The mapping table should be in the following directory:
intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\MigrationDirectory\Dictionary\Mapping Table.
(name for output) is the name for the three output files. If you enter the name MAR, for instance, then three files will be produced: MAR.html, MAR.xml and MAR.csv.
An entry may look like this: CATAecDictionaryComparator -i Dictionary_A.xml Dictionary_B.xml -m V5toV5ObjectMapping.csv -o MAR
2.When the tool (called Comparator) has finished running

it will
directories:
374 XML and CSV files in
Version
5 produce
Releasethree
15 reports and place them in the followingPage
Piping Design
intel_a\startup\EquipmentandSystems\MigrationDirectory\Dictionary\DDL_Files and the HTML file in ...\Reports.
Open the HTML file in a Web browser to see a full report. The report begins with a table of contents that is hyperlinked to the entries. (The names in parentheses are
internal names.) The entries in the report are color coded as follows:
Green: No action was taken. The class appears in the mapping table and the XML file of V5 classes.
Blue: The class appears in the mapping table, but not in the XML file of your feature dictionary (Dictionary_B.
Red: The class was not found in the mapping table or XML file of your feature dictionary (Dictionary_B).
Orange: Mapping does not exist in the mapping table ("no mapping"), or is badly mapped.
3.Open the XML file (using a text editor like Wordpad)Version

to see a5list
of the classes
that do not exist in your feature dictionary
and can be imported.
Page 375
Release
15
Piping Design
<Class
Name="PipingPartFunc"
DisplayName="Piping Part Function"
Superclass="Component_Function"
Creator="System"
Domain="PIP"
UUID="b7acacd1_83_3a707981_10">
4.Open the CSV file using Microsoft Excel. It will look similar to the image below.
Piping Design
Page 376
In the first three columns this table displays classes in the feature dictionary you are comparing against - Dictionary_B. You should fill in the 4th, 5th and 6th columns
with whatever you want the corresponding entry to be in your feature dictionary - Dictionary_A. In column 7 you should enter the domain, or application. (PIP=Piping
Design, PID= Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams, EQT= Equipment Design, HVA=HVAC Design, etc.)
An asterisk in the Attribute column indicates that the entry is a class. If it has attributes then the lines that follow it will list the attributes under the same class name. In
the example above, Line 2 shows a class. Lines 3, 4 and 5 show that the entries are attributes of the class Piping Line and are called Size, Part Description and Design
Speed.
NOTE: Entries should refer to the internal name of the class or parent. The internal name is the name within the application and is not the one the user sees. Frequently it
is similar, though, and the class name Piping Line may have the internal name PipingLine. You can find the internal name by looking at the XML file, where it's referred to
as Name and Superclass.
5.Once you have entered the information you need to copy and paste it into the mapping table - in the current example it is V5ToV5ObjectMapping.csv.
5.If Dictionary_A has classes and attributes that do not have equivalent classes and attributes in Dictionary_B then you must repeat the steps explained in Importing the
XML Output.
You can repeat these steps as many times as you want - until you are satisfied that your mapping table shows all the classes and attributes you want from Dictionary_A
and their corresponding Dictionary_B classes and attributes.
5.Import the classes and attributes that do not exist in your feature dictionary (Dictionary_B) by using the process explained in Importing the XML Output.
Piping Design
Page 377

This task shows you how to open a design document without the associated CATfct file. This function can also be
used to view a single part. You should only view the document using this process - you should not make
modifications to it.
Examples from the Piping Design workbench are used here. The process is the same for other workbenches.
This function can be useful in various situations. A common scenario is when one user sends a document to another
user but does not send the relevant CATfct file. The document can be opened if it was created in Release 13 or
later. But if it was created in an earlier release then the sender of the document must first take certain steps so
that it can be opened without a CATfct file.
1. If the document you want to open was created using a CATfct file from Release 13 or later then all you have to
do is click File - Open. If the document was created using a CATfct file from R12 or an earlier version then the
document must first be 'cleaned' by the person who created it or who is sending it. To prepare the document, he
will have to import the CATfct file from the earlier version into his own environment, and then perform a step
that is known as 'cleaning' or upgrading the document. Those processes are explained below.
2. To import a CATfct file you should be in the version into which you want to import the file. Open the CATfct file
by clicking File - Open and navigating to the file you want (it must be the CATfct file that applies to the document
that is to be cleaned). The default location is ...intel_a\resources\graphic and the default name will be
CATXXXSample.CATfct, where XXX is the product name, such as Piping or HVAC.
Click Tools - Upgrade CATfct (in the toolbar) to import the file. You have to save the file.
3. After the current CATfct file has been upgraded with the earlier version, the document needs to be cleaned. To
clean the document, open it and click File - Desk.
4. Right click on the product (in this case test.CATProduct) and, in the drop down menu that displays, select
CATDUAV5. The CATDUA V5 dialog box displays.
Piping Design
Page 378
5. This dialog box allows you to both check the file for errors, and clean it if necessary. To check the file:
Select Long or Short message in the drop down box.
Select Open html output file.
Select Check.
Click Run.
An output file will be generated and displayed.
6. Click the file (test.CATProduct) to see the report. The error "backup startup is not declared" means the document
has not been cleaned.
7. To clean the document, select Open html output file and Clean and click Run. The document will be cleaned
and a report generated.
For more information about the process see the Infrastructure User's Guide - Using the Data Upward Assistant.
Piping Design
Page 379
Cache Mode
This section discusses ways in which you can design efficiently in cache mode, as well as tips about using it.
Piping Design
Page 380

This task discusses steps you should take to design efficiently in cache mode.
Cache mode refers to designing without loading all the technological data of objects in your document. It
is recommended because it allows quicker loading of documents and execution of commands. However,
you may need to take certain steps to design efficiently in this mode, which are discussed here. This task
also explains ways of executing certain commands while in cache mode.
1. When you are using the command Place Object from Catalog while you are in cache mode you will
not be able to place a part on a connector because connectors are not loaded. To change that part to
2.
3.
button and then click the part. That part will be converted
design mode click the Analyze Item
to design mode and connectors will be visible.
It is recommended that you redefine the location of the CATCache directory. This directory is used to
store certain design elements (cgr files) that are used when visualizing a document in cache mode. If
the file name of an element is too long then the visualization will not be correct - this is a Windows
limitation. Because the full path name is used in the file name, you should redefine the location so
that the path name is short - as short as you can make it. To redefine the path name click Tools Options - Infrastructure - Product Structure and select the Cache Management tab. Enter the new
path in the Path to the Local Cache field.
Wireframe geometry, such as the sections on trapeze hangers, are not visible in cache mode, which
also means they cannot be selected. If you want to be able to see them in cache mode then check
the option Save Lineic Elements in CGR. You can find it in Tools - Options - Infrastructure - Product
Structure and the CGR Management tab.
Piping Design
Page 381
This section discusses penetration management setup. The penetration management function works within the
ENOVIA environment only - and you must be in the ENOVIA Product Structure.
Piping Design
Page 382

This task explains the setup process for defining a penetration cutout sketch, and identifies some of the
processes involved. Penetration management uses design rules that are Knowledgeware-based. To
modify the sample rules provided with this application, or to create new design rules, you must know
how to use Knowledgeware. Read the documentation for that product to get more information. In
addition, you must incorporate certain data particular to this application when creating new rules. That is
explained below. You may also need to refer to ENOVIA-LCA documentation for ENOVIA-specific tasks.
If the Penetration Management Tools toolbar is not displayed then click View - Toolbars and select it.
Penetration management refers to the process of routing a pipe or a duct - as an example - through a
structure. If you are working with a ship, for instance, you may need to create penetrations through
bulkheads, move objects, or reroute your pipe or duct, in order to do so. The penetration management
function works within the ENOVIA environment only - you must be in the ENOVIA Product Structure.
1.
Modify the project resource management (PRM) file to reflect the location/names of your resource
files. The penetration function uses three PRM resources. The names are: PenetrationCutoutRules,
PenetrationOpeningsCatalog, and PenetrationShapesCatalog. Sample rules and catalog are
provided with this application. The location is
...intel_a\startup\components\PenetrationCatalog. See Understanding Project Resource
Management for more information about the PRM file.
2.
The outlines of openings are dependent on the shapes defined in the Penetration Shapes catalog. You
cannot define an outline in the design rules that does not have a corresponding shape in the catalog.
Shapes defined in the sample catalog are: oblong, round, rectangular, square and rectangular radius
corner. You can change the values of the parameters of the shapes in the catalog, and you can add
new shapes to it. You can remove, replace or rename the sample shapes.
Each shape is a parametric part created with the Part Design product, and is stored in the same
directory as the catalog. The oblong shape document, for instance, is OblongShape.CATPart. See Part
Design documentation for information about using that product.
3.
To add a shape you must create it with Part Design and store it in the catalog using standard catalog
building procedures. See Creating a Catalog and associated tasks in the Catalog section to learn
more about creating and modifying catalogs. These are standard parametric parts and there are no
special requirements for building them. When building new shapes you should note that the
description name you use in the catalog is the name that will display when you are creating a cutout
sketch.
Most penetration cutout designing will be done using the design rules, although you have the
capability of manually defining cutouts, as explained later in this section. The rules work with the
shapes in the catalog to determine the final size of the opening. You can add various parameters to
the rules using Knowledgeware. However, the function of the sample rules supplied with this
application is mainly to determine the shape of the outline, based on the shapes available in the
catalog; and calculate the size of the opening. The cutout size is calculated from the sizes of the
objects involved in the penetration, with the addition of required clearances.
Piping Design
4.
Page 383
Design rules can be modified, and new ones created, using Knowledgeware. However, there are
certain points you must incorporate in a design rule for it to work correctly with this function. The
following information is meant for an administrator, or whoever is creating the design rule. You can
see examples in the sample rule, which is reproduced below. A penetration cutout rule should:
Create a variable (defCutout) to hold the DefinePenetrationCutoutShape object, which will

communicate the cutout definition to the penetration management command.
Calculate the size of the cutout, using attributes of the penetrating and penetrated objects.
The NewDefinePenetrationCutoutShape function creates the temporary object that holds the
cutout definition. The penetrating object (p1) and penetrated object (p2) are specified.
The ShapeName attribute selects the parametric part that defines the shape.
The SkewTolerance attribute sets the allowed SkewTolerance for the penetration.
The SetAttributeDimension function (or another SetAttributeXXX function) specifies a parameter

name in the parametric part, and its value. This function is used repeatedly to set each
parameter of the parametric part.
A sample rule is reproduced below:
Piping Design
Creating Custom Reports

This section discusses ways in which you can customize your report generation.

Generating a Report
Page 384
Piping Design
Page 385

You use this function, together with the function described in Generating a Report, to get the values of
properties of objects in a document. This task shows you how to define the report format.
Examples from the Piping workbench are used here. Substitute the appropriate resource or directory
when working in another workbench.
Before you generate a report you need to define its format. This means deciding which properties you are
interested in. This report format is kept in a file which you can use to generate reports from other
documents.
It is recommended that you use queries, as explained below, if you will be modifying a document and
running a report on it repeatedly. If you do not use a query the report may not update after you modify a
document.
To use this function you must first make sure of a setting. Click Tools - Options - General Parameters and Measure and click on the Language tab. Under Language check Load extended
language libraries. Either check All Packages, or uncheck this option and load the packages you will
be using.
1.
Click Tools - Report - Define. The Report Definition dialog box displays.
Piping Design
2.
3.
Page 386
You can toggle between Yes and No for the Column headings Sort, GroupBy and Sum. A blank means
No. To toggle click beneath the column heading. In the example above, for the attribute Name, Sort
is No, Group By is Yes and Sum is No.
The report name field is informative. You can use the button next to it to open an existing report.
You will need to enter a report name and location when you click the Save As button. Enter a report
title - you can enter anything but you must have a title.
Check the Show Inherited Attributes box if you want to.
Piping Design
Page 387
4.
Click on the down arrow and select the dictionary related to your program. In this case the
EquipLayout package has been selected. See Using Knowledgeware Packages for more information.
5.
Select the type of object. The list of attributes you will see in Step 6 will depend on the type you
select here. However, when you generate a report you will get values for all objects in the document
that have the attributes included in your report format. If you want to limit the objects for which you
get a report you must create a query (Step 8).
6.
Select an attribute in the Attribute field and click the Add button. The attribute will be added in the
window. Add as many attributes as you want to.
7.
Select Yes or No for the column headings.
Sort: You only Sort by one of the attributes - if you select Name the report will sort in
alphabetical order.
8.
GroupBy: If you select Yes for one of the attributes, the report will group objects by that
attribute.
Sum: For dimensional attributes like length. If you select Yes the report will sum up the attribute
you selected. For 3D applications it can compute dimensions like length from the document. You
must select the correct option in the Generate a Report dialog box - you may need to select the
objects and choose the 'currently selected objects' option. For 2D applications attributes must
have values defined.
Quantity: If you select the Quantity checkbox and the Group By column heading, a Quantity field
will be added to the report. It will display a number, which shows how many parts that attribute
is common to. For instance, if you group by class name and select the quantity checkbox, the
report will show how many objects with the same class name exist in your document.
You can further refine your report by using the Edit - Search function to define a query. This will
allow you to generate a report on a narrower selection of check valve, say, of a certain size, instead
of all check valves in your document. The queries you create will be available for selection when you
click the arrow in the Query Name field above. Detailed instructions on using the Search function can
be found in the Infrastructure User Guide under Basic Tasks - Selecting Objects. Briefly, click Edit Search to bring up the Search dialog box. Select the Advanced tab, then select a workbench, type of
object and attribute you are interested in. Clicking the Add to Favorites button brings up the Create a
Favorite Query dialog box, where you can name the query and save it.
Piping Design
Page 388
Generating a Report
This task explains how to generate a report listing values of selected properties. Before you do this you need
to define the report format.
Examples from the Piping Design workbench are used here. Substitute the appropriate resource or directory
when working in another workbench.
1. Click Tools - Report - Generate. The Generate Report dialog box displays.
2. Click the Open button and select the format you want to use for your report, in this case NewReport.
3. If you had defined a query in your report format then check Objects From Predefined Query.
4. If you select one or more objects in the document then check the option Currently Selected Objects.
5. Check All Objects in Document if you want a report on all objects in your document.
6. Click OK and select a format, such as HTML, when you are prompted. The report will be generated. It shows
values for all properties defined in your report format for all objects in the document that have them. Where
an object does not have a property the report displays asterisks.
Piping Design
Page 389
7. Click Insert in Doc if you want to display these values in your document. To generate the report from a
schematic and insert it in a schematic, click on the Insert in Doc button and click anywhere in your
drawing. To generate the report from a 3-D document and insert it in a drafting document, click on the
Insert in Doc button and select the sheet or view in the specifications tree. Do not select a point in the
sheet. The XY Coord dialog box will pop up - enter the location where you want to insert the report. The
data will be placed at the location. It can be moved to another location later by click and drag.
8. Click Save As to save the report. Specify a file name and location.
If you save the file as XML type, then you can reference two stylesheets that are provided with this application
to make the file easier to read. One of the two stylesheets also allows you to sort. The stylesheets are located
in the directory ...intel_a\startup\Equipmentand Systems\ReporterData. The stylesheet
ReportTable_Sample.xsl changes the looks of the report. The stylesheet ReportTable_SampleSort.xsl
allows you to change the looks and sort. Instructions are given in the file itself. But, briefly, in order to use
the stylesheet ReportTable_Sample.xsl you need to:
Open your report with a text editor like Wordpad.
Add the following line in the header information (it should be the first or second line in the file): <?xmlstylesheet type="text/xsl" href="ReportTable_Sample.xsl"?>
Piping Design
Page 390
This task shows you how to create a new report that lists the attributes of an object. As an alternative you can use the methods described in
Generating a Report and Defining the Report Format.
The report will list the values of attributes like pressure, length, diameter, open/close position etc. These values will only be displayed if they have
been added to the object and if the attribute is included in the report.
1.Select the object for which you want to generate a report. You can select objects in the specifications tree or by using the Edit - Search command.
2.Click Tools-Macro-Macros. The Macro dialog box displays. If the file CATSchAttrValueWYSIWYG.CATScript is not displayed in the box then
select External File in the Macro In field, click Select and navigate to the directory Intel_a\code\command. Select the file named above and click
Open. The file will display in the Macro dialog box.
If you want to edit the script that creates the report, click Edit. You need to have some knowledge and experience of Visual Basic to edit scripts.
3.Select the file and click Run. The Report Generation dialog box will display, asking you to enter the name of a template. Four templates are
provided with this application for four types of reports: Part, Instrument, FromTo (for lines) and Equipment. They reside in the
Intel_a\code\command directory. Enter the full directory path, based on your setup, and change the last word to one of the four types mentioned
above. Your selection will be based on the type of object for which you are seeking to generate a report.
Piping Design
Page 391
4.Click OK. The report will appear in the form of an Excel spreadsheet. If the object has attributes associated with it, and these attributes are entered
in the report, then they will display.
5.If an attribute is not entered in the report you can add it by clicking on an empty column and entering it.
Piping Design
Page 392

This task shows you how to create a button in the toolbar to run a macro.
Macros are used to generate reports (see Generating a report). Creating a button for a macro in the
toolbar automates part of the process involved in generating a report.
1.
Click Tools-Customize. The Customize dialog box displays.
2.
Select the Commands tab and select Macros in the Categories column. All macros are displayed in
the Commands column.
Click and drag the macro to the toolbar in which you want to place it. The toolbar will display a
button that you can click to generate the report.
To customize the icon on the button you just created click on Show Properties and then on the
Icon button. Icons available to you will be displayed. Select one and click Close.
3.
4.
Piping Design
Page 393

This task shows you how to generate a bolt BOM (bill of materials) report . The bolt report provides the name, code
material, length and diameter for all bolts in your product.
The macro generates a report based on rules tables in Specification in CS150R-BoltingRules.txt and in Standards in
ASTL-EndDimension.txt.
The BoltingRules table has the following column headings:
Min_Nominal Size
Max_Nominal Size
Part Name
Part Code
Material Code
The EndDimension table has the following column headings:
EndStyle
Rating
NominalSize
EndDiameter
EndThickness
HexBoltCount
HexBoltLength
HexBoltDiameter
StudBoltCount
StudBoltLength
StudBoltDiameter
When complete, the report displays the values for all attributes defined in the column headings of the two text files
except for nominal size.
See Rules Overview and Modifying Design Rules to find out more. The design tables have to have the correct
entries for accurate reports.
The bolt report function does the following:
Looks for gaskets with a minimum of two connectors that are connected to a flange or valve (one of the
connections must be to a flange).
Attributes like EndStyle and NominalSize from the flange are used to obtain the bolt count data, using the End
Dimensions rules table.
If one of the connections is to a valve that has the parameter BoltThrough with a value of Yes, then its bolt
count is half of the count found in the table.
Piping Design
Page 394
To generate a report for the bolts in your document, first make sure the Product is active (highlighted blue).
1. Go to Tools - Macro - Macros. The Macros dialog box displays. If the file CATAttrPipingBOMReport.CATScript
does not display initially, click Select and navigate to the directory intel_a\code\command. Select the file
named above and click Open. The file displays in the Macro dialog box.
2. Click the Run button. The Report Generation dialog box opens. Enter the file name (and the path) where you
want your report created.
3. The Report Generation Complete advisory appears when your report generation is complete. The report is
created as an html file if you used the .html file extension. You can also create files as .csv and .txt files by using
those file extensions.
Piping Design
4. Now you can navigate to where your report is stored and open the file to view the report.
Page 395
Piping Design
Page 396
Catalogs
The following tasks relate to using catalogs for the purpose of placing parts in the Piping Design product.
Creating a Catalog
Modifying a Catalog
Piping Design
Page 397
Creating a Catalog
This task explains how to create a catalog. The Catalog facility is a standard facility provided with the V5 Product line. For
detailed information regarding Catalogs, please see the Infrastructure documentation - Advanced Tasks - Using Catalogs.
If you are creating a catalog of resolved parts then it is recommended that have no more than about 500 documents in each
catalog, so that performance does not suffer. In this case you may need to create several catalogs. To learn how to do this
see Creating Sub-Catalogs. Catalogs that point to parametric parts are smaller, and you can have one catalog.
This task explains creation of the main catalog. Creation of the specifications catalog and standards is explained elsewhere
(not all applications use them). Also, piping parts are used in this example. The procedure is the same for other types of parts
(tubing, equipment, etc.).
You should be in the workbench (such as Piping Design) for which you want to create a catalog.
1. Open the Catalog Editor by clicking on Start-Infrastructure-Catalog Editor. The Catalog Window opens with a basic
catalog structure in the left column. Catalogs are created analogous to books, with the book being at the top level,
chapters under it, and, if necessary, sub-chapters under them, and with pages (or parts) at the lowest level. Each family
contains references to one or more parts.
The illustration below shows the Catalog Editor. The column to the left is where your chapters and families are displayed.
The column to the right will display parts when you click on a family.
2. Rename the root chapter (Chapter.1 above) to XXX Part to reflect the application you are working in. In the case of Piping
Design, for instance, it will read Piping Part. If you do not do this you will have an extra level in the tree. To rename, right
click on it, select Chapter.1 Object - Definition. Enter the new name in the dialog box that displays.
Piping Design
Page 398
3. Select the chapter under which you want to create the catalog (in this case Piping Part). Click the Create/Modify Catalog
button
. The Create/Modify Part Catalog dialog box displays.
4. Select the application in which you want to create the catalog by clicking the down arrow in the Application field.
If you want to add specific parts to your catalog then create a parts list file with a text editor. Enter the names of the parts
you want to add, each name on a separate line. This is also the process used in modifying a catalog. The Attribute Filter field
can be left blank, it is not needed for this process. If you want to have a log of the process then enter a file name in the
Message Log field. The file will be created.
Piping Design
Page 399
5. Click the button next to the Parts Directory field and navigate to the directory where your parts are stored. The default
location is ...intel_a\startup\\EquipmentandSystems\XXX\XXXX\ComponentCatalogs\Parametric, where XXX\XXX is the
application, such as Piping\PipingDesign. If you have both a Parametric and Resolved parts directory and you want to
create catalogs for both then you need to run the command twice. Click OK to begin creating the catalog, which may take a
few minutes. A dialog box will inform you of the progress. The image below shows part of a Piping Design catalog.
Chapters and families are displayed in the first column. The second column will display parts (often called descriptions)
when you select a family. You can display different kinds of information by selecting the tabs (Reference, etc.) in the
second column. The tab Generative Data is used for specifications catalogs.
Piping Design
Page 400
The Keywords tab displays the keywords (attributes) associated to the object. In addition, each chapter may contain one or
more keywords created by the application: as of Release 14 these were three: PartType, GenericList and ReferenceStatus.
These are used by the application for specific purpose. Do not delete or modify them.
6. Save your changes.
You should become familiar with some of the terminology used with reference to catalogs. In the example above:
The first entry (catalogX.catalog) is the file name. When you save the catalog you will give it a file name which will display
here.
Piping Part is the root chapter.
Branch, Elbows, Flanges, etc., are chapters.
Tee, Elbow, Blind Flange, etc., are families.
Piping Design
Page 401
This task explains making sub-catalogs. You may need to create several catalogs if you are creating a catalog of resolved
parts.
It is recommended that you keep the size of each catalog to about 500 documents. Most users will, therefore, need to create
several catalogs if they are pointing to resolved parts. This task explains how to use sub-catalogs, and to view them all
through one master catalog. The standard catalog creation facility is used to create the sub-catalogs. In fact, Steps 1 to 4 are
exactly the same as described in the task Creating a Catalog. Creating a master catalog and linking it to the sub-catalogs
involves an additional step that is also explained here.
1.Open the Catalog Editor by clicking on Start-Infrastructure-Catalog Editor. The Catalog Window opens with a basic
catalog structure in the left column. Catalogs are created analogous to books, with the book being at the top level,
chapters under it, and, if necessary, sub-chapters under them, and with pages (or parts) at the lowest level. Each family
contains references to one or more parts.
The illustration below shows the Catalog Editor. The column to the left is where your chapters and families are displayed.
The column to the right will display parts when you click on a family.
2.Rename the root chapter (Chapter.1 above) to XXX Part to reflect the application you are working in. In the case of Piping
Design, for instance, it will read Piping Part. If you do not do this you will have an extra level in the tree. To rename, right
click on it, select Chapter.1 Object - Definition. Enter the new name in the dialog box that displays.
Piping Design
Page 402
3.Select the chapter under which you want to create the catalog (in this case Piping Part). Click the Create/Modify Catalog
button
4.Select the application in which you want to create the catalog by clicking the down arrow in the Application field.
5.There are now two ways in which you can create a sub-catalog.
If the parts you want in your sub-catalog are stored in one directory - and there are no other parts in that directory then click the button next to the Parts Directory field and navigate to the directory where your parts are stored. Click
OK and all the parts in that directory will be placed in the catalog. The application will automatically determine what the
chapter and family are and create them accordingly. If you have only reducing tees in the directory it will create the
chapter Branch, then the family Reducing Tee under it, and place all the parts in it. If you have reducing tees and blind
flanges in it, it will create the chapters Branch and Flanges, and the families Reducing Tee and Blind Flanges under
them.
If your parts are in one directory but you want to store them in separate catalogs, then you need to create a text file
for each sub-catalog that you want to make. Give the files any names you want. In each file list the names of the parts
(each must be on a separate line) that you want to place in a sub-catalog. After you select the directory in which your
parts are, click the button next to the Parts List field and navigate to the text file you created. Click OK.
The Attribute Filter field can be left blank, it is not needed for this process. If you want to have a log of the process then
create a file and enter the location in the Message Log field.
6.Make as many sub-catalogs as you need to and save each one as you make it.
7.You may now want to make a master catalog and link it to all your sub-catalogs - this makes it convenient to view all your
. Enter the
parts. Repeat Steps 1 & 2 as explained above, then select your catalog and click the Add Chapter button
chapter name in the dialog box that displays, for instance, Branch. The chapter displays beneath your catalog.
Piping Design
Page 403
8.Open the sub-catalog you want to link to in this application - Tile Vertically or Horizontally so that you can view both.
, and then select the family you want to
Select a chapter in your master catalog. Click the Add Link to Catalog button
link to in the sub-catalog. The family will display beneath the chapter in your master catalog. Add as many chapters and
families as you want to and save the master catalog. In the image below both catalogs have been opened and tiled
vertically.
Piping Design
Page 404
Modifying a Catalog
This task explains how to modify a catalog.
Modifying refers to adding a new part you have created to a catalog, or updating a catalog after changing the
attribute values of a part. In the example below a new part - belonging to a new chapter and family - will be
added to a catalog.
1. Place the part you created in the directory to which the catalog points. If you are modifying a part it will
already be in that directory.
2. Create a text file (give it any name you want), with a text editor like Wordpad, and enter the name of the new
part you want to add or the part you have modified. In this example the part to be added is: M_EXPJNT_FLRF.CATPart. Enter each part on a separate line.
3. Enter the workbench to which the catalog belongs. Click File - Open and navigate to the catalog you want to
modify. It opens in the Catalog Editor.
4.
Click the Create/Modify Catalog button
If you want to add parts only to existing chapters and families then check the Add Components to Existing
Families checkbox. In the specifications tree, select the chapter or family to which you want to add (or modify)
parts (you need to do this before you click the Create/Modify Catalog button). As an example, if you select the
chapter Fitting shown in Step 8, then new parts will only be added to the existing five families shown. New
families will not be created, even if your parts list contains them. Parts will not be added to any other chapter.
5. If the parts are stored on a file system then select File Base and follow the steps below. If they are stored in
ENOVIA then select ENOVIA Base and enter the names of all parts in a text file as explained in Step 2. You can
also load all parts in memory (if they are in the catalog), in which case they will display in the Select
Documents window, and select the parts to process. (To load into memory, first open the catalog, then click
File - Desk, all the lines display, select the lines, right-click on the selected line and select Open in the drop
down menu.)
Piping Design
Page 405
6. Select the application in which you want to modify the catalog by clicking the down arrow in the Application
field.
7. Click the button next to the Parts Directory field and navigate to the directory where your parts are stored. The
default location is ...intel_a\startup\\EquipmentandSystems\XXX\XXXX\ComponentCatalogs\Parametric, where
XXX\XXX is the application, such as Piping\PipingDesign.
8. Click the button next to the Parts List field and navigate to the text file you created, containing the names of
new and modified parts. Click OK to begin modifying the catalog, which may take a few minutes. A dialog box
will inform you of the progress.
9. The part M_EXPJNT_FL-RF is added to the catalog. The family to which it belongs did not exist in the catalog so
the family is also created. The chapter (FITTING) to which it belongs exists in the catalog so it is placed under
that chapter.
Piping Design
Page 406
This task shows you how to create a specifications catalog.An example from the Piping workbench is used here. The process for other
workbenches is the same - simply use the relevant CATfct file and terminology. For instance, in the Tubing workbench you would use
Tubing Part instead of Piping Part.
A specifications catalog allows you to specify which parts can be used for a certain project or part of a project. The parts or the main
catalog typically contains all the parts available to you. However, in many circumstances you will only want to use parts that have
certain properties - if you are building a system for conveying hot gases under pressure, for instance, you will only want to use pipes
and parts that have a certain heat tolerance, are made of certain materials and have a certain pressure rating. You achieve this by
specifying in the specifications catalog what the properties should be for the parts you want to use. The specifications catalog will not
contain copies of the parts, but when you place parts using it, you will only be able to use parts from the main catalog that meet the
criteria you have specified in that specifications catalog.
The specifications catalog provides another important function - it can generate new parts for a project without increasing the number
of parts in the main catalog. This is done because the specifications catalog can apply a value to an attribute on a part in the main
catalog. This attribute is referred to as generic attribute. This can significantly reduce the number of parts you have in your main
catalog. The way it works is like this: say you have four projects in your company that use pipe made of four different materials. You
do not have to create four main catalogs, or add four pipes to one catalog, each with a different material defined. Instead what you
can do is add one pipe to your main catalog with the attribute 'materialcode' (or any term you choose) but with no value defined for
this attribute. Now, when you create the attribute filter file (explained in Step 9 below) you list the material you want for a particular
project and put an asterisk after it. The material you have listed will be defined for the property materialcode. All you have to do is
make four specifications with the four different materials you need.
In addition to specifying the properties of parts, you also have to associate rules tables. This application incorporates intelligent design
functions. This means that as you design, the application ensures your designing meets certain criteria. These criteria are established
by the design rules. For instance, the design rules will match the threaded end of a pipe to the threaded end of a part. (You can
override the rules if you want.)
When you use the provided template to create a specifications catalog you can modify the design rules (see Modifying Design Rules)
but you cannot add new rules.
1. Click Start - Infrastructure - Catalog Editor to start the Catalog Editor.
2.
Open the CATfct file associated with your application. To do this, click the Open User Dictionary button
to display the Open
User Dictionary dialog box and navigate to the directory where your CATfct files are. The default location is
intel_a\resources\graphic. In this example the CATPipingSample.CATfct file will be opened.
You can add default rules to your specifications catalog (explained below). These rules appear in a separate chapter named "Default".
The rules in the Default chapter will apply to all specifications that you create - if they are not defined in that specification. When you
are placing a part using a particular specification, the application first determines if relevant rules are defined under that specification.
If they are defined then it will use those rules. If they are not defined then it will use the rule under the Default specification. This
saves you having to associate rules for each specification that you create.
Piping Design
Page 407
3.
Click the Add Catalog Template button
the image below only one file is open.
. The Add Catalog Template dialog box displays, listing all CATfct files that are open. In
4. Select the application (Piping), and then click on the down arrow in the Template Type field and make your selection - in this case
Material Specification. Enter a name for the specifications catalog in the Template Name field. If you are creating default rules you
must enter the name Default. Click on the Browser button next to the Part Type field and make your selection. In this case it is
Piping Part because this is a Piping specifications catalog. Click OK. The Default chapter and the default design rules display in the
specifications tree.
In applications where you can create both a material specifications catalog and insulation specifications catalog, there may be
differences in the design rules that appear in each type of catalog.
Piping Design
Page 408
5. You now need to associate the actual design rules table (which is how design rules are defined) to each of the design rules in the
specifications tree. Double click on a rule and then click the Add Component button
displays.
. The Description Definition dialog box
6. Click the Select Document button. In the File Selection box that displays navigate to the directory where the design rules tables
are. They are CATProduct type files. (From Release 13 you can link directly to the text tables that define each rule.) The default
directory is intel_a\startup\EquipmentandSystems\XXX\Specification (where XXX is your application) and then the
specification itself, say Cs150r. Open the Cs150r directory and select the text file (or table) that corresponds to the rule that you
double-clicked, in this case BranchingRules. Click Open on the File Selection box and OK on the Description Definition box. The
table will be associated with the rule and display in the Catalog Editor.
If you click on the Reference tab you will be able to see the full directory path.
7. Associate all the rules with the corresponding tables using the procedure described above.
There is a slightly different process for associating the FunctionalPhysicalMapping tables. If you associate to the CATProduct then you
need to associate with one file. If you associate with the text files then you will need to associate with one text file for each function,
following the process given above. (From Release 13 the sample catalog points to text files.) Also, in the Description Definition dialog
box you should make sure to enter the actual function name in the Name field. For instance, if you are associating the text table
XXX_FunctionPhysical-Branch.txt, the function name for it is XXXBranchFunc, where XXX is the application, such as Piping.
8. After you have associated the rules you can create one or more specifications. To do this, select the root chapter and click the Add
. Enter a name in the Chapter Definition dialog box.
Chapter button
9. You need to take a couple of preparatory steps before you begin the process of creating a specifications catalog.
All the parts you want the catalog to contain must be placed in a directory.
You must create an attribute filter file - in text or Excel format. The purpose of the file is to identify the parts that you want the
specification catalog to point to. You can place this file in any location - but you need to navigate to it in the following step. Part
of a file is shown below:
Piping Design
Page 409
1. The first line contains the properties, or keywords. You can add any property that is defined for a part.
2. You can add "Min" or "Max" before a property to identify the minimum or maximum value the catalog should point to. If a
part has a property value outside this range it will not be included.
3. If you add an asterisk (*) after a property (in the column heading) then the value of that property in the part will be
replaced by the value you enter in this file. You can also add the asterisk after a particular value. The value has to be
'character type' - not a figure. So, if you place an asterisk in the column heading then this behavior will apply to all parts. If
you place it against a particular value, then it will only apply to that particular part. The usage is explained at the beginning
of this task.
4. You can give the file any name.
10.
. The Create/Modify Catalog dialog box displays.
Select the application in which you want to create the catalog by clicking the down arrow in the Application field.
In the Parts Directory field, navigate to the directory where your parts are.
If you want to add specific parts to your catalog then create a parts list file with a text editor. Enter the names of the parts you
want to add, each name on a separate line. This is also the process used in modifying a catalog.
In the Attribute Filter field navigate to the file you created in Step 9.
If you want to have a log of the process then enter a file name and location in the Message Log field. The file will be created.
Check the Add Components only to Existing Families checkbox if you do NOT want new families to be created - parts will only
be added if a family exists in the catalog. This should not be checked if you are creating a new catalog.
11. Click OK to create the catalog. Save it when done.
Piping Design
Line ID Catalogs
This section discusses steps needed for line IDs customization.
Page 410
Piping Design
Page 411

This task explains how you can display line ID properties in the lines catalog. Taking the steps below also
displays the properties in the Select/Query Line ID dialog box.
From Release 14 onward, all properties that have values can display in the lines catalog as catalog
keywords. However, you must enable the display by taking the actions described here. If you do not do
so then only two properties, as defined in the Attribute Filter file, will display.
1. In order to enable the display of catalog keywords you need to make a change in the project resource
management (PRM) file, and enter the properties you want displayed in the Attribute Filter file. To
change the PRM file, open it with a text editor and locate the resource LineIDAttributeFilter. The
entry is at the application level: for Piping Design it is under the heading Piping Design Application. It
reads:
<Resource Name="LineIDAttributeFilter" Visible="yes"> </Resource>
The entry will be commented out - disabled - in the sample PRM file you get with this application. To
enable it remove the comment notation which is  at the end
of the entry.
Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams has a second entry at the application level InstrumentLineAttributeFilter. You should enable this also if you intend to use filtering on
instrument lines.
2. Once you have enabled it in the PRM file, you need to make appropriate entries in the Attribute Filter
file. The sample file is located in the directory
...intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\XXX\SampleData where XXX is the discipline, like Piping. The
file name is PipingLineAttributeFilter.txt. The sample file has only two entries - for Piping it is
NominalSize and PipeSpecification, for HVAC it is EquivalentDiameter and DuctSpecification and so on.
Open the file and add the properties that you want displayed in the catalog.
3. To recap, from Release 14, line properties will display in the catalog as keywords once you have:
Enabled the attribute filter resource in the PRM file.
Added properties you want displayed in the attribute filter file.
Valuated the properties.
Updated the catalog.
Piping Design
Page 412

This task explains how to modify a lines catalog. Piping resources are used below - replace with the appropriate resource or
directory in a different workbench.
You will need to modify the lines catalog if you want the catalog to display the attributes that have been added to line IDs
from Release 14 onward.
You also need to update the catalog when you create a new line, or change the value of one of the attributes.
1. Enter the workbench to which the catalog belongs. Click File - Open and navigate to the catalog you want to modify. It
opens in the Catalog Editor. The image below shows some of the lines and their attributes before updating.
2.
3. If the lines are stored on a file system then select File Base and follow the steps below. If they are stored in ENOVIA then
select ENOVIA Base and enter the names of all lines in a text file as explained in Step 4. You can also load all lines in
memory (if they are in the catalog), in which case they will display in the Select Documents window, and select the lines to
process. (To load into memory, first open the catalog, then click File - Desk, all the lines display, select the lines, right-click
on the selected line and select Open in the drop down menu.)
4. If you want to update all the lines then you do not need to take this step (unless you are using ENOVIA). This step is
necessary only if you want to update some of the lines in the directory, or if you are using the ENOVIA Base option. Create
a text file (give it any name you want), with a text editor like Wordpad, and enter the name of the new line you want to
add or the line you have modified. Enter each line ID on a separate line. For ENOVIA-based you must enter the names of
all lines you want to add or update.
5. Select the application in which you want to modify the catalog by clicking the down arrow in the Application field.
Piping Design
Page 413
6. Click the button next to the Parts Directory field and navigate to the directory where the lines are stored. The default
location is ...intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\XXX\SampleData\PipingLines where XXX\XXX is the
application, such as Piping\. The file is CATPspPipingLine.catalog.
7. If you want to modify selected lines then click the button next to the Parts List field and navigate to the text file you
created in Step 1. Click OK to begin modifying the catalog, which may take a few minutes. A dialog box will inform you of
the progress.
8. If you were updating a pre-Release 14 lines catalog then it will be updated with additional attributes. The image below
shows some of the lines in the updated catalog.
Piping Design

Ways of creating and modifying standards and design rules are discussed in this section.
Rules Overview
Page 414
Piping Design
Page 415
Rules Overview
This task provides an overview of the functions that use each design rule (as of R10). Click on the links
to get more information. Not all products use each of these rules.
See Modifying Design Rules for links to an explanation of each of the rules, and to learn more about
rules and how to modify them.
1.
Compatibility
Parts placement (catalog filtering)
Bending
Length
Values for attributes Bend Radius and Grip

Length used by two Knowledge Expert
rules. (See Using & Modifying
Knowledgeware Rules.)
Values for attribute Minimum Tangent
Length is used in the routing a run function
to establish the minimum length of a
segment.
Values for attribute Maximum Length used
by Knowledge Expert rule. (See Using &
Modifying Knowledgeware Rules.)
Used by the routing a run function.
The Outside Diameter value is used to

determine the envelope size of a run.
Dimension
The Bend Diameter value is used to

calculate the turn (bend) radius of a run
and is displayed in the Run dialog box.
The Wall Thickness values are used to
determine wall thickness when placing a
part.
Automatic Parts
Parts Placement
ISO Mapping rules - attributes, endstyles and

symbols.
Isogen function - creating a 2-D drawing from

a 3-D document.
End Dimension
Drawing Production
Generating a bolt (bill of materials) report.
Bolting
Branching
Shop Fabrication
Welding
Bolt (bill of materials) report to obtain

attribute values.
Isogen, to obtain attribute values for the 2D drawing.
Parts placement. Filter for parts in a catalog

when placing a part in a branch situation.
Outputs value which is picked up by the
Welding Rule table.
Parts placement, to determine type of weld to
be placed between parts.
Piping Design
Page 416
Used by the routing a run function.
It is used to establish the bend radius of a

run if there is a value in the BendRadius
column.
Turn
Insulation
If there is no value in the bend radius

column then the bend radius is calculated
by multiplying the value in the
DiameterFactor column by the value in the
Bend Diameter column of the Dimension
design table.
If the value in the NumberofMiterCuts
column is other than 0 then elbows are
mitered.
Parts Placement
Piping Design
Page 417
This task shows you how to modify the design rules. Also see Understanding Project Resource Management.There are links at the end of this
task explaining each design rule, and you can also consult a Design Rules Overview.
This application incorporates intelligent design functions. This means that as you design, the application ensures your designing meets certain
criteria. These criteria are established by the design rules. For instance, the design rules will match the threaded end of a pipe to the
threaded end of a part. (You can overrule the rules if you want.) The design rules in turn depend upon certain tables where the basic data is
entered. You can modify or add to these tables if you want different or additional design rules. Typically, only the system administrator, or a
designated person familiar with industry standards, will make such a change. The tables that come with the application are in the following
directories: ...\intel_a\Startup\EquipmentAndSystems\XXX\DesignRules ; Standards and Specification (XXX stands for an
application, such as Piping).
If you want to modify the general design rules, which apply to all designing, you must modify the tables in the DesignRules directory. For
design rules particular to a standard, look for tables in the Standards directory; and for design rules particular to a specifications catalog, look
for tables under the Specification directory. To explain further: General design rules apply to all designing. Design rules you place in a
particular standard apply only when you use that standard during design time. It is done this way because values may vary from standard to
standard. Design rules you place in a specifications catalog apply only when you use that specification.
In making changes you should not alter the structure beneath the EquipmentAndSystems directory.
NOTE: From Release 13 design rules catalogs can point directly to the text files that define a rule - these are the files referred to in Step 1
below. If a catalog points directly to a text file then, to modify, use the procedure in Step 1. If your catalog points to a CATProduct then you
can follow both procedures: the one in Step 1, or the one described in Steps 2 & 3.
1. You should only modify the text files - those with a .txt extension. Files with a CATProduct or catalog extension should not be modified.
To modify, open the file with a text editor like Notepad and make your changes or additions. Do not change the table structure or column
headings. Use the tab key to move between columns, and do not add leading or trailing spaces to your entries.
2. You can also modify the tables by opening them in the application. To do this drag onto the workbench the CATProduct file associated with
the table you want to modify. If you want to modify the Piping-Compatibility.text table then drag the Piping-Compatibility.CATProduct file
onto the workbench. Double click on the table in the specifications tree to bring up Knowledge Advisor.
3. Double click on the file again to display the Compatibility table. Click on the Edit table button to display the text file that you can modify.
The rules explained in Step 1 apply. Save the changes you make to the text table. You do not need to save the CATProduct file.
Piping Design
4. Click on the links below to learn how each design rule functions. Not all rules apply to each application.
Rules Overview
Compatibility Rule
Bending Rule
Length Rule
Dimension Rule
Using & Modifying Knowledgeware Rules
Automatic Parts Rule
End Dimensions Rule
Bolting Rule
Branching Rule
Shop Fabrication Rule
Turn Rule
HVAC Turn Rule
Welding Rule
Insulation Thickness
ISO Attribute Mapping Rule
ISO Endstyle Mapping Rule
ISO Symbols Mapping Rule
Page 418
Piping Design
Page 419

This task shows you how to create or modify standards. This task uses a piping standard as an example - the
procedure is the same for other types of standard too. Substitute the appropriate application or directory.
The simplest explanation of a standard is that it is a collection of specifications. How detailed these specifications are,
or which areas they apply to, can vary from standard to standard, and on users, who can modify the standards. You
use a standard because it ensures that all the parts you place, and the manner in which you place them, will meet
certain minimum requirements or be within a certain range. The specifications themselves apply to many different
properties, such as material or pressure ranges, maximum bend angles, maximum or minimum length, etc.
A standard works by providing the ability to define values for attributes that are discrete. The values of the attributes
are used during various operations in the setup or design process. Example: Anytime the user is trying to define a
value for "Nominal Size" the user will be prompted to select from a predefined list that comes from a standard.
Standards are not used for part selection.
When you decide to use a certain standard, such as ASTL, which is supplied with this application as a sample, you will
only have access to specifications that meet that standard. You set the standard in the Project Resource Management
file.
Almost all users will be creating their own standards. You can use a different directory location as long as you specify
it in the project resource management file, but it is recommended that you keep the same directory structure as the
samples. The samples are located in the ... intel_a\Startup\EquipmentAndSystems\Piping\Standards directory.
A standard basically consists of design rules and attributes. You can change the values in design rules tables, but you
cannot add new rules or remove any existing ones. In earlier releases the design rules in a standards catalog pointed
to CATProduct files, which in turn pointed to text tables. From Release 13 the design rules can point directly to the
text files, rather than to CATProduct files only. You should, therefore, tailor the procedure described below to suit your
catalog. For instance, if you do not intend to point to CATProduct files then Step 4 will not be necessary.
1. The first step in creating a new standard should be to create the specifications that the new standard will contain.
To do this, make a directory, say MAR, under the Standards directory and at the same level as the ASTL standard
supplied with this application. Enter the directory name in upper case, even though Windows will display it in
upper/lower case.
2. Copy all the files under ASTL into the new directory.
3. Edit all the text files - those of file type .txt - using a text editor like Notepad to reflect the values you want to
define for your standard. The CATProduct file types should not be modified except as noted below. You should
change the words ASTL in the file name to reflect your new standard, MAR, but do not change the rest of the file
name. The table structure and column headings must not be modified. Use the tab key to move between columns,
and do not add leading or trailing spaces to your entries.
This is also the step you follow when you need to modify the tables in an existing standard.
4. If the design rules will point to CATProduct files: Change the prefix - ASTL - in the CATProduct-type files to reflect
your new standard. Change the CATProduct file's prefix in Windows Explorer. You also need to rename the file
within the application. To do this open it in the application (see Step 12), right click on it in the specifications tree,
and change the name in the Properties dialog box that displays. You also need to change the CATProduct files so
that they point to the renamed table. And you need to change a reference in the catalog so that it points to the
renamed CATProduct file. This is explained below. But first create the standard using the Catalog Editor as
explained here.
Piping Design
Page 420
5. Click Start - Infrastructure - Catalog Editor to start the Catalog Editor. The Catalog Editor will display.
6.
Open the CATfct file associated with your application. To do this, click the Open User Dictionary button
to
display the Open User Dictionary dialog box and navigate to the directory where your CATfct files are. The default
location is intel_a\resources\graphic. In this example the CATPipingSample.CATfct file will be opened. (CATfct
files contain classes and attributes.)
7.
Click the Add Catalog Template button
files that are open.
. The Add Catalog Template dialog box displays, listing all CATfct
Piping Design
Page 421
8. Select the application and click on the down arrow in the Template Type field to make your selection, in this case
Standard. Enter a name for the standard. Click on the Browser button next to the Part Type field to display the
Class Browser. Select the line Piping Part and click OK. Click OK on the Add Catalog Template dialog box, which
should add the standard MAR to the specifications tree with the attributes displayed, as shown in the image below.
9. You now need to make sure the attributes that display in the application point to the text files (tables) you just
to display
created. Double click on an attribute, say MaterialCode, and click on the Add Component button
the Description Definition dialog box.
10. Click the Select Document button. In the File Selection box that displays navigate to the MAR directory you
created in Step 1 and select the file that corresponds to the attribute that you double-clicked, in this case
MaterialCode. Click Open on the File Selection box and OK on the Description Definition box. The table will be
associated with the attribute. Do this for all the attributes as well as the design rules that appear at the end of the
list.
You can link the design rules to corresponding text files using the method described above. If you do so you do
not need to follow the steps given below. If you want to link design rules to a CATProduct then take the following
steps.
11. You now need to point the CATProduct files in the MAR directory to the corresponding text file (table). And you
need to change references in the new standard so that they point to the renamed CATProduct files.
To make these changes you need to change a setting in your Options. Click Tools - Options - Infrastructure, select
Product Structure and click the Tree Customization tab. Under Specification Tree Order click on Relations so that
Yes appears in the Activated column.
12. To point the .CATProduct files to the renamed text files, begin by opening the .CATProduct file in the application one way is to drag the file from Windows Explorer onto the workbench. It will display in the specifications tree. In
this example the file BendingRules will be changed - in the illustration below it has been opened.
Piping Design
Page 422
13. Double click on the entry Bending Rules - make sure to click on the entry beneath Relations as shown above - to
enter the Knowledge Advisor workbench.
14. Right click on BendingRules to bring up a menu and select Properties. The Properties dialog box will display.
Piping Design
Page 423
15. Click on the button next to the File Path field, navigate to the renamed text file and select it. Click Open. Save
your change.
You need to do this for each .CATProduct file.
16. You now need to change the references in your new standard (MAR) so that they point to the CATProduct files. To
do this open MAR.catalog in the application by dragging it onto the workbench from Windows Explorer. The
catalog can be found in the Standards directory.
17. The catalog will display in the Catalog Editor. Double click on the .CATProduct file - in this case BendingRules - to
to display the Description Definition dialog box.
make it active and then click the Add Component button
18. Click the Select Document button. In the File Selection box that displays navigate to the MAR directory you
created in Step 1 and select the CATProduct file that corresponds to the CATProduct that you double-clicked, in
this case BendingRules. Click Open on the File Selection box and OK on the Description Definition box. The file will
be associated with the CATProduct. Do this for all the CATProducts.
19. Click File - Save to save the changes once you are done.
The General Design Catalog
The General Design Catalog is used to store attributes whose values are the same in all standards. For instance,
the pipe specification CS150R has the same value in all standards, because it is referring to a carbon steel pipe
with a 150-pound rating. Another example: the attribute "okay to cut" has only two possible values, Yes or No, in
all standards. The General Design Catalog was created so that you do not have to enter such attributes in all the
standards you create, but instead enter them one time in this directory. The application will first check the
standard to see if the attribute is located there and, if it does not find it, will refer to the General Design Catalog.
If you create a new standard, you need to incorporate it in the design rules or the new standard will be ignored by the
rules. To incorporate it you must add the new standard in the appropriate column in the rules tables.
Piping Design
Page 424

This task shows you how to add an attribute to a standard.
You can only add an attribute that has discrete values.
1. Create a text file - with Notepad or another text editor - and enter values for the new attribute. Refer
to one of the existing text files to see the format. Save the file in the directory where the other files
are located. Give the file the same name as the attribute and follow the naming convention as evident
in the existing files. The default location of the ASTL standard, which is provided with this application
as a sample, is ...intel_a\Startup\EquipmentandSystems\Piping\Standards
2. Now you need to add the attribute under the standard (which is ASTL in this example) and link it to
the file you just saved. To do this open the PipingStandards.catalog in the application. (Use File-Open
or drag it on to the workbench from Windows Explorer.)
Piping Design
Page 425
3. Double click on the standard to which you want to add an attribute - in this case ASTL - to make it
active and click on the Add Family button
. The Component Family Definition dialog box displays.
4. Enter a name for the new attribute. Under Type select Standard. Click OK. The new attribute will
display in the list of attributes under ASTL.
5.
Double click NewAttribute to make it active and click the Add Component button
Definition dialog box displays.
. The Description
Piping Design
Page 426
6. Click the Select Document button and, in the File Selection dialog box that displays, navigate to the file
you created in Step 1. Select the file and click Open.
The values in the text file are now linked to the attribute you just created.
7. You can also use the procedure described above to create an attribute in the "default" directory.
Piping Design
Page 427

This task shows you how to modify or define the object naming rules. See also Understanding Project
Resource Management. Also see Add Computed Attribute to Object Name if you want to add a computed
attribute.
Examples from the Piping Design product are used in this task. The procedure is the same for all products
that have this function - substitute the appropriate file or object when using another product.
Every object that you create (except a run), or part that you place, in your design document can be given
a unique identifier. This identifier usually consists of a prefix that identifies the type of object or part it is,
followed by a unique number. This enables users, for instance, to maintain a history of each part - when
it was serviced, or repaired or replaced - and schedule servicing and replacement dates. When you create
an object or place a part in your document the application will suggest a name for it - the default name.
(In many cases you have the option of rejecting this name and entering a different name, or renaming
it.) The default name is based on certain rules. A set of default rules is included with this application, but
most users will want to modify these rules to suit their own requirements. You can modify or define the
naming rules in the following way:
1. Open the Feature Dictionary Editor. From the main menu, click Start - Infrastructure - Feature
Dictionary Editor.
2.
Click the Open User Dictionary button
. The Open User Dictionary dialog box displays.
Piping Design
Page 428
3. Navigate to the directory where your .CATfct files are stored. The default is ..
intel_a\resources\graphic. The CATfct files contain a list of all the object classes. Select and open
the file associated with the product you are working with, i.e. Piping or Tubing, etc. All the classes in
the file are displayed in the Feature Dictionary.
Piping Design
Page 429
4.
Select a class in the specifications tree and click the Define ID Schema button
ID Schema dialog box will display.
. The Define
If the class does not have object naming rules defined then the Inherited From field will indicate the
parent from which they are derived. If the class has rules defined then the same class name will
display, as in the image above. If no rules exist for this class then they will be created when you take
the following steps.
5. You have two options In the ID usage field, Instance and Reference, and you usually have to define
naming rules for each object using both options. The naming rules you define under the Instance
option are used by the application when you are placing a part in a document.
The naming rules you define using the Reference option are used by the application when you build a
component for placing in a catalog. Most users will define naming rules for an object using both
options. Depending on your needs, you can choose to simplify the procedure by defining rules for the
parent function, which is Piping Part Function in the example above, and these rules will be inherited
by all the objects under it.
Select Yes or No for Sequence number. Yes or No cannot be selected if you have Reference as the
ID usage. Minimum length refers to the number of digits in the numbering scheme. For instance, 3
means the number will show up as 001.
Piping Design
Page 430
6.
Click the Define/modify ID schema button
display.
. The Define/modify ID schema dialog box will
7. In this dialog box you can define what you want to appear in the name of an object, in this case the
object being Piping Part Function. The dialog box has a window in the lower half which displays the
current naming scheme. You can delete one or more of the fields using the Delete field/Delete all
fields buttons
Click Add after entering or selecting a value in a field. You can choose to have more than one
attribute value displayed in a name, for instance when you want to add a Separator at more than one
place. Click Add after selecting each one.
You can select the order in which the values will appear in a name by using the Up or Down arrows or
the buttons in the Insert mode field.
If you want to use computed attributes in the object name then see Add Computed Attribute to
Object Name.
8. Select one of the attributes from the drop down list in the Attribute name field
. If you select Nominal size, for instance, the object name will display the
nominal size of the object. These attributes are for the Piping Part class only - other classes will have
different attributes displayed. You can display more than one attribute in the name.
Piping Design
Page 431
9. Enter any value you want displayed in the Constant field. If you enter PP (for Piping Part), all piping
part names will display this value. You can add a constant to a name anywhere you require it. For
instance, you may begin a name with PP, and end it with WR for a project name.
10. The Program field is used to execute a program that will then add a value to the name. You can
create your own programs, but some sample programs are provided with the application and are
listed below. Enter a program name in this field if you want it to be executed. For instance, if you
enter CATPspEncSchedule in the field, then the short value of the Encoded Schedule attribute will
be added to the name (the short value of Extra Strong is XS.). These programs are Standards-based
and will execute based on the standard you have defined in your Options. The default standard is
ASTL.
The following list shows the programs provided with the application as a sample, and the attributes
they refer to:
CATPspEncRating - Encoded Rating
CATPspEncRating2 - Encoded Rating2
CATPspEncNominalSize - Encoded Nominal Size
CATPspEncNominalSize2 - Encoded Nominal Size2
CATPspEncSchedule - Encoded Schedule
CATPspEncMaterialCategory - Encoded MaterialCategory
CATPspEncMaterialCode - Encoded MaterialCode
11. The Domain program field is used to execute a program that will add the name of the domain to
which the object belongs. Domain in this case refers to an object to which the object to be named is
connected. For instance, when naming a nozzle it is preferable to add the name of the equipment to
which it is connected. One sample domain program is provided with the application, and provides this
function: CATPspConnectedEquip.
12. The Separator field is used to add separators, such as a hyphen or semi colon, after the domain
field.
13. Use the buttons in the Insert mode field to organize the name. Append field to list will move a
field to the end of the name. The other buttons are used when you are adding a field, to position it in
the name.
Piping Design
14.
Page 432
FOR HVAC DUCTS

If you want to place 'heavy' HVAC ducts then you need to change the file that defines the object
naming rules. (You do not need to make any change if you are placing 'light' parts.) If you are
placing heavy parts then navigate to the directory
...intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\HVAC\DataDictionary. The default files are named
sch-CATHvaHVACXXXXDuct1.xml where XXXX represents a shape like FlatOval. Rename this file
so that the application does not recognize it - you can add a SAVE at the end, for instance. You need
to use the corresponding file that has the _HV at the end of the file name. This file is in the same
directory, and normally directly beneath the file for light parts. To use this file simply remove the
_HV. As an example:
Rename sch-CATHvaHVACXXXXDuct1.xml to sch-CATHvaHVACFlatOvalDuct1_SAVE.xml
Remove the _HV from the file sch-CATHvaHVACFlatOvalDuct1_HV.xml
Piping Design
Page 433

This task explains how you can display computed attribute values in an object name.
Computed attributes are so called because their values are computed by the application from other data.
You can add them to object names, but the process is different from that explained in Modifying Object
Naming Rules. See the section Computed Attributes if you want to learn more about the attributes.
1. To add computed attributes to an object name you need to make or change entries in an ID Schema
file which is located in the directory defined for the XXXIDSchema resource in your project resource
management file. The default in the sample file is ...EquipmentAndSystems\XXX\DataDictionary
where XXX is the discipline, such as Piping or HVAC. An IDSchema file for each class will exist in this
directory if object naming rules have been defined for it. As an example, the piping class Reducing
Bushing has a file named sch-CATPipReducingBushing.xml. If there is the numeral 1 after the file
name then it is for a reference part. If there is no numeral then it is for an instance part.
2. You can use a computed attribute that is defined for a particular class or its parent, and that has been
exposed in Knowledgeware. To learn more about exposed attributes see Using Knowledgeware
Packages. You should also see Knowledgeware documentation to learn more about Knowledgeware.
3. The contents of the sample ID Schema file look like this:
<?xml version = "1.0" encoding="ASCII"?>

<!DOCTYPE Doct SYSTEM "schemaid.dtd">
<Doct>
<schema_CST value="RED"/>
<schema_CST value="-"/>
<schema_SeqNbr seq_IEND="6" seq_NMIN="3" seq_ISTART="1"/></Doct>
4. You need to add a line after the word <Doct> to define the computed attribute you want displayed in
the object name. To add the attribute insert the following line:
<schema_ATT value = "XXXXX"/>
where XXXXX is the computed attribute such as ParentPipingLineName.
Save the file (do not change the file type).
Piping Design
Page 434

This task shows you how to add an attribute to the general design rules.
In addition to design rules that are specific to a standard or to a specification catalog, this application has
design rules that apply every time you are placing a part. Although you cannot add a new design rule,
you can modify existing ones; and, you can add attributes for informational purposes to the Design Rules
Catalog.
For instance, you can create an attribute called VendorName and link it to a list of approved vendor
names. You can now assign a vendor name to an object at parts creation time; information that will
always be available to the user.
When you want to add an attribute that doesn't change from one standard to the next you add it here
under Discrete Values.
You can only add an attribute that has discrete values.
1. Create a text file - with Notepad or another text editor - and enter values for the new attribute. Refer
to one of the existing text files to see the format. Save the file in the directory where the other files
are located. Give the file the same name as the attribute and follow the naming convention as evident
in the existing files. The default location of the DesignRules catalog is
...intel_a\Startup\EquipmentAndSystems\Piping\DesignRules
2. Now you need to add the attribute under the general design rules and link it to the file you just saved.
To do this open the ...DesignRules catalog in the application. (Use File-Open or drag it on to the
workbench from Windows Explorer.)
Piping Design
Page 435
3. An attribute can only be added under the DiscreteValues column. Double click on it to make it active
and click on the Add Family button
. The Component Family Definition dialog box displays.
Piping Design
Page 436
4. Enter a name for the new attribute. Under Type select Standard. Click OK. The new attribute will
display in the list of attributes under DiscreteValues.
5. Double click new attribute, in this case VendorName, to make it active and click the Add Component
button
. The Description Definition dialog box displays.
6. Click the Select Document button and, in the File Selection dialog box that displays, navigate to the file
you created in Step 1. Select the file and click Open.
The values in the text file are now linked to the attribute you just created. Save your changes.
Piping Design
Page 437

This task explains how you can add a new nominal size to a part.
Part sizes available to you during part placement are governed by text tables contained within standards.
You need to modify these tables as explained below. You also need to modify the part design table.
1. Open the file nominalsize.txt for the standard to which you want to add the size. The location of the
sample file is ...intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\XXX\Standards\YYY where XXX is the
application or discipline, such as Piping, and YYY is the standard, such as ASTL.
2. Add the nominal size to the file. Note that the size should be added in order, and should not be
inserted just anywhere in the file. Also, follow the convention as you see it in the file. The two columns
have the same value in different formats (e.g. .125 and 1/8in). The reason is that the first format is
used where shorter text is needed, such as in file naming.
3. Add the size to the design table for the part. The design table is usually located in the same directory
as the part. The location of the sample parts is
...intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\XXX\YYY\Componentcatalogs\Parametric where
XXX and YYY are the discipline and application. Follow the convention as you see it in the file.
4. Modify your parts catalog and specifications catalog so that the new part size is available to you. The
process of modifying the parts catalog is explained in Modifying a Catalog. Specifications catalogs are
explained in Creating a Specifications Catalog. Steps 9 and 10 are relevant for modifying.
Depending on the part size that you are adding, and your specific setup data, the tables associated with
the following may also need to be modified:
Function physical mapping
Turn Rule
Bending Rule
Length Rule
Dimensions rules (pipe dimension, tube dimension, etc.)
Bolting Rule
Branching Rule
Shop Fabrication Rule
End Dimensions Rule
Resource
Version 5 Release
15
Piping Design
Map
Page 438
The chart below is a quick reference of some of the resources included with this application (as of R14). Ways in which these resources are used are described elsewhere in this user guide. Most columns are self-explanatory. Some that may
need additional information are explained below.
Controlled by PRM: Whether the resource has an entry in the project resource management file. Usually this is the location of the resource.
NLS: National Language Support (NLS) files contain resource names that can be defined by the user. If you change to another language, for instance, you will need to change the names in the NLS files. In the column below, 'Yes" means
that the files have terminology (such as the values of attributes) that needs to be changed if you change NLS files. NLS files are located in the directory: intel_a\resources\msgcatalog.
Units: These files contain units that were defined in the metric system by default. If you choose to go to another system you must modify these files.
Administrator: Files that have "No" against them cannot be modified. Others can be modified as noted.
Depending on the file type, files can be modified using Wordpad (text or XML files), Excel, or within the relevant application itself (CATProduct, catalog or CATDrawing files).
File name
File Type
Controlled by PRM
Object ID Schema definition (startup\\EquipmentAndSystems\\Piping\\DataDictionary)

sch-CATPipPipingPart
xml
Directory Path
sch-CATPipPipingPartFunction
xml
Directory Path
NLS
Units
Administrator
Contents
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes - Administrator
Yes - Administrator
Object ID Schema Definition

Object ID Schema Definition
Design Rules setup data (startup\\EquipmentAndSystems\\Piping\\DesignRules)

catalog
Yes
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
Catalog containing the list of rules

available for a project.
Piping-AttributeFilter
Piping-AttributeFilter
Piping-AutomaticParts
CATProduct
txt
CATProduct
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes - Administrator
No
Attribute filter used for catalog filtering
Piping-AutomaticParts
txt
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
Automatic parts rules. Used during

parts placement
Piping-Compatibility
CATProduct
No
No
No
No
Piping-Compatibility
txt
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
PipingCutoutClearance
CATProduct
No
No
No
No
Piping-CutoutClearance
txt
No
No
Yes
Yes - Administrator
CATProduct
No
No
No
No
txt
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
CATProduct
No
No
No
No
PipingDesignRules
Piping-FunctionPhysicalMapping
Piping-FunctionPhysical
Piping-ISOAttributeMapping
Piping-ISOAttributeMapping
txt
No
No
No
Yes - Administrator
Piping-ISOEndStyleMapping
CATProduct
No
No
No
No
Connectivity compatibility definition

rules. Used during parts placement
and catalog search.
Defines the allowable penetration

clearance values for Pipes.
Function/Physical mapping rules.
Used during parts placement and
2D/3D Integration and validation.
File containing the mapping between

CATIA Piping attributes and ISOGEN
attributes. Used in the ISOGEN
interface.
Piping Design
Piping-ISOEndStyleMapping
Piping-IsoSymbols
Piping-IsoSymbols
Page 439
txt
No
No
No
Yes - Administrator
CATProduct
No
No
No
No
txt
No
No
No
Yes - Administrator
AllDiagramsStarterDocument
CATProduct
No
No
No
Yes - Administrator
PipingDiagramStarterDocument
CATProduct
No
No
No
Yes - Administrator
PipingDiagramChecks
CATProduct
No
No
No
Yes - Administrator

CATIA Piping End Style attribute
values and ISOGEN End Style
attribute values. Used in the ISOGEN
interface.

CATIA Piping Symbol names and
ISOGEN Symbol names. Used in the
ISOGEN interface.
Schematic design starter document
containing all sample rules and
checks
Piping schematic design starter
document containing all Piping
sample rules and checks
Document containing all sample
design checks
Standard independent attributes

(startup\EquipmentAndSystems\\Piping\\DesignRules\\DiscreteValues)
PipingOKToCut.txt
txt
No
No
No
Yes - Administrator
PipingSymbolName.txt
txt
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
Discrete list that contain two values:

Yes or No. This is used to indicate if
an elbow can be cut or not.
Discrete list of part symbols used
during part creation.
insulation specification setup data (startup\EquipmentAndSystems\Piping\InsulationSpecification

And FG or GW)
PipingInsulationSpecifications
FG-PipeThicknessRule.CATProduct
FG-InsulationThicknessRangeTable.txt
catalog
Yes
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
CATProduct
No
No
No
No
txt
No
Yes
Yes
Yes - Administrator
Catalog containing the insulation

specification and insulation thickness
definition data.
Insulation thickness definition as a

function of size and temperature.
Part definition data (startup\\EquipmentAndSystems\\Piping\\PipingDesign\\ComponentCatalogs)

ConnectorAttributes
txt
Yes
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
GraphicRepresentations
txt
Yes
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
PipingResolvedCatalogs.zip
zip
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes - Administrator
File contains the list of attributes that

can be assigned to connectors. Used
during part build.
File contains the list of graphic
representations(Single, Double, etc.).
Used during part build.
Fully resolved piping catalog. Can be
used in ENOVIA-LCA as a sample
catalog. There is a specification
catalog that is syncronized with this
catalog (See PipingSpecificationsResolved.catalog).
Piping Design
Page 440
PipingResolvedCatalogsTemplate.zip
zip
No
Yes
Yes
Yes - Administrator
README.txt
txt
No
Yes
No
No
Template piping parts catalog. This

tempate can be used as a starter for
defining small nested piping catalogs.
For more information see the
README file.
This file contain instruction of how to
use the starter template catalog
defined in:
PipingResolvedCatalogsTemplate.zip
Parts Catalog
(startup\\EquipmentAndSystems\\Piping\\PipingDesign\\ComponentCatalogs\\Parametric)
PipingParts.catalog
catalog
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes - Administrator
B_TEE_WM-BW
B_TEE_WM-BW
CATPart
txt
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes - Administrator
Yes - Administrator
B_TEE_WM-BW
CATShape
No
Yes
Yes
Yes - Administrator
CATPart
txt
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes - Administrator
Yes - Administrator
EL_90_WM-BW-LR_Single
CATShape
No
Yes
Yes
Yes - Administrator
PIPE_HV-BENDABLE-BW
PIPE_HV-BENDABLE-BW
CATPart
txt
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes - Administrator
Yes - Administrator
catalog
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
CATDrawing
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
Piping2DSymbols-Customization
catalog
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes - Administrator
Piping2DSymbols-Customization
CATDrawing
No
Yes
Yes
Yes - Administrator
EL_90_WM-BW-LR
EL_90_WM-BW-LR
Piping Catalog points to all parts that

can be placed using the "Place Piping
Parts" command.
TEE Piping part definition
Design table definition
TEE Single line graphic
representation
Elbow Piping part definition
Elbow Single line graphic
representation
Pipe with bend Piping part definition
Drawing Customization data

(startup\EquipmentAndSystems\\Piping\\PipingDesign\\DrawingCatalogs)
PipingPartsAnnotations
ATSDefinitions-PipingParts
Catalog containing the association

between text template
Drawing document containing the text
templates for 3D object classes.
Associate 2D symbols to specific
Piping drawing customization. Such
as single line display, etc. This
catalog is used in conjunction with
GVS to decide when these special
application symbols should be used.
Drawing document containing the 2D
symbols that are used for piping
drawing customization.
Diagram Component Catalogs

(startup\EquipmentAndSystems\\Piping\\PipingDiagrams\\ComponentCatalogs)
PID_ANSI.catalog
catalog
Yes
No
No
Yes - Administrator
PID_ANSI_Equipment.catalog
catalog
No
No
No
Yes - Administrator
CATProduct
No
No
No
Yes - Administrator
catalog
No
No
No
Yes - Administrator
CATProduct
No
No
No
Yes - Administrator
catalog
No
No
No
Yes - Administrator
CATProduct
No
No
No
Yes - Administrator
PID_ANSI_Equipment_.CATProduct
PID_ANSI_Instruments.catalog
PID_ANSI_Instruments_.CATProduct
PID_ANSI_PipingFunction.catalog
PID_ANSI_PipingFunction_.CATProduct
Parent catalog of Piping diagram

components
Catalog of Piping diagram
components
Diagram reference components
components
components
PID_ANSI_OnOffSheets.catalog
PID_ANSI_OnOffSheets_.CATProduct
PID_DIN_....
PID_ISO_....
Piping Design
catalog
Yes
CATProduct
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
- Administrator
Page
441
Yes - Administrator
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
Catalog of Piping diagram off sheets

Diagram off sheets
Similar to the ANSI sample catalogs
Similar to the ANSI sample catalogs
Sample Data (startup\\EquipmentAndSystems\\Piping\\SampleData)

Drawing Annotation Data for Diagrams
PipingAnnotations
catalog
No
Catalog containing hierarchy of

sample diagram text templates
Design Rules
Rule for checking maximum bend

radius during Bendable creation.
Rule for checking maximum Run
Length during Bendable creation.
Rule for checking maximum Bendable
Length during Bendbale creation.
Rule_PipingBendablePipe_MaxBendRadius
CATProduct
No
No
No
No
Rule_PipingBendablePipe_MaxLength
CATProduct
No
No
No
No
Rule_PipingBendablePipe_MinGripLength
CATProduct
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes - Administrator
Sample Piping line definition. This

XML file when imported will generate
the sample Piping line list.
Sample parts list report in txt file

Sample parts list report in txt file
Sample parts list report in Excel file
Import Line List XML Definition
PipingLineIDImportSample
xml
No
Sample Reports
PipingDiagramPartReportSample
PipingPartsListReportSample
PipingPartsListReportSample
txt
txt
xls
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes - Administrator
Yes - Administrator
Yes - Administrator
PipingFromToReportSample.txt
txt
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
PipingFromToReportSample.xls
txt
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
PipingSpecificationStatusReportSample
txt
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
PipingSpecificationStatusReportSample
xls
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
PipingPipeCutLengthReportSample
txt
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
PipingPipeCutLengthReportSample
xls
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
This report contains the From

component and the TO component for
every line that is reported.
This report contains the From
component and the TO component for
every line that is reported.
Sample report for generating In-Spec
or Out-Of-Spec status. Report
definition is in txt format.
Sample report for generating In-Spec
or Out-Of-Spec status. Report
definition is in Excel format.
Sample report for generating Pipe cut
length. Definition is in txt file format.
Sample report for generating Pipe cut
length. Definition is in Excel file
format.
Piping Lines data (startup\\EquipmentAndSystems\\Piping\\SampleData\\PipingLines)

CATPipPipingLine
CATPspPipingLine20010507093800
catalog
Yes
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
CATProduct
No
Yes
Yes
Yes - Administrator
Pipe Specification data (startup\\EquipmentAndSystems\\Piping\Specification)
Piping Line catalog. Contains a list of

all the sample Piping lines.
Sample Piping line definition file.
There are more lines in this directory,
however, the definition is identical.
Piping Design
PipingSpecifications
Page 442
Specification catalog. This catalog will

be used during specification driven
parts placement and specification
driven bend definition.
Sample piping specification query
definition in a text file. This file shows
the format of how the external
definition of specificaiton query is
dfined.
Resolved specification catalog. This
specification catalog corresponds to
the sample resolved piping parts
catalog that is provided with the
product (See
PipingResolvedCatalogs.zip).
An empty specification template. Can
be used as a starter for defining a
specification catalog.
catalog
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes - Administrator
PipingSpecification_sample_CS150R
txt
No
Yes
Yes
Yes - Administrator
PipingSpecifications-Resolved.catalog
catalog
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes - Administrator
PipingSpecifications-Template.catalog
catalog
No
Yes
Yes
Yes - Administrator
CS150R-BoltingRules
CATProduct
No
No
No
No
CS150R-BoltingRules
txt
No
Yes
Yes
Yes - Administrator
CS150R-BranchingRules
CATProduct
No
No
No
No
CS150R-BranchingRules
txt
No
No
Yes
Yes - Administrator
CS150R-FunctionPhysicalMapping
CATProduct
No
No
No
No
CS150R-FunctionPhysical-Branch
txt
No
No
Yes
Yes - Administrator
CS150R-FunctionPhysical-BranchConnection
txt
No
No
Yes
Yes - Administrator
CS150R-FunctionPhysical-InLineInstrument
txt
No
No
Yes
Yes - Administrator
CS150R-FunctionPhysical-Reducer
txt
No
No
Yes
Yes - Administrator
CS150R-FunctionPhysical-Terminator
txt
No
No
Yes
Yes - Administrator
CS150R-FunctionPhysical-Pipe
txt
No
No
Yes
Yes - Administrator
CS150R-FunctionPhysical-Valve
txt
No
No
Yes
Yes - Administrator
CS150R-ShopFabricationRules
CATProduct
No
No
No
No
CS150R-ShopFabricationRules
txt
No
Yes
Yes
Yes - Administrator
CS150R-TurnRules
CATProduct
No
No
No
No
CS150R-TurnRules
txt
No
No
Yes
Yes - Administrator
CS150R-WeldingRules
CATProduct
No
No
No
No
CS150R-WeldingRules
txt
No
Yes
Yes
Yes - Administrator
Welding rules. Used during parts

placement to automate weld
selection.
Yes
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
Standard catalog. Contains definition

of data/rules that will vary by
standard.
Bolting rule definition file. Used during

bolt report generation and in ISO
extraction.
Branch rule definition file. Used during
parts placement to automatically
select the branch part.
Used during parts placement
Shop/Fabrication rules. Used during
part placement of weld objects.
Turn rule definition. Used during run
layout definition.
Standards definition (startup\\EquipmentAndSystems\\Piping\\Standards)

PipingStandards
catalog
ASTL-BendingRules
CATProduct
No
No
No
NoPage 443
ASTL-BendingRules
txt
No
Yes
Yes
Yes - Administrator
ASTL-DimensionCode
txt
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
ASTL-EndDimension
txt
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
ASTL-EndDimensions
CATProduct
No
No
No
No
txt
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
ASTL-LengthRules
CATProduct
No
No
No
No
ASTL-LengthRules
txt
No
Yes
Yes
Yes - Administrator
ASTL-MaterialCategory
txt
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
ASTL-MaterialCode
txt
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
ASTL-NominalSize
txt
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
ASTL-PartCode
txt
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
ASTL-PartName
txt
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
ASTL-Rating
txt
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
ASTL-Schedule
txt
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
CATProduct
No
No
No
No
Piping Design
ASTL-EndStyle
ASTL-PipeDimensions
ASTL-PipeDimensions
txt
No
Yes
Yes
Yes - Administrator
ASTL-WallThickness
txt
No
Yes
No
Yes - Administrator
Bending rules. Bending rule definition.

Used to validate manufacturability of
bendable Pipes.
File containing the allowable values
for dimension code. Used during
catalog creation and part build.
Dimension at the endof the fitting.
This dimension is based on the the
outside diameter, rating and the end
style of the part.
for End Style. Used during catalog
creation and part build.
Length rules. Used during run
creation to identify design violations in
relation to length.
for Material Category. Used during
for Material Code. Used during
for Nominal Size. Used during catalog
for Part Code. Used during catalog
for Part Name. Used during catalog
for Rating. Used during catalog
for Schedule. Used during catalog
Pipe dimension definition. Such as out
side diameter, wall thickness, bend
diameter. Used during run definition
and parts placement.
for Wall Thickness. Used during
Piping Design
Page 444

This section discusses checking a document for design errors and applying design rules to a document. You need to have
the product Knowledgeware in order to use these functions fully. However, a sample file is provided with 3D applications,
and a sample catalog is provided with 2D applications; several checks and design rules are incorporated into the sample file
and sample catalog. If you use the sample file to create your 3D documents you do not have to obtain Knowledgeware in
order to use these functions, but without Knowledgeware, you cannot create new checks or new design rules, you cannot
edit them, and you cannot import checks into your document. The sample catalog provided with 2D applications allows you
to import checks and rules into your document, however you need Knowledgeware to create new checks and rules and edit
existing checks and rules.
Enough documentation is provided here to enable you to use the sample file and catalog. However, to be able to use all
Knowledgeware functions you need to refer to the documentation for that product.
Before you can use this function you must make sure the settings are correct. Click Tools - Options - General Parameters and Measure and click on the Language tab. Under Language check Load extended language
libraries. Either check All Packages, or uncheck this option and load the packages you will be using.
A second setting you must make sure of is: Click Tools - Options - Infrastructure and click the Tree
Customization tab. Activate Parameters and Relations.
Importing Checks from Knowledgeware
(3D) Opening a Sample Document
Piping Design
Page 445

This task shows you how to load and use Knowledgeware packages (may also be known as dictionaries).
You should see Knowledgeware documentation if you want to learn more about it.
Knowledgeware provides certain functions that are used by all applications. In search and report
definition functions, for instance, it allows users the capability of searching for objects, or defining how a
report should be structured. This is achieved by 'exposing' objects and their attributes in Knowledgeware
through the use of what are known as packages. A package is specific to an application or group of
applications, and contains a list of objects and their attributes that have been exposed. The
PlantShipLayout package, for instance, contains objects and attributes that are used by several
applications, whereas the PipingLayout package contains the list of objects and attributes for piping
applications. These packages must be loaded before you can use certain functions.
There is a setting you must enable before you can load and use these packages.
1.
2.
Click Tools - Options - General - Parameters and Measure and click on the Language tab.
Under Language check Load extended language libraries. Either check All Packages, or
uncheck this option and load the packages you will be using.
If you check All Packages then packages for all applications - including many you do not need - will
be loaded, and may slow operations. You may instead want to load selected packages.
3.
Page 446
Piping Design
There are several ways in which you can view the contents of each package. One way is to open the
Knowledge Expert workbench, click the Expert Check button
and click OK in the Check Editor
to display
dialog box to display the Check Editor: XXXX dialog box. Click the Browser button
the browser. This displays packages in the left column, objects in the middle column, and attributes
(and programs) of the selected object in the third column. Check the Show Inherited Attributes
checkbox if you need to.
4.
Following is a list of packages used by Equipment & Systems applications:
PlantShipLayout - Several applications, should always be loaded.
ProductPackage - All applications, should always be loaded.
CompAccessLayout - Compartment & Access
ElectricalShipbuilding - 2D electrical
Conduitlayout - Raceway & Conduit Design
EquipLayout - Equipment Arrangement
HangerLayout - Hanger Design
HVACLayout - HVAC applications
InstrLayout - Several applications
PipingLayout - Piping applications
PlantArrangement - Plant layout
RacewayLayout - Raceway & Conduit Design
TubingLayout - Tubing applications
WaveguideLayout - Waveguide applications
Piping Design
Page 447
Piping Design
Page 448
Importing Checks and Rules from

Knowledgeware
This task shows you how to import checks (and rules) from Knowledgeware into your 3D document.
Obviously, you must have Knowledgeware installed to do so.
Before you can use this function you must make sure the settings are correct. Click Tools - Options General - Parameters and Measure and click on the Language tab. Under Language check Load
extended language libraries. Either check All Packages, or uncheck this option and load the packages
you will be using.
A second setting you must make sure of is: Click Tools - Options - Infrastructure and click the Tree
Customization tab. Activate Parameters and Relations.
1. With your document open, make the root object in the specifications tree active, and then click Start Infrastructure - Knowledge Expert. The application will open and you will see new entries in the
specifications tree. Now you have to import the sample checks and rules provided with this
application.
2.
button. The Load Report box will display. Navigate to the directory where
Click the Insert Rules
the sample files are stored and import the files for the application you are running. The default
directory and files you need to import are listed below:
For Piping Design: ...intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\MultiDiscipline\SampleData
Import the following files for Piping Design, HVAC Design and Tubing Design:
PhysicalPartsConnectivityCheck.CATProduct
PhysicalPartsInconsistentNameCheck.CATProduct
3. The checks and rules you have imported will display in the specifications tree.
Piping Design
Page 449
4. Double click on the root product in the specifications tree to exit Knowledgeware and return to your
workbench.
Piping Design
Opening a Sample Document
Page 450
This task shows you how to open the sample documents provided with this 3D application. The sample documents have some checks and rules
incorporated and you can use them without having Knowledgeware.
1.Click File - Open. The File Selection box will open.
2.Navigate to the directory where the sample files for the application you are running are stored by default:
...intel_a\startup\EquipmentAndSystems\MultiDiscipline\SampleData
3.See Importing Checks and Rules from Knowledgeware for a list of sample files.
4.When you open one of these document a message will display warning you that the file is Read Only. Click OK on the message box. The sample
file will open with all the checks and rules displayed in the specifications tree.
5.Make your changes and then use the File - Save As function to save the file and give it a new name.
Piping Design
Page 451

This task shows you how to check a document for design errors.
This function allows you to check the entire document for certain errors, such as unconnected elements.
The full list of errors for which you can check is given below. The procedure is the same whether you have
Knowledgeware installed, or you are using the sample files (for 3D) or catalog (for 2D) provided with this
application.
1. With your document open, right click on the entry RuleBase in the specifications tree. In the drop
down menu that displays, select RuleBase object. In the sub-menu that displays select Manual
Complete Solve. Your document will be checked for design errors.
Piping Design
Page 452
2. The checks which came up with errors will have a red button against them. The checks that had no
errors will have a green button. In the image below the check Unconnected Elements failed, which
means there is one or more element in your document that is not connected to anything.
3. To see which elements failed the check, right click on the check, in this case UnconnectedElem. In the
drop down box that displays select UnconnectedElem object. In the sub-menu that shows select
Highlight Failed Components. The failed elements will be highlighted in the specifications tree. Some
elements will also highlight in the viewer.
4. For diagrams products you can check for the following errors using the sample catalog provided
with this application:
General Design Checks have the following in addition to unconnected elements:
Unconnected Coincident Element: Elements and connectors can be coincident, or occupying the
same space, but not be connected to each other.
Unconnected On/Off Sheet: On/Off sheet connectors in your document that are not linked to other
documents.
Flow Direction Conflict: Flow direction is not consistent in linked elements.
Invalid Zone Boundary: A zone has a gap in the boundary.
Invalid Part Type: Part type selected has invalid attributes.
Invalid Part Number: Part type is incompatible with defined function.
Undefined Part Number: No part number assigned.
Other checks are:
Inconsistent Name Check: This application employs a naming convention. This error means that
an element has been named in violation of the rules defined by you.
Inconsistent Nominal Size: This signifies that elements of different nominal size have been
connected.
Inconsistent Pipe Spec Check: This signifies that elements with different specifications have been
connected.
Piping Design
Page 453
Inconsistent Equiv Diameter Check: Ducts of different equivalent diameter have been connected.
Out of Pipe Spec (for piping part functions only): Pipe specification is not derived from the line.
Out of Duct Spec: Duct specification is not derived from the line.
For 3-D products you can perform the inconsistent name and unconnected element checks using the
sample file.
Piping Design
Defining Options
This section explains how to define certain options.
Specifications Tree
Page 454
Piping Design
Page 455

This task shows you how to find sample data that is provided with the application if you are using a
platform other than Windows.
In Windows, catalogs and other sample data are usually stored in a subdirectory under intel_a. Intel_a
in turn resides in whichever drive and directory you have installed the application in. Directory paths for
sample data in this user guide refer to the intel_a directory. You can find the directories used in other
platforms by referring to the list below.
Windows: ...\intel_a\
AIX: .../aix_a/
HPUX: .../hpux_a/
IRIX: .../irix_a/
SOLARIS: .../solaris_a/
Piping Design
Page 456
Changing Specifications Tree Setting

This task shows you how to change the specifications tree settings so that the objects in the tree display
in an organized manner of your choice.
The default display setting for objects in the specifications tree is single-tier, and the objects appear in
the order in which they were placed in the document.
By changing the Tools -> Options settings they can be organized in two ways, by product and, as an
additional step, by application group also. If you do not check the option as described below you will be
unable to collapse the specification tree display and it looks as shown below. After you check the
Products option the objects will be organized under the Products node and the tree can be collapsed.
The Products node is simply an organizational element. After you check the Application Grouping
option the objects will be further grouped by type.
1. With your document open, go to Tools -> Options -> Infrastructure -> Product Structure
and click the Product Structure tab. Check to activate the Products option. The objects in the
specifications tree will be organized under the Products node.
2. To organize the specifications tree in application groups go to Tools -> Options -> Equipment
& Systems and click the Display tab.
Piping Design
Page 457
Under Specifications Tree, activate the Show application grouping option: Objects in the
specifications tree will be organized under type of object. (You can expand the Products node to
see the ungrouped elements.)
When working with Design Rules such as Attribute Filters and

FunctionPhysicalMapping, or during parts creation, turn on the Relations and
Parameters options.
3. Go to Tools -> Options -> Infrastructure -> Product Structure and click the Tree
Customization tab.
The Specification Tree Order table displays: You can toggle any of the entries from Yes to No
and back by clicking in the Activated column.
Piping Design
Working with ENOVIA

This section discusses some of the set up and customizing processes for ENOVIA.
Setup for Enovia
Using Catalogs
Page 458
Piping Design
Page 459
Setting Up for ENOVIA

This task lists some of the options that need to be set, and steps that need to be taken, before using
ENOVIA.
In general, you need to do the normal setup procedure when you use ENOVIA. However, there are some
processes that are done differently and these are listed in this task. They are explained in more detail
elsewhere in this section.
1. Most project resources need to be saved in ENOVIA. The project resource management file needs to
be set up so that it is pointing to resources in ENOVIA.
2. Some options need to be set differently. Click Tools - Options to get to the Options dialog box and
then:
Select General and the Document tab. In the Linked Document Localization window select ENOVIA
LCA and click the UP button. The ENOVIA LCA line should be the first in the list.
Select Catalog Editor in the Infrastructure section. Check: Allow family component dynamic
resolution in catalog. In the Folder field enter or navigate to the directory where resolved catalog
parts will be generated. This only needs to be done before saving a resolved parts catalog in
ENOVIA. You can leave the option checked.
3. Catalogs need to be saved in ENOVIA in a certain way. This is discussed elsewhere.

4. Cross document relationships: To ensure that cross document links are properly managed in the
ENOVIA environment, you should correctly set the value of the resource
"PublicationBasedConnections" in the project resource management file. See Understanding Project
Resource Management for more information. Also, in both the CATIA and ENOVIA environments, the
following environment variable should be defined: CrossDocLink=1
Piping Design
Page 460
Using Catalogs
This task gives an overview of how catalogs must be stored and used in ENOVIA.
1. Catalogs that are stored in ENOVIA must point to parts that are resolved. This means that no design
table can be associated with them, and all values must be defined.
2. Only catalogs with descriptions that point to CATPart or CATProduct documents should be stored in
ENOVIA. Catalogs with descriptions that point to text files must be kept on disk. Examples are design
rules and standards catalogs.
3. The entire master catalog should not be stored as one entity. Users should divide their catalogs so
that there are no more than about 500 parts for each catalog.
Users should create a separate catalog for each family - gate valve, pipe with bends, etc. This is how
the sample catalog provided with this application is organized. This type of organization is not only
necessary to conserve memory resources, but is also easier to work with.
See Creating Sub-Catalogs to learn how you can do this.
Click here to see the list of resources that can be placed in ENOVIA.
Page 461
Piping Design

The following resources - identified by discipline below - must be placed in ENOVIA. As of Release 13, resources
not mentioned here should not be placed in ENOVIA.
HVAC Discipline
RESOURCE
COMMENT
HVACParts.catalog
CATPspHVACLine.catalog
HVAC_ANSI.catalog
Diagrams catalog
HVAC_ANSI_Equipment.catalog
Diagrams catalog
HVAC_ANSI_HVACFunctions.catalog
Diagrams catalog
HVAC_ANSI_Offsheets.catalog
Diagrams catalog
Piping Discipline
RESOURCE
COMMENT
PipingParts-Resolved.catalog
CATPspPipingLine.catalog
PID_ANSI.catalog
Diagrams catalog
PID_ANSI_Equipment.catalog
Diagrams catalog
PID_ANSI_Instruments.catalog
Diagrams catalog
PID_ANSI_Offsheets.catalog
Diagrams catalog
PID_ANSI_PipingFunctions.catalog
Diagrams catalog
PipingSpecifications.catalog
This catalog needs to be regenerated and pushed every time

you modify the Piping Parts catalog.
PipingSpec_F-Master.catalog
This catalog needs to be regenerated and pushed every time

you modify the Piping Parts catalog.
Equipment Discipline
RESOURCE
COMMENT
PipingEquipmentAndNozzle-Res.catalog
HVACEquipmentAndNozzle.catalog
TubingEquipmentAndNozzle-Res.catalog
WaveguideEquipmentAndNozzle-Res.catalog
ElectricalEquipmentAndComponent.catalog
Waveguide.catalog
Waveguide_Equipment.catalog
Waveguide_WaveguideFunction.catalog
3-D electrical catalog
Page 462
Piping Design
Waveguide_Offsheets.catalog
Structure Discipline
RESOURCE
COMMENT
AISC_Resolved.catalog
AISC_Bigscale.catalog
StructureMaterials.CATMaterial
Tubing Discipline
RESOURCE
COMMENT
TubingParts.catalog
CATTubTubingLine.catalog
Tubing_SAE.catalog
Diagrams catalog
Tubing_SAE_Equipment.catalog
Diagrams catalog
Tubing_SAE_Instruments.catalog
Diagrams catalog
Tubing_SAE_OnOffSheets.catalog
Diagrams catalog
Tubing_SAE_TubingFunction.catalog
Diagrams catalog
TubingSpecifications.catalog
This catalog needs to be regenerated and pushed

every time you modify the Piping Parts catalog.
Waveguide Discipline
RESOURCE
COMMENT
WaveguideParts.catalog
CATPspWaveguideLine.catalog
Electrical Discipline
RESOURCE
COMMENT
Electrical_ANSI.catalog
Diagrams catalog
Electrical_ANSI_Equipment.catalog
Diagrams catalog
Electrical_ANSI_Offsheets.catalog
Diagrams catalog
Electrical_ANSI_PartFunctions.catalog
Diagrams catalog
Electrical_Cables.catalog
Diagrams electrical catalog

Hanger Discipline
RESOURCE
HangerParts.catalog
COMMENT
Page 463
Piping Design
Conduit Discipline
RESOURCE
COMMENT
ConduitParts.catalog
CATCndConduitLine.catalog
Raceway Discipline
RESOURCE
COMMENT
RacewayParts.catalog
CATRwyRacewayLine.catalog
Other
RESOURCE
CATMidZone.catalog
SpaceReservation.catalog
CompartmentAccess-Resolved.catalog
COMMENT
Piping Design
Workbench Description
The Piping Design workbench has the following toolbars.
Page 464
Piping Design
Fabricate Toolbar
Rename Toolbar
Penetration Management Toolbar
Page 465
Piping Design

The Design Create toolbar contains the following tools.
See Creating a Run

See Routing at an Offset of a Routable
See Route a Run along a Spline
See Route a Run Within a Pathway
See Placing a Part on a Run
See Placing a Hole on a Part
Page 466
Piping Design
Fabricate Toolbar
The Fabricate toolbar contains the following tools.
See Managing Spools

Generate ISO: See Creating an Isometric Drawing from a 3D Document
View ISO: See Creating an Isometric Drawing from a 3D Document
Page 467
Piping Design

The Build Create toolbar contains the following tools.
See Building Piping Parts

See Create Connectors
See Modify Product Subtype
Page 468
Piping Design

The Piping Line Management toolbar contains the following tools.
See Create a Line ID

See Select a Line ID or Query a Line ID
See Transfer Members of a Line ID
See Rename a Line ID
See Delete a Line ID
See Merging Line IDs
See Import a Line ID
Page 469
Piping Design

The Design Modify Toolbar contains the following tools.
See Edit Part Parameters

See Flipping Elements
See Update Part
See Changing the Size or Spec of a Part
See Connecting Parts

See Disconnecting Parts
See Connect a Run
See Disconnecting a Run
See Creating an Offset Connection Between Segments
See Create graphic representations for a part
See Display Flow Direction
Page 470
Piping Design

The General Environment Tool Bar contains the following tools:
See Generating Detail Information
See Changing the Current Axis

See Using Offset Planes
Advanced Offset Plane

See Manipulation Handle Mode
Toggle Dimming Mode
Snap to steps off current axis
Snap to steps off last position
Snap to XY construction plane
Snap to all construction planes

Snap to elevation (Z) construction plane
Snap to Drafting elements
Page 471
Piping Design

The General Design Toolbar contains the following tools.
Align Toolbar
Align Sides: See Aligning Elements
Align Center: See Aligning Elements
Rotate to Align: See Aligning Elements
See Distributing Elements
Align Planes: See Aligning Elements
Snap Toolbar
See Snap Resources Together
Snap Three Points: See Quick Snap Resources
Snap Center of Polygon: See Quick Snap Resources
Snap Surface: See Quick Snap Resources
Page 472
Piping Design
Rename Toolbar
The Rename toolbar contains the following tools.
See Rename an Object
Page 473
Piping Design
Page 474
Glossary
A
annotation
ATS
attribute
Used in schematic diagrams to annotate lines and components.

Annotations may be entered manually, derived from an attribute, or
placed by means of a text template as part of an annotations catalog.
Annotation Tag Style. In schematic diagrams; employed when creating a
text template.
Characteristics of an object, such as length, flow rate, etc. Also referred
to as property.
B
boundary
branch
branching
A two or three dimensional reservation of space, used to separate or

define portions of an area.
Routed object that is connected to another routed object at a mid-point
between nodes.
The act of routing from an existing routable. The routing starts at a point
between two nodes, not from a node.
C
catalog
child
closed loop run
compass
component group
conduit line
connector
constraint
contour
coordinates
A collection of parts and parts component catalog data. There are several
types of catalog, such as a specifications catalog, standard catalog.
A status defining the genealogical relationship between two objects.
A run whose ends are joined to each other.
A tool for defining direction.
Used in schematic diagrams. Two or more connected components
assembled to make up an individual assembly that can be stored and
placed from a catalog
A mechanism for identifying and organizing Conduit routes and the
components placed in them. A line ID.
Location on a resource (components, parts, item reservation, etc.) used
to attach other resources. Connectors can be created, modified or
deleted.
A geometric or dimension relation between two elements.
The physical shape of an area.
The XYZ locations.
D
definition
The physical characteristics of an element. Changing the definition

changes the shape of an element.
Piping Design
discrete values
distribution system
document
downcomer
Page 475
Values, usually of an attribute, that are pre-defined. Instead of entering a

value you select a value in a drop-down box.
An object used for organizing and grouping elements, mainly routables
and resources, that distribute some commodity (fluid, air, etc.).
The file in which a drawing or a project is created, sometimes also
referred to as model. Document is the preferred terminology.
The legs of a hanger.
E
element
Any of the features contained in a document, such as component, line,

etc.
F
fabrication
face
feature dictionary
Used in HVAC Design. A contiguous grouping of connected HVAC parts.

Analogous to spools in Piping Design or welded assemblies in Tubing
Design.
A surface on an object, usually item reservation or part.
The document in which object classes are defined.
G
grab
graphic representation
A Windows feature for clicking and dragging.

A geometric representation of an object. An object may have multiple
graphic representations.
H
HVAC line
hanger
hole
A mechanism for identifying and organizing HVAC routes and the

Supports used for routing cables, pipes, etc.
An opening through an object.
I
I & C loop
intel_a
item reservation
Stands for Instrumentation & Control Loop. It is an object used for

grouping and organizing instrumentation and control objects.
A Windows directory in which this application is stored and executed by
default.
A two or three dimensional reservation of space, in which one or more
objects can be placed.
Piping Design
Page 476
L
line ID
A mechanism for identifying and organizing routes and components. Conduit,

HVAC, Piping, Raceway,Tubing lines and I & C loops are line IDs.
M
master
member
mirror
The controlling object in a relationship. Such a relationship can be

created between some objects.
Belonging to or part of, as in belonging to a line ID.
N
node
nozzle
Symbols that mark the end of segments in routables. They can be used
to move or manipulate segments.
A piece of pipe welded to a piece of equipment or vessel with a flanged
end to which a pipe can be connected.
O
object class
offset plane
An object class is the classification or type of object.

A command used to define a reference plane.
P
parent
part
part types
path reservation
pathway
piping line
plane manipulator
properties
A status defining the genealogical relationship between two objects.

The geometric representation of a 3D object.
Object classes.
A two or three dimensional reservation of space, in which assembly lines,
conveyor belts, etc., can later be created.
Path reservation.
A mechanism for identifying and organizing piping routes and the components
placed in them. A line ID.
A geometric tool to change the orientation, alignment, plane and location
of a plane that is to be created.
Characteristics of an object, such as length, flow rate, etc. Also referred
to as attribute.
Piping Design
Page 477
R
raceway line
reference plane
routable
run
A mechanism for identifying and organizing raceway routes and the

A plane that has been defined as an aid to performing certain functions,
such measuring distance.
Anything that can be routed, typically: run, path reservation and
boundary.
A two or three dimensional reservation of space, in which pipes and
parts can later be placed.
S
scaling
set point
slave
snap
space reservation
specifications tree
spool
standard
support line
system
An operation that resizes features to a percentage of their initial sizes.

The alignment point for a routable, such as run or path reservation, for
which a section is defined. The set point determines, for example,
whether the routing line drawn for a boundary represents the bottom left,
bottom right, or bottom center of the boundary. There are three possible
set points for a boundary and nine possible set points for a path
reservation and run.
The following object in a relationship. Such a relationship can be created
between some objects.
Join, as in snap together. Also snap to a grid, in which the position of an
object is automatically adjusted to a grid.
A two or three dimensional reservation of space, in which equipment,
pipes and parts can later be placed.
A graphic display of the organizational structure of all elements in a
document.
A grouping of objects. All objects in a spool must be contiguous and connected to
each other.
A collection of specifications.
A location on a routable used as a reference point for routing when the
centerline is not used. It is also used in placing parts. The support line is
defined by the set point (see above).
A mechanism for organizing and grouping elements, mainly routables and
resources.
T
tubing line
turn angle
A mechanism for identifying and organizing tubing routes and the components
placed in them. A line ID.
The angle formed between two lines.
Piping Design
waveguide line
welded assembly
Page 478
A mechanism for identifying and organizing waveguide routes and the

Used in Tubing Design. A contiguous grouping of connected tubing parts.
Analogous to spools in Piping Design and fabrication in HVAC Design.
Piping Design
Index
A
activate parent
add new nominal size
AIX, sample data
analyze related objects
attribute filter
attributes
adding to a standard
adding to general design rules
associating to a connector
creating
generic
attributes, computed
auto parts
convert
query
axis
changing the current
B
bendables
design checks
extracting data
bolt BOM report
branching a run
building parts, requirements
Page 479
Piping Design
C
cache mode
CATCache directory location
make wireframe geometry visible
catalog
creating
creating sub-catalogs
modifying
specifications
terminology
catalogs
updating line IDs
catalogs in ENOVIA
CATDUA V5
change axis and snap compass
changing the size or spec of a part
checks
checking a document
importing from Knowledgeware
open a sample document
clash detection
class and attribute, user defined
closed loop routable
command
Activate Products Parent
Adjust Run Extremity
Align Center
Align Side
Align Two Planes
Analyze Item
Build Connectors
Build New Unique Reference
Page 480
Piping Design
Build Piping Part

Clash Detection (Off)
Clash Detection (On)
Clash Detection (Stop)
Connect Parts
Create an Offset Route
Create an Offset Segment Connection
Create Line ID
Create Spool
Delete Line ID
Disconnect Parts
Distribute
Force Update
Generate ISO
Import Line ID
Manage Graphic Representations
Merge Line ID
Move/Rotate Part on the Run
Place Equipment/Part from schematic
Place Hole
Place New Part Under Active Parent
Place Piping Part
Query Auto Parts
Quick Translate
Rename Line ID
Resize/Respec Part
Rotate to Align
Route a Run
Route a Run from schematic
Select/Query Line ID
Set Object Type
Page 481
Piping Design
Show/Hide Connector
Snap
Snap Center of Polygon
Snap Surface
Snap Three Points
Transfer Elements
Transfer Line ID
Transfer Run
Update Part
Validate Run Turns
View ISO Drawing
compass
routing in 3D with
computed attributes
add to object name
displaying in Edit - Properties dialogs
Piping
Connector Attributes file
connectors
associate attributes
creating
duplicating
manipulating with compass
modify on reference part
modifying or deleting
plane manipulator
show/hide
create new unique reference
create resolved parts using batch
creating a catalog
creating light objects
creating reports
Page 482
Piping Design
cross document connection

custom reports
customizing settings
D
datum point
defining plane
design rules
importing from Knowledgeware
Knowledgeware
open a sample document
Overview
dictionary, Knowledgeware
display connectors
display values
documents
saving
drawing production
creating symbols
generate drawing
settings
drawing, 3-D to 2-D
Ductulator
E
edit properties of an object
electrical part connector
elements
aligning
Page 483
Piping Design
distributing
transfer
end styles
ENOVIA
setup
Enovia
create a product
importing poduct
organizing work packages
save operation
saving work package
Enovia directory structure
ENOVIA, customizing
ENOVIA, user tasks
exception, schematic driven design
extremity
adjusting the
F
feature dictionary
comparing
NLS name for class, attribute
open file without CATfct
Filter Attributes
filter for Line ID
filter shown properties
flip
flow direction
change
display
force update
functional physical classes
Page 484
Piping Design
map
G
generate drawing
generate resolved parts/sections
generative view style
generic attribute
graphic representations
defining
manage
grid step
setup
H
hole
modifying
placing on part
querying properties
HPUX, sample data
I
insert report in drawing
IRIX, sample data
ISOGen setup, options
isometric drawing
create
mapping tables
setup
Page 485
Piping Design
K
Knowledgeware
checking a document
importing checks
opening sample document
using packages
Knowledgeware checks
L
Line ID
attribute filter file/entry
changing size/spec of parts in
creating
customizing
deleting
displaying properties
filter attributes
filter/select
importing
merge
modifying the properties of
querying
renaming
select/filter
transfer members
updating catalog
line thickness
Page 486
Piping Design
M
macro
creating a shortcut for
manage publications
mapping functional physical classes
migrating V4 models
directory structure
modifying a hole
move/rotate in-line parts
moving document
multi-CAD document
defining plane for connector
N
network
analyze
analyze for connections
node edit table
nodes
deleting
display coordinates of
moving
opening a closed run
nozzle connector
O
object
auto-route between
edit or display properties of
filter properties of
Page 487
Piping Design
query for connections

renaming
object class
managing
object naming rules
add computed attribute
objects
search for
offset connection
create between segments
offset planes
open file without CATfct
options
defining
naming rules
Options settings
options settings
Options, settings
P
packages, Knowledgeware
parent-child relationship
parts
adding nominal size
assigning values
connecting
create
create graphic representation
create resolved parts using batch
creating light object
define properties
define type
Page 488
Piping Design
disconnecting
exporting V4 to V5
flip
inserting
modifying connector on reference
move in-line parts
multi-place
override parameters
parametric to resolved
place under active parent
place using schematic
placing
requirements for building
rotate in-line parts
rotating
values assigned
pathways
route within a
penetration management
penetrations
add object
associate
creating cutout sketch
query for
setup
piping lines
Comparator
exporting V4 to V5
plane manipulator
preview parts
product parent
project registration model
exporting
Page 489
Piping Design
project resource management

Access field
alias, using
checking errors
file
Location field
organizing resources
resource list
selecting project
Type field
Visible
properties
change display order
edit or display
filtering
internal names
publication based connections in PRM
publications
manage
publish connectors
Q
query
a Line ID
query for penetrations
Quick Snap
R
rename
Line ID
Page 490
Piping Design
objects
report
bolt BOM
define a query
define format
format
generate
generating from macro
insert in drawing
query recommended
toolbar shortcut
reservation
routing from
resolve parts/sections
resource
Quick Snap
rotate using definition panel
snap and rotate
snap together
resource description
resource map
resources
controlled by PRM
create parent-child relationship
guide to
routable
display information about
fixing broken
route at an offset of
routing from end of
routing
align to surface
along a spline
Page 491
Piping Design
at a slope
at an offset of routable
auto-route
edgeline
edgeline to offset plane
from item reservation
in 3D
modes
parallel to a run
run
section parameters
using a schematic
within pathway
rules tables
design tables
modifying
run
changing a section
changing angle of segment
close
creating
modifying
move or adjust extremity
open
single or double display
transfer
transitional objects
turn radius error
using definition dialog box
Page 492
Piping Design
sample data
finding on various platforms
save documents
schematic
design
schematic driven design
analyze
associate objects
create an Exception
place parts
routing
search command
sections
parametric to resolved
segment
fit for parts assembly
segments
align adjacent
create an offset connection between
make parallel to compass base plane
make parallel to offset plane
make parallel to Z axis
position relative to a plane
selecting a Line ID
setup, application
show/hide connectors
Solaris, sample data
specifications
creating a catalog
specifications catalog
adding specifications
default rules
spool
add/remove members
Page 493
Piping Design

create in new document
creating
deleting
modify properties
renaming
select/query
transfer
standards
adding an attribute
creating and modifying
stretchable, length attribute
T
toggle manipulator handle mode
toolbars
Build Create
Design Create
Design Modify
Fabricate
General Design
General Environment
Piping Line Management
Rename
transfer elements
transfer run
transferring document
transitional objects
turn errors
turn radius, invalid
Page 494
Piping Design
U
unique reference
update connections
update part button
updating lines catalog
V
V4 migration
migrating model
V4 to V5 Integration
attribute filter file
setup data
V4 to V5 integration
comparing outputs
export parts from V4 model
exporting catalog parts
exporting piping lines
exporting standards data
exporting tables
exporting V4 classes
exporting V5 dictionary
import XML
importing parts form software
migrating the model
values
assigning to parts
viewing related objects
Page 495
Piping Design
W
work package
connections
cross document connection
manage publications
workbench
description
entering the
Page 496

Pipug

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Pipug

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Version 5 Release 15

Make Segment Parallel to Reference Plane

Exporting V4 Piping Lines

Penetration Management Setup

Using This Guide

Using This Guide

These tasks can be completed in about 15 minutes.

Entering the Workbench

Set Working Units and Grid

Click the OK button to complete the customization of the working units.

Changing the Current Axis

The axis for the selected object is displayed.

. The Run dialog box opens.

for the routing Mode.

. Click OK in the Section dialog box.

5. Double click to complete routing. The run displays as a solid.

Placing a Part on a Run

The valve is placed.

You can also update a part - see Placing Parts.

Managing Piping Lines

. The Create Line ID dialog box displays.

. The Rename Line ID dialog box opens showing the list of

Select/Filter Line IDs

. The Select/Query Line ID dialog box displays.

Importing Line IDs

Click the Import Line ID button

When the routine is complete, the Results Summary will display.

. The Select/Query Line ID

Modifying the Properties of a Line ID

Select the line ID whose properties you want to modify.

Querying a Line ID or its Members

Click the Select/Query Line ID button

. The Select/Query Line ID dialog box appears.

Transfer Members of a Line ID

. The Transfer Members of Line IDs dialog box opens.

8. Click OK. The members will be transferred.

Merging Line IDs

. The Merge Line IDs dialog box displays

An object, such as a tube.

The end of a run or middle of a run.

Item reservation face.

Point-to-point: routing will be directly between two points indicated by clicking.

Slope routing: see Slope Routing.

Directional routing: see Routing with a Compass.

Edgeline: see Edgeline Routing.

Branch at Center: see Branching a Run.

Define the Section parameters:

a. Select the Section Type button.

Rectangular. Enter or select the:

Circular. Enter or select the:

Flat Oval: Enter or select the:

Radius Corner: Enter or select the:

Double Ridge: Enter or select the:

c. Select OK on the Section dialog box.

if you want to use the intelligent design capabilities

NominalSize: This is the nominal size you selected in the menubar.

. The first click displays a field showing the number of

Routing with Defined Nodes

Routing from the End of a Routable

The Routing dialog box is displayed.

2. Define the routing parameters.

The Routing dialog box is displayed.

Routing a Run at a Slope